RADWIN 2000

Broadband Wireless Transmission System

USER MANUAL

RELEASES 2.5.00

UM 2000-2500/09.10
 RADWIN 2000
User Manual
Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RADWIN Ltd. (RADWIN hereafter). No
part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written
approval by RADWIN.
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and
other intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the
RADWIN products and any software components contained therein are proprietary products
of RADWIN protected under international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with
RADWIN.
The RADWIN name is a registered trademark of RADWIN Ltd. No right, license, or interest to
such trademark is granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest
shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark.
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the User Manual
or any other RADWIN documentation or products. You are prohibited from, and shall not,
directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute, license, or sell any product that supports
substantially similar functionality based or derived in any way from RADWIN products.Your
undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement.
This Agreement is effective upon your opening of a RADWIN product package and shall
continue until terminated. RADWIN may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of
any term thereof. Upon such termination by RADWIN, you agree to return to RADWIN any
RADWIN products and documentation and all copies and portions thereof.
For further information contact RADWIN at one of the addresses under Worldwide
Contacts below or contact your local distributor.
Disclaimer
The parameters quoted in this document must be specifically confirmed in writing before they
become applicable to any particular order or contract. RADWIN reserves the right to make
alterations or amendments to the detail specification at its discretion. The publication of
information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other rights of RADWIN,
or others.
Trademarks
WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000 are trademarks of RADWIN Ltd.
Windows 2000, XP Pro, Vista, Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are trademarks
of Microsoft Inc.
Mozilla and Firefox are trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Other product names are trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 i

 RADWIN Worldwide Offices
Corporate and EMEA Regional Headquarters
Corporate and EMEA Headquarters North America Regional
27 Habarzel Street Headquarters
Tel Aviv, 69710
900 Corporate Drive
Israel Mahwah, NJ, 07430
Tel: +972.3.766.2900
USA
Fax: +972.3.766.2902
Tel: +1-877-RADWIN US
Email: [email protected] (+1-877 723-9468)
Tel: +1-201-252-4224
APAC Regional Headquarters Fax: +1-201-621-8911
Email: [email protected]
53A, Grange Road #15-02
Customer Support - North America:
Spring Grove ,249566
Singapore Hours: 9 am - 6 pm EST (Mon - Fri)
Tel: +65.6638.7864 Email: [email protected]
Email: [email protected]

RADWIN Regional Offices

RADWIN Brazil RADWIN Mexico
Av. Chucri Zaidan, 920 – 9º Quinto #20 Col El Centinela
São Paulo, 04583-904 Mexico, DF, O4450
Brazil Mexico
Tel: +55.11.3048-4110 Tel: +52 (55) 5689 8970
Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected]

RADWIN Peru RADWIN India

Av. Antares 213 E-13,B-1 Extn., Mohan Co-operative Industrial Estate
Lima, 33 New Delhi, 110 044
Peru India
Tel: +511.6285105 Tel: +91-11-40539178
Fax: +511-990304095 Email: [email protected]
Email: [email protected]

RADWIN Philippines RADWIN South Africa

5 Bur Bank St. P.O. Box 3554, Rivonia
Laguna, Belair, Santa Rosa Johannesburg ,2128
Laguna Philippines South Africa
Tel: +63 928 7668230 Tel: +27 (0)82 551 5600
Email: [email protected] Email: [email protected]

RADWIN Italy and Spain RADWIN Central America

Piazza Arenella 7/H Calle La Cañada # 108-E
Napoli ,80128 Jardines de la Hacienda
Italy Ciudad Merliot El Salvador
Tel:+390815564116 Tel: +503 2278-5628
Fax: +39335433620 Email: [email protected]
Email: [email protected]

RADWIN South East Asia

All Season Mansion
87/38 Wireless Road Lumpinee
Bangkok ,10330
Thailand
Tel: +66811707503
Email: [email protected]

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 ii

 Regulatory Compliance
General Note
This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means
that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to
comply. The frequency bands in which the system operates may be “unlicensed” and in these
bands, the system can be used provided it does not cause interference.

FCC - Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when using the outdoor
antenna kits in the United States (or where FCC rules apply), only those
antennas certified with the product are used. The use of any antenna other
Warning than those certified with the product is expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47
CFR part 15.204.

It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that when configuring the

radio in the United States (or where FCC rules apply), the Tx power is set
according to the values for which the product is certified. The use of Tx
Warning power values other than those, for which the product is certified, is
expressly forbidden by FCC rules 47 CFR part 15.204.

Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced

installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety
codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate
government regulatory authorities. Failure to do so may void the product
warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and
Caution financial liabilities. Resellers or distributors of this equipment are not liable
for injury, damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation
of outdoor units or antennas. The installer should configure the output
power level of antennas according to country regulations and antenna type.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 iii

 Where Outdoor units are configurable by software to Tx power values other
than those for which the product is certified, it is the responsibility of the
Warning Professional Installer to restrict the Tx power to the certified limits.

This product was tested with special accessories - indoor unit (IDU or PoE),
FTP CAT-5e shielded cable with sealing gasket, 12 AWG grounding cable -
Warning which must be used with the unit to insure compliance.

Indoor Units comply with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) These devices may not cause harmful interference.
(2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Canadian Emission Requirements for Indoor Units
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numẻrique de la classe B est conforme ả la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
China MII
Operation of the equipment is only allowed under China MII 5.8GHz band regulation
configuration with EIRP limited to 33 dBm (2 Watt).
India WPC
Operation of the equipment is only allowed under India WPC GSR-38 for 5.8GHz band
regulation configuration.
Unregulated
In countries where the radio is not regulated the equipment can be operated in any regulation
configuration, best results will be obtained using Universal regulation configuration.
Safety Practices
Applicable requirements of National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70; and the National
Electrical Safety Code, ANSI/IEEE C2, must be considered during installation.

NOTES:
1. A Primary Protector is not required to protect the exposed wiring as long as the exposed
wiring length is limited to less than or equal to 140 feet, and instructions are provided to
avoid exposure of wiring to accidental contact with lightning and power conductors in
accordance with NEC Sections 725-54 (c) and 800-30.
In all other cases, an appropriate Listed Primary Protector must be provided. Refer to Articles
800 and 810 of the NEC for details.
2. For protection of ODU against direct lightning strikes, appropriate requirements of NFPA
780 should be considered in addition to NEC.
3. For Canada, appropriate requirements of the CEC 22.1 including Section 60 and additional
requirements of CAN/CSA-B72 must be considered as applicable.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 iv

Brief
Table of Contents
Part 1: Basic Installation
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 2 Installing the Link
Chapter 3 Site Preparation
Chapter 4 Hardware Installation
Chapter 5 Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager
Chapter 6 The RADWIN Manager: Main Window
Chapter 7 Configuring the Link
Chapter 8 Site Configuration
Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Part 2: Site Synchronization
Chapter 10 Hub Site Synchronization
Chapter 11 Using the RADWIN GSU
Part 3: Advanced Installation
Chapter 12 Monitored Hot Standby Installation Procedure
Chapter 13 The RADWIN Ethernet Ring
Chapter 14 VLAN Functionality with RADWIN 2000
Chapter 15 Software Upgrade
Chapter 16 FCC/IC DFS Installation Procedure
Part 4: Field Installation Topics
Chapter 17 Pole and Wall Installation
Chapter 18 Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines
Chapter 19 Preloading an ODU with an IP Address
Chapter 20 Changing the Factory Default Band
Chapter 21 Link Budget Calculator
Part 5: Product Dependent Features
Chapter 22 Spectrum View
Chapter 23 Quality of Service
Part 6: Product Reference
Appendix A Technical Specifications
Appendix B Wiring Specifications
Appendix C Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceiver
Appendix D MIB Reference
Appendix E External Alarms Specification
Appendix F RF Exposure
Appendix G Regional Notice: French Canadian
Index

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 v

Full
Table of Contents
Note ............................................................................................................................... i
RADWIN Worldwide Offices ............................................................................................. ii
Regulatory Compliance....................................................................................................iii
Part 1: Basic Installation
Chapter 1 Introduction
Welcome to RADWIN 2000! ......................................................................... 1-1
RADWIN 2000 highlights: ............................................................................ 1-1
What’s new in Release 2.5.00 ...................................................................... 1-2
Key Applications.......................................................................................... 1-2
Cellular Backhaul ..................................................................................... 1-2
Broadband Access ................................................................................... 1-3
Key Features of RADWIN 2000 ................................................................. 1-3
Components of a RADWIN 2000 Link............................................................ 1-7
The Outdoor Unit (ODU) ............................................................................ 1-7
The Indoor Unit (IDU) ............................................................................... 1-8
New style IDU-E for both WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000 .............................. 1-8
IDU-C ........................................................................................................... 1-9
Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices ............................................................. 1-9
Basic PoE Device ........................................................................................... 1-9
GSU .................................................................................................... 1-10
Antennas .............................................................................................. 1-11
RADWIN Manager .................................................................................. 1-11
RADWIN Network Management System (RNMS) .......................................... 1-12
Accessories ........................................................................................... 1-13
Documentation supplied with RADWIN 2000 ................................................ 1-13
How to Use this Manual............................................................................. 1-13
A Little Terminology ................................................................................. 1-14
Conventions Used in this Manual ................................................................ 1-15
Notifications .......................................................................................... 1-15
Typographical conventions ....................................................................... 1-15
General....................................................................................................... 1-15
Software ..................................................................................................... 1-16
Windows Terminology ............................................................................. 1-16
Viewing and Printing ............................................................................... 1-17
Chapter 2 Installing the Link
Overview.................................................................................................... 2-1
Installation ................................................................................................. 2-3
Step 1, Start the Wizard ............................................................................. 2-3
Step 2, System Parameters ......................................................................... 2-3
Changing the Link Password ....................................................................... 2-5
Step 3, Channel Settings ............................................................................ 2-7
Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings ....................................................... 2-9
About Single and Dual Antennas ................................................................. 2-9
Dual Antennas at Both Sites ........................................................................ 2-10
Single Antennas at Both Sites ...................................................................... 2-11
Single at One Site, Dual Antennas at the Other ............................................. 2-11
Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters ......................................... 2-12
Step 5, Hub Site Synchronization Settings .................................................. 2-16
Step 6, Services ....................................................................................... 2-16
Limitations on the use of Asymmetric Allocation ........................................... 2-19
Asymmetric Allocation and Collocation ........................................................ 2-19
Asymmetric Allocation and TDM ................................................................ 2-20

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 vi

 TDM Services selection ............................................................................ 2-20
Modulation Rate Selection ........................................................................ 2-23
Setting Monitored Hot Standby Mode ......................................................... 2-23
Ethernet Ring ........................................................................................ 2-24
Ethernet QoS ......................................................................................... 2-24
Setting the TDM Jitter Buffer .................................................................... 2-24
Step 7, TDM Clock Configuration ............................................................... 2-27
Step 8, Installation Summary and Exit ....................................................... 2-29
Chapter 3 Site Preparation
Planning the Link Site .................................................................................. 3-1
Overview ................................................................................................ 3-1
The Site Survey...........................................................................................3-1
Introduction ............................................................................................ 3-1
Recommended Equipment .......................................................................... 3-1
Stage 1: Preliminary Survey ......................................................................... 3-2
Stage 2: Physical Survey .............................................................................. 3-3
Additional Outdoor Site Requirements ........................................................... 3-4
Additional Indoor Site Requirements ............................................................. 3-4
Stage 3: RF Survey...................................................................................... 3-4
RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites ................................ 3-4
Chapter 4 Hardware Installation
Safety Practices...........................................................................................4-1
Preventing overexposure to RF energy ..........................................................4-1
Grounding ...............................................................................................4-1
Protection against Lightning ....................................................................... 4-2
General .................................................................................................. 4-2
Package Contents........................................................................................ 4-3
ODU Package Contents .............................................................................. 4-3
IDU-E package containing: ......................................................................... 4-4
IDU-C Package Contents ............................................................................ 4-4
External Antenna Package Contents ............................................................. 4-5
Additional Tools and Materials Required ........................................................4-5
Tools and Materials ...................................................................................4-5
Cables and connectors ...............................................................................4-5
Hardware Installation Sequence ................................................................... 4-6
Outdoor installation .....................................................................................4-7
Preparing the ODU before Deployment ......................................................... 4-7
Mounting the ODU .................................................................................... 4-7
Mounting external antennas ....................................................................... 4-7
Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices ....................................................4-8
Outdoor Connections .................................................................................4-8
Indoor Installation.......................................................................................4-8
Installing IDU-E ...................................................................................... 4-8
IDU-E Installation ..........................................................................................4-8
Mounting the IDU-C .................................................................................. 4-9
Connecting power to the IDU .................................................................... 4-12
Connecting the ODU to the IDU ................................................................. 4-12
Installing a Link using PoE Devices ............................................................. 4-12
Connecting User Equipment ...................................................................... 4-13
Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas .................................................. 4-13
Chapter 5 Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager
Installing the RADWIN Manager Application ..................................................5-1
Minimum System Requirements ................................................................... 5-1
Installing the Software .............................................................................. 5-1
Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager ................................................... 5-2
The RADWIN Manager log-on Concept..........................................................5-4

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 vii

 Log-on Errors and Cautions.......................................................................... 5-6
Unsupported Device .................................................................................. 5-6
Incorrect IP Address .................................................................................5-7
Incorrect Password ...................................................................................5-7
Invalid Read/Write Community String ........................................................... 5-7
Logging in to the Over-the-Air Site ............................................................... 5-7
Continuing without an IP Address ................................................................. 5-8
Changing the Log-On Password ................................................................... 5-8
First steps...................................................................................................5-9
Default RADWIN 2000 Settings ................................................................. 5-11
Using RADWIN Manager Spectrum View ..................................................... 5-11
Chapter 6 The RADWIN Manager: Main Window
One Manager for all RADWIN Radio Products ................................................6-1
The Main Window of the RADWIN Manager................................................... 6-1
The RADWIN Manager Toolbar..................................................................... 6-2
Main Menu Functionality .............................................................................. 6-3
Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window........................................... 6-4
Chapter 7 Configuring the Link
Overview .................................................................................................... 7-1
Configuration .............................................................................................. 7-3
Step 1, Start the Wizard .............................................................................. 7-3
Step 2, System Parameters ......................................................................... 7-3
Step 3, Channel Settings .............................................................................7-4
Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings ....................................................... 7-8
Changing Number of Antennas and Tx Power ................................................. 7-8
TX Power, Antenna Gain and Cable Loss .........................................................7-8
Switching Between Single and Dual Antennas .................................................7-9
Switching Between MIMO and Diversity Modes ............................................. 7-10
Step 5, Hub Site Synchronization Settings .................................................. 7-10
Step 6, Services ....................................................................................... 7-10
Step 7, TDM Clock Configuration ............................................................... 7-11
Step 8, Configuration Summary and Exit .................................................... 7-12
Chapter 8 Site Configuration
Configuring the Site.....................................................................................8-1
Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site ..................................................8-1
Functions on the left of the dialog box:............................................................8-2
Functions at the top of the dialog box: ............................................................8-2
Viewing System Details ................................................................................ 8-3
Viewing Air Interface Details ........................................................................ 8-3
Changing the Transmit Power ...................................................................... 8-4
Hub Site Sync .............................................................................................8-4
Site Management: IP Address, VLAN and Protocol ......................................... 8-5
Configuring the ODU Address ...................................................................... 8-5
Configuring VLAN Settings .......................................................................... 8-6
Lost or forgotten VLAN ID .......................................................................... 8-8
Enable / Disable Telnet Access ....................................................................8-8
Displaying the Inventory .............................................................................. 8-8
Security Features ........................................................................................ 8-9
Changing the Link Password ..................................................................... 8-10
RADWIN Manager Community Strings ........................................................ 8-10
Editing Community Strings............................................................................8-10
Forgotten Community string ......................................................................... 8-11
Link Lock Security Feature ........................................................................ 8-11
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................................... 8-13
Ethernet Properties.................................................................................... 8-15

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 viii

 Configuring the Bridge ............................................................................. 8-15
ODU Mode...................................................................................................8-16
IDU Aging time ............................................................................................ 8-16
Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode ............................................................... 8-17
VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service: Configuration ......................................... 8-18
Setting the Maximum Information Rate (MIR) .............................................. 8-19
What is the MIR........................................................................................... 8-19
What is it for ...............................................................................................8-19
TDM MHS Status ....................................................................................... 8-21
Setting External Alarm Inputs..................................................................... 8-21
Resetting .................................................................................................. 8-22
IDU Detection ........................................................................................... 8-23
Backup/Restore of ODU Software Files........................................................ 8-24
Backup ODU Software to a File .................................................................. 8-24
Restoring ODU Software or Configuration .................................................... 8-24
Muting the alignment tone buzzer............................................................... 8-25
Configuration with Telnet........................................................................... 8-25
Chapter 9 Monitoring and Diagnostics
Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics)................................................9-1
Link Compatibility ........................................................................................ 9-3
TDM Loopbacks...........................................................................................9-3
Local Line Loopback .................................................................................. 9-6
Remote Reverse Loopback ......................................................................... 9-6
Remote Line Loopback .............................................................................. 9-6
Local Internal Loopback .............................................................................9-7
Reinstalling and Realigning a Link................................................................. 9-7
The Link Budget Calculator .......................................................................... 9-8
Throughput Checking .................................................................................. 9-8
Performance Monitoring...............................................................................9-8
The Monitor Log .......................................................................................9-9
Saving the Monitor Log...................................................................................9-9
Viewing Performance Reports ....................................................................... 9-10
Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar.........................................................9-13
Setting Air Interface Thresholds .................................................................... 9-13
Events, Alarms and Traps .......................................................................... 9-14
The Events Log ...................................................................................... 9-14
RADWIN Manager Traps .......................................................................... 9-16
Setting the Events Preferences .................................................................. 9-17
Saving the Events Log ............................................................................. 9-17
Active Alarms ........................................................................................ 9-18
Viewing Recent Events ............................................................................ 9-18
Reverting Alert Messages ........................................................................... 9-19
Other Advanced Preferences ...................................................................... 9-20
Enable and Disable Checking for Software Updates ....................................... 9-20
Setting the RADWIN Manager Language ..................................................... 9-20
Setting SNMP Parameters ......................................................................... 9-20
Remote Power Fail Indication ..................................................................... 9-20
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 9-20
Replacing an ODU ..................................................................................... 9-21
Restoring Factory Setup............................................................................. 9-22
Online Help............................................................................................... 9-22
Customer Support ..................................................................................... 9-22
Part 2: Site Synchronization
Chapter 10 Hub Site Synchronization
What is Hub Site Synchronization?.............................................................. 10-1
Hardware Installation ................................................................................ 10-3

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 ix

 Connecting an HSS Unit ........................................................................... 10-3
Using a Single HSS Unit ........................................................................... 10-4
Using More than One HSS Unit .................................................................. 10-5
Condition 1: Cabling Sequence...................................................................... 10-5
Condition 2: Total HSS Cable Length .............................................................10-6
HSS Error Notification ................................................................................ 10-7
ODU/HSS Unit Connection Pinout ............................................................... 10-7
Radio Frame Pattern (RFP)......................................................................... 10-7
Without HSS .......................................................................................... 10-7
RFP and HSS ......................................................................................... 10-8
RFP: General Radio Frame Pattern ............................................................. 10-9
RFP: RADWIN 2000 Considerations ............................................................ 10-9
RFP: WinLink 1000 Considerations ........................................................... 10-12
HSS Status LED on the IDU-C and New Style IDU-E ................................... 10-13
Link Configuration and HSS...................................................................... 10-13
Site Configuration and HSS ...................................................................... 10-15
Chapter 11 Using the RADWIN GSU
What is it for............................................................................................. 11-1
GSU Functionality ...................................................................................... 11-1
Typical GSU Scenarios ............................................................................... 11-1
Independent Distributed Sites ................................................................... 11-1
Multiple Distributed Sites with Communication .............................................. 11-2
Cascaded Sites using Shifted Phase Transmission ......................................... 11-3
GSU Redundancy ...................................................................................... 11-3
GSU Kit Contents....................................................................................... 11-4
GSU Installation ........................................................................................ 11-4
Overview .............................................................................................. 11-4
Preparing the GSU for Use ........................................................................ 11-5
Mounting the GSU .................................................................................. 11-5
Configuring the GSU ............................................................................... 11-5
Getting Started ............................................................................................ 11-5
Using Site Configuration for the GSU .............................................................11-7
GSU Preferences .................................................................................. 11-12
GSU Monitoring and Diagnostics ............................................................... 11-12
GSU Telnet Support................................................................................. 11-12
Software Update for GSUs........................................................................ 11-13
Part 3: Advanced Installation
Chapter 12 Monitored Hot Standby Installation Procedure
What is a RADWIN Monitored Hot Standby.................................................. 12-1
What RADWIN MHS provides ..................................................................... 12-2
Equipment Protection .............................................................................. 12-2
Air-Interface Protection ............................................................................ 12-2
Purpose of this Chapter ............................................................................. 12-3
Who Should Read this ............................................................................... 12-3
RADWIN MHS Kit Contents......................................................................... 12-3
Installing a RADWIN MHS .......................................................................... 12-3
Maintaining a RADWIN MHS Link................................................................ 12-9
IDU Replacement ................................................................................... 12-9
ODU Replacement ................................................................................ 12-10
Switching Logic ....................................................................................... 12-11
Switching from Primary Link to Secondary Link ........................................... 12-11
Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link ................................ 12-12
System Operation description ................................................................. 12-14
Chapter 13 The RADWIN Ethernet Ring
Scope ....................................................................................................... 13-1

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 x

 What is an Ethernet Ring ........................................................................... 13-1
Some terminology: ................................................................................. 13-1
RADWIN Ethernet Ring .............................................................................. 13-2
Ethernet Ring Topologies Supported by RADWIN......................................... 13-4
Protection Switching .................................................................................. 13-5
Hardware Considerations ........................................................................... 13-5
Special Case: 1 + 1 Ethernet Redundancy ................................................... 13-6
Using RADWIN Manager to Set up a Ring.................................................... 13-7
Chapter 14 VLAN Functionality with RADWIN 2000
VLAN Tagging - Overview .......................................................................... 14-1
VLAN Terminology .................................................................................. 14-1
VLAN Background Information on the WEB .................................................. 14-1
VLAN Tagging ........................................................................................ 14-1
QinQ (Double Tagging) for Service Providers ............................................... 14-2
VLAN Untagging ..................................................................................... 14-2
Port Functionality ................................................................................... 14-2
Ingress Direction.......................................................................................... 14-4
Egress Direction........................................................................................... 14-4
VLAN Availability ....................................................................................... 14-6
VLAN Configuration Using the RADWIN Manager ......................................... 14-6
Management Traffic and Ethernet Service Separation .................................... 14-7
VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service: Configuration ......................................... 14-7
Chapter 15 Software Upgrade
What is the Software Upgrade Utility? ......................................................... 15-1
Upgrading an Installed Link........................................................................ 15-1
Software Update for GSUs.......................................................................... 15-5
Chapter 16 FCC/IC DFS Installation Procedure
FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Links: Background ....................................................... 16-1
FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation............................................................. 16-1
FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration........................................................ 16-4
Part 4: Field Installation Topics
Chapter 17 Pole and Wall Installation
ODU Mounting Kit Contents........................................................................ 17-1
Mounting an ODU on a Pole ....................................................................... 17-2
Mounting an ODU on a Wall ....................................................................... 17-3
Mounting an External Antenna ................................................................... 17-3
Mounting a Connectorized ODU Horizontally................................................ 17-4
Chapter 18 Lightning Protection and Grounding Guidelines
Grounding for Antenna Cable ..................................................................... 18-1
Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units ........................................................... 18-2
ODU Grounding ...................................................................................... 18-2
IDU Grounding ....................................................................................... 18-2
External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding................................... 18-3
Internal ESD Protection circuits .................................................................. 18-7
Chapter 19 Preloading an ODU with an IP Address
Why this is Needed? .................................................................................. 19-1
Required Equipment .................................................................................. 19-1
The procedure .......................................................................................... 19-2
Tip: How to Recover a Forgotten ODU IP Address ....................................... 19-6
Chapter 20 Changing the Factory Default Band
Why this is Needed.................................................................................... 20-1
Required Equipment .................................................................................. 20-1
The procedure .......................................................................................... 20-1
Changing Band for DFS.............................................................................. 20-5

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xi

 Special Products or Features: Entering a License Key ................................... 20-5
Chapter 21 Link Budget Calculator
Overview .................................................................................................. 21-1
User Input ............................................................................................ 21-1
Link Budget Calculator Internal Data .......................................................... 21-1
Calculations .............................................................................................. 21-2
EIRP .................................................................................................... 21-2
Expected RSS and Fade Margin ................................................................. 21-2
Min and Max Range ................................................................................ 21-2
Service ................................................................................................. 21-2
Availability ............................................................................................ 21-2
Antenna Height ...................................................................................... 21-3
About the Fresnel Zone.............................................................................. 21-3
Running the Link Budget Calculator ........................................................... 21-5
Part 5: Product Dependent Features
Chapter 22 Spectrum View
What is Spectrum View? ............................................................................ 22-1
Running Spectrum View in Installation Mode ............................................... 22-1
Understanding the Spectrum View Display .................................................. 22-4
Information Displayed ............................................................................. 22-4
Changing the Display .............................................................................. 22-5
Restricting the Panels to be Displayed ........................................................ 22-8
Saving a Spectrum Analysis ...................................................................... 22-8
Management Integration ........................................................................ 22-10
Chapter 23 Quality of Service
Availability ................................................................................................ 23-1
QoS - Overview ......................................................................................... 23-1
Setting up QoS.......................................................................................... 23-2
Disabling QoS ........................................................................................... 23-4
Part 6: Product Reference
Appendix A Technical Specifications
Scope of these Specifications .......................................................................A-1
ODU ...........................................................................................................A-1
IDU ............................................................................................................A-3
PoE Device - Indoor, AC...............................................................................A-5
PoE Device - Outdoor, DC ............................................................................A-6
GSU .........................................................................................................A-7
Antenna Characteristics ...............................................................................A-8
Appendix B Wiring Specifications
ODU-IDU Cable ...........................................................................................B-1
ODU/HSS Unit Connection Pinout .................................................................B-1
User Port Connectors..................................................................................B-2
LAN Port .................................................................................................B-2
Trunk Ports - E1/T1 RJ45 Connector ............................................................B-2
Hot Standby Port RJ-11 .............................................................................B-2
IDU (all models) Alarm Connector ................................................................B-3
DC Power Terminals ....................................................................................B-4
IDU-C & E ...............................................................................................B-4
DC PoE ...................................................................................................B-4
Appendix C Small Form-factor Pluggable Transceiver
IDU-C SFP Support ......................................................................................C-1
Appendix D MIB Reference
Introduction............................................................................................... D-1
About the MIB ........................................................................................ D-1

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xii

 Terminology ........................................................................................... D-1
Interface API ............................................................................................. D-1
Control Method ....................................................................................... D-1
Community String .................................................................................... D-2
Private MIB Structure ................................................................................. D-2
MIB Parameters ......................................................................................... D-3
Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB ................................................. D-4
MIB Parameters ...................................................................................... D-6
MIB Traps.................................................................................................D-23
General ................................................................................................D-23
Trap Parameters ....................................................................................D-24
RADWIN Manager Traps ............................................................................D-28
Appendix E External Alarms Specification
External Alarms Specification........................................................................E-1
IDU-C and new style IDU-E Alarms ..............................................................E-1
Appendix F RF Exposure
Appendix G Regional Notice: French Canadian
Procédures de sécurité ............................................................................... G-1
Généralités ............................................................................................. G-1
Mise à la terre ........................................................................................ G-1
Protection contre la foudre ........................................................................ G-2
Précautions de sécurité pendant le montage de ODU ...................................... G-2
Connecter la terre à IDU-C ........................................................................ G-3
Installation sur pylône et mur...................................................................... G-3
Contenu du kit de montage ODU ................................................................ G-3
Montage sur un pylône ............................................................................. G-4
Montage sur un mur ................................................................................ G-5
Montage d'une antenne externe ................................................................. G-6
Contenu du kit de montage d'une antenne externe ........................................ G-6
Index

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xiii

List of Figures
FIGURE 1-1 TYPICAL CELLULAR BACKHAUL APPLICATION ............................................... 1-3
FIGURE 1-2 TYPICAL BROADBAND ACCESS APPLICATION ............................................... 1-3
FIGURE 1-3 TYPICAL WIFI BACKHAUL APPLICATION ....................................................1-3
FIGURE 1-4 ODU FORM FACTORS .......................................................................... 1-7
FIGURE 1-5 NEW STYLE IDU-E - FRONT VIEW (NOTE NEW HSS LED ON THE LEFT) .......... 1-8
FIGURE 1-6 NEW STYLE IDU-E: REAR PANEL ............................................................1-8
FIGURE 1-7 IDU-C, ETHERNET ONLY, FRONT PANEL ................................................... 1-9
FIGURE 1-8 IDU-C, 16 E1/T1 PORTS, FRONT PANEL ..................................................1-9
FIGURE 1-9 BASIC POE DEVICE - SHOWING THE RADIO ETHERNET PORT .......................... 1-9
FIGURE 1-10 RUGGEDIZED DC-POE DEVICE: INPUT IS -20 TO -60 VDC (SINGLE INPUT).. 1-10
FIGURE 1-11 GENERAL GSU CONFIGURATION .......................................................... 1-10
FIGURE 1-12 ODU WITH INTEGRATED FLAT PANEL ANTENNA ...................................... 1-11
FIGURE 1-13 EXTERNAL ANTENNAS FOR USE WITH RADWIN 2000 ............................. 1-11
FIGURE 1-14 RADWIN MANAGER WINDOW............................................................ 1-12
FIGURE 1-15 MENU NAVIGATION IN THE RADWIN MANAGER ..................................... 1-16
FIGURE 1-16 SITE CONFIGURATION WINDOW WITH OPEN MANAGEMENT PANEL ............... 1-17
FIGURE 2-1 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD ................................................................. 2-3
FIGURE 2-2 INSTALLATION WIZARD, SYSTEM DIALOG BOX ............................................ 2-4
FIGURE 2-3 INSTALLATION WIZARD, SYSTEM DIALOG BOX FILLED OUT ............................ 2-5
FIGURE 2-4 CHANGE LINK PASSWORD DIALOG BOX ..................................................... 2-6
FIGURE 2-5 LOST OR FORGOTTEN LINK PASSWORD RECOVERY .......................................2-6
FIGURE 2-6 CHANNEL SETTINGS - AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION ...............................2-7
FIGURE 2-7 CHANNEL SETTINGS - SHOWING AVAILABLE INSTALLATION RATES ...................2-8
FIGURE 2-8 CHANNEL SETTINGS - SHOWING AVAILABLE CHANNEL BANDWIDTHS ................ 2-8
FIGURE 2-9 TRANSMISSION POWER AND ANTENNA PARAMETERS .................................... 2-9
FIGURE 2-10 ANTENNA CONFIGURATION DIALOG ...................................................... 2-13
FIGURE 2-11 ANTENNA TYPE CHANGE WARNING ....................................................... 2-13
FIGURE 2-12 ANTENNA PARAMETERS CHANGE WARNING ............................................. 2-14
FIGURE 2-13 TX POWER LIMITS .......................................................................... 2-14
FIGURE 2-14 ANTENNAS CONFIGURED FOR TWO DUAL AND TX POWER 5 DBM ................ 2-15
FIGURE 2-15 HSS SETTINGS............................................................................... 2-16
FIGURE 2-16 SERVICES AND RATES - RADWIN 2000 C ONLY .................................... 2-17
FIGURE 2-17 SERVICES AND RATES FOR RADWIN 2000 COLLOCATED AS A CLIENT ......... 2-17
FIGURE 2-18 SERVICES AND RATES FOR MODELS RADWIN 2000 L AND RADWIN 2000 PDH2-18
FIGURE 2-19 SERVICES AND RATES - RADWIN 2000 C MASTER, RADWIN 2000 CLIENTS2-20
FIGURE 2-20 TDM TYPE SELECTION ..................................................................... 2-21
FIGURE 2-21 TDM SERVICE PORT SELECTION .......................................................... 2-21
FIGURE 2-22 TDM SERVICE PORT SELECTION - SEVEN SERVICES SELECTED..................... 2-22
FIGURE 2-23 SERVICES AND RATES - SERVICES CHOSEN ............................................ 2-22
FIGURE 2-24 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG: AVAILABLE RATES .................................... 2-23
FIGURE 2-25 CHOOSING HOT STANDBY MODE ........................................................ 2-24
FIGURE 2-26 TDM JITTER BUFFER CONFIGURATION ................................................. 2-25
FIGURE 2-27 TDM JITTER BUFFER CONFIGURATION - TBFR EVALUATION BAR ................ 2-26
FIGURE 2-28 SERVICES AND TDM DELAY SET - LINK READY FOR EVALUATION ................. 2-26
FIGURE 2-29 TDM PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION (1)............................................... 2-27
FIGURE 2-30 TDM PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION (2)............................................... 2-28
FIGURE 2-31 TDM PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 2-28
FIGURE 2-32 INSTALLATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY ................................................ 2-29
FIGURE 2-33 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER INSTALLATION WITH LOADED TRUNKS2-30
FIGURE 2-34 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER INSTALLATION WITH ASYMMETRIC CAPACITY AL-
LOCATION - NO HSS ............................................................................................. 2-31
FIGURE 2-35 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER INSTALLATION WITH ASYMMETRIC CAPACITY AL-

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xiv

LOCATION - HSS ENABLED ...................................................................................... 2-32
FIGURE 4-1 ODU MOUNTING KIT ...........................................................................4-3
FIGURE 4-2 CONNECTORIZED ODU - FRONT AND REAR VIEWS ...................................... 4-3
FIGURE 4-3 INTEGRATED ODU - FRONT AND REAR VIEWS ............................................ 4-4
FIGURE 4-4 IDU-E- FRONT VIEW ...........................................................................4-4
FIGURE 4-5 IDU-C PACKAGE CONTENTS - THE IDU-C, ETHERNET ONLY .......................... 4-4
FIGURE 4-6 IDU-C PACKAGE CONTENTS - THE IDU-C, 16 E1/T1 PORTS ........................ 4-5
FIGURE 4-7 IDU-C PACKAGE CONTENTS - THE MOUNTING KIT AND DC POWER PLUGS ......... 4-5
FIGURE 4-8 TYPICAL INSTALLATION (WITH EXTERNAL ANTENNA) LEFT: RADWIN 2000 RIGHT: WIN-
LINK 1000 ............................................................................................................4-6
FIGURE 4-9 NEW STYLE IDU-E: REAR PANEL ............................................................4-9
FIGURE 4-10 IDU-C FRONT PANEL ......................................................................... 4-9
FIGURE 4-11 IDU-C - A PERSPECTIVE VIEW ............................................................. 4-9
FIGURE 4-12 IDU-C FRONT PANEL LEDS .............................................................. 4-10
FIGURE 4-13 IDU-E FRONT PANEL LEDS .............................................................. 4-10
FIGURE 4-14 IDU-C POWER CONNECTORS ............................................................. 4-12
FIGURE 4-15 BEEP SEQUENCE FOR ANTENNA ALIGNMENT............................................ 4-14
FIGURE 5-1 LAN PORTS ON THE FRONT PANEL OF THE IDU-C.......................................5-3
FIGURE 5-2 PINGING AN UNINSTALLED AND UNCONFIGURED LINK ...................................5-3
FIGURE 5-3 FIRST TIME LOG-ON WINDOW ................................................................5-4
FIGURE 5-4 EXTENDED LOG-ON WINDOW ................................................................. 5-4
FIGURE 5-5 LOG ON WINDOW EXPOSING THE USER TYPES. ........................................... 5-5
FIGURE 5-6 UNSUPPORTED DEVICE MESSAGE ............................................................. 5-7
FIGURE 5-7 UNREACHABLE DEVICE MESSAGE ............................................................. 5-7
FIGURE 5-8 INVALID COMMUNITY STRING MESSAGE ....................................................5-7
FIGURE 5-9 LOGGING ON TO AN OVER-THE-AIR SITE ................................................... 5-8
FIGURE 5-10 OPENING RADWIN MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION - IDU-C ....5-9
FIGURE 5-11 SPECTRUM VIEW - OPENING DISPLAY ON INSTALLED LINK ......................... 5-12
FIGURE 6-1 MAIN WINDOW, WIRELESS LINK IS ACTIVE ..............................................6-2
FIGURE 7-1 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD ..............................................................7-3
FIGURE 7-2 CONFIGURATION WIZARD, SYSTEM DIALOG BOX ......................................... 7-4
FIGURE 7-3 CHANNEL SETTINGS DIALOG BOX - AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION...............7-5
FIGURE 7-4 SEARCHING FOR THE BEST OPERATING CHANNEL ......................................... 7-6
FIGURE 7-5 CHANNEL SETTINGS WITHOUT AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SELECTION .....................7-6
FIGURE 7-6 CHANNEL FREQUENCY OPTIONS............................................................... 7-7
FIGURE 7-7 CHOOSING AN “OTHER” OPERATING CHANNEL FREQUENCY............................ 7-7
FIGURE 7-8 TRANSMISSION POWER AND ANTENNA PARAMETERS .................................... 7-8
FIGURE 7-9 ANTENNA CONFIGURATION DIALOG WITH OPENED TYPE SELECTION .................7-9
FIGURE 7-10 HSS SETTINGS............................................................................... 7-10
FIGURE 7-11 SERVICES AND RATES DIALOG ............................................................ 7-11
FIGURE 7-12 TDM PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION .................................................... 7-12
FIGURE 7-13 CONFIGURATION WIZARD EXIT SUMMARY ............................................. 7-12
FIGURE 7-14 MAIN WINDOW OF THE MANAGER AFTER CONFIGURATION .......................... 7-13
FIGURE 8-1 CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ................................................................8-2
FIGURE 8-2 AIR INTERFACE DETAILS ....................................................................... 8-3
FIGURE 8-3 CHANGING THE TRANSMIT POWER ..........................................................8-4
FIGURE 8-4 HSS STATUS .....................................................................................8-5
FIGURE 8-5 MANAGEMENT ADDRESSES - SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX .....................8-6
FIGURE 8-6 CONFIGURING MANAGEMENT TRAFFIC VLAN SETTINGS .................................8-7
FIGURE 8-7 ENABLE/DISABLE TELNET ACCESS ........................................................... 8-8
FIGURE 8-8 INVENTORY WINDOW ...........................................................................8-9
FIGURE 8-9 AVAILABLE SECURITY FEATURES ..............................................................8-9
FIGURE 8-10 CHANGING THE COMMUNITY STRING.................................................... 8-11
FIGURE 8-11 ALTERNATIVE COMMUNITY DIALOG BOX ................................................ 8-11

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xv

 FIGURE 8-12 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURATION ....................................................... 8-14
FIGURE 8-13 CHANGE DATE AND TIME .................................................................. 8-15
FIGURE 8-14 DATE AND TIME CONFIGURED FROM AN NTP SERVER .............................. 8-15
FIGURE 8-15 BRIDGE, VLAN AND MIR CONFIGURATION............................................ 8-16
FIGURE 8-16 VLAN TAG SETTINGS ....................................................................... 8-18
FIGURE 8-17 BRIDGE CONFIGURATION - SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ................... 8-20
FIGURE 8-18 ETHERNET MIR - THROUGHPUT SELECTION ........................................... 8-20
FIGURE 8-19 TDM MHS STATUS ......................................................................... 8-21
FIGURE 8-20 EXTERNAL ALARMS CONFIGURATION .................................................... 8-22
FIGURE 8-21 SITE CONFIGURATION - RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULTS ............................. 8-23
FIGURE 8-22 ALIGNMENT TONE BUZZER STATES ....................................................... 8-25
FIGURE 8-23 TELNET SESSION LOG ON .................................................................. 8-26
FIGURE 8-24 TELNET MANAGEMENT WINDOW.......................................................... 8-28
FIGURE 9-1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DIALOG BOX ............................................................. 9-2
FIGURE 9-2 LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION BOX ............................................................. 9-4
FIGURE 9-3 LOOPBACK CONFIGURATION BOX WITH ONE SITE A PORT SELECTED.................9-4
FIGURE 9-4 LOOPBACK OPTIONS.............................................................................9-4
FIGURE 9-5 LOOPBACK DEFINED .............................................................................9-5
FIGURE 9-6 SITE A PORT 2 SET TO LOOPBACK ........................................................... 9-5
FIGURE 9-7 LOCAL LINE LOOPBACK......................................................................... 9-6
FIGURE 9-8 REMOTE REVERSE LOOPBACK ................................................................. 9-6
FIGURE 9-9 REMOTE LINE LOOPBACK ...................................................................... 9-7
FIGURE 9-10 LOCAL REVERSE LOOPBACK ................................................................. 9-7
FIGURE 9-11 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX ..................................................................9-9
FIGURE 9-12 BASIC PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT .......................................... 9-10
FIGURE 9-13 A TYPICAL PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT BASED ON 15 MINUTE INTERVALS9-11
FIGURE 9-14 PERFORMANCE MONITORING REPORT SHOWING THE EFFECT OF A RESET ...... 9-11
FIGURE 9-15 THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ............................................. 9-13
FIGURE 9-16 EVENTS LOG DISPLAY ...................................................................... 9-15
FIGURE 9-17 PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX - EVENT TAB ............................................... 9-17
FIGURE 9-18 ACTIVE ALARMS SUMMARY ................................................................ 9-18
FIGURE 9-19 RECENT EVENTS - UP TO LAST 256 EVENTS AT SITE A ............................ 9-19
FIGURE 9-20 ADVANCED PREFERENCES .................................................................. 9-19
FIGURE 10-1 INTERFERENCE CAUSED BY COLLOCATED UNITS ....................................... 10-2
FIGURE 10-2 COLLOCATED UNITS USING HUB SITE SYNCHRONIZATION (1) .................... 10-2
FIGURE 10-3 COLLOCATED UNITS USING HUB SITE SYNCHRONIZATION (2) .................... 10-2
FIGURE 10-4 HSS INTERCONNECTION UNIT............................................................ 10-3
FIGURE 10-5 HSS WIRING SCHEMATIC .................................................................. 10-4
FIGURE 10-6 HSS SYNC SIGNAL PATH WITH ODU 1 AS HSS MASTER ........................... 10-5
FIGURE 10-7 CASCADING TWO HSS UNITS ............................................................. 10-5
FIGURE 10-8 CASCADING THREE HSS UNITS ........................................................... 10-6
FIGURE 10-9 ODU BEEP FOR HSS ERROR.............................................................. 10-7
FIGURE 10-10 RADIO FRAME PATTERN .................................................................. 10-8
FIGURE 10-11 SERVICES AND RATES - RADWIN 2000 C MASTER, RADWIN 2000 CLIENTS10-10
FIGURE 10-12 SERVICES AND RATES - RADWIN 2000 C MASTER, RADWIN 2000 CLIENTS - EXTREME
ASYMMETRIC ALLOCATION ...................................................................................... 10-11
FIGURE 10-13 HSS SETTINGS: LEFT - WINLINK 1000 CLIENT, RIGHT - RADWIN 2000 MASTER10-
13
FIGURE 10-14 HUB SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG - LEFT WINLINK 1000, RIGHT RADWIN 200010-
15
FIGURE 10-15 SITE CONFIGURATION: HSS - LEFT - WINLINK 1000 CLIENT, RIGHT - RADWIN 2000
MASTER ............................................................................................................ 10-15
FIGURE 10-16 HSS NOT SUPPORTED .................................................................. 10-16
FIGURE 11-1 GSU SCENARIO - INDEPENDENT DISTRIBUTED SITES................................ 11-2

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xvi

 FIGURE 11-2 GSU SCENARIO - COMMUNICATING DISTRIBUTED SITES ........................... 11-2
FIGURE 11-3 PHASE SHIFTED TRANSMISSION - PHASE SHIFT IS 1/2 THE RFD ................. 11-3
FIGURE 11-4 MAKE THE GSUS THE FIRST TWO COLLOCATED UNITS .............................. 11-4
FIGURE 11-5 GENERAL GSU CONFIGURATION .......................................................... 11-5
FIGURE 11-6 GSU MAIN WIDOW AT STARTUP ......................................................... 11-6
FIGURE 11-7 SITE CONFIGURATION: SYSTEM .......................................................... 11-7
FIGURE 11-8 SITE CONFIGURATION: GPS SYNC UNIT ............................................... 11-8
FIGURE 11-9 SITE CONFIGURATION: MANAGEMENT .................................................. 11-9
FIGURE 11-10 SITE CONFIGURATION: INVENTORY .................................................. 11-10
FIGURE 11-11 SITE CONFIGURATION: SECURITY .................................................... 11-10
FIGURE 11-12 SETTING THE DATE AND TIME FOR TRAP REPORTING ............................ 11-11
FIGURE 11-13 SITE CONFIGURATION: OPERATIONS ................................................ 11-11
FIGURE 11-14 SITE CONFIGURATION: OPERATIONS ................................................ 11-12
FIGURE 12-1 RADWIN MONITORED HOT STANDBY ................................................. 12-1
FIGURE 12-2 RADWIN Y-CONNECTION PATCH PANEL .............................................. 12-3
FIGURE 12-3 HOW TO CONNECT THE IDUS TO THE PATCH PANEL ................................ 12-4
FIGURE 12-4 SERVICES CONFIGURATION PANEL: HOT STANDBY MODE SELECTION ............ 12-5
FIGURE 12-5 THE PRIMARY LINK UNDER NORMAL OPERATION ...................................... 12-6
FIGURE 12-6 THE SECONDARY LINK UNDER NORMAL OPERATION .................................. 12-7
FIGURE 12-7 PRIMARY LINK A FEW SECONDS BEFORE REGULAR NO-LINK DISPLAY ............. 12-8
FIGURE 12-8 SECONDARY LINK OPERATING AS THE HOT STANDBY LINK ......................... 12-9
FIGURE 12-9 PRIMARY LINK AFTER THE SWITCH OVER TO SECONDARY LINK (AFTER A FEW SECONDS THE
DISPLAY MOVES TO NO-LINK DISPLAY, WITH TDM PORTS GRAYED OUT.) .......................... 12-11
FIGURE 12-10 SECONDARY LINK OPERATING AFTER THE SWITCH OVER TO SECONDARY. (AFTER A FEW
MOMENTS THE TDM ICONS BECOME GREEN.) ............................................................. 12-12
FIGURE 12-11 PRIMARY LINK OPERATING AFTER THE SWITCH BACK FROM SECONDARY ..... 12-13
FIGURE 12-12 SECONDARY LINK OPERATING AFTER THE SWITCH BACK TO PRIMARY ........ 12-14
FIGURE 13-1 RING PROTECTION MECHANISM .......................................................... 13-2
FIGURE 13-2 NODE WITH IDU AND POE DEVICE ..................................................... 13-6
FIGURE 13-3 1+1 ETHERNET .............................................................................. 13-6
FIGURE 13-4 USING IDU-C OR IDU-E WITH POES FOR THE RPL................................ 13-7
FIGURE 13-5 SERVICES WINDOW WITH RING SELECTED ............................................. 13-7
FIGURE 13-6 RING OPTIONS ............................................................................... 13-8
FIGURE 13-7 CONFIGURING RING LAN VIDS .......................................................... 13-8
FIGURE 13-8 CONFIGURING RPL VIDS .................................................................. 13-9
FIGURE 14-1 TWO NETWORK USING THE SAME LINK WITH TAGGING .............................. 14-1
FIGURE 14-2 SEPARATING CLIENT DATA STREAMS USING DOUBLE TAGGING ..................... 14-2
FIGURE 14-3 VLAN TAG SETTINGS ....................................................................... 14-8
FIGURE 14-4 VLAN: INGRESS MODES ................................................................... 14-8
FIGURE 14-5 VLAN: INGRESS MODE - SETTING VLAN ID AND PRIORITY ...................... 14-9
FIGURE 14-6 VLAN: EGRESS MODES .................................................................... 14-9
FIGURE 14-7 UNTAGGING SELECTED VIDS .............................................................. 14-9
FIGURE 14-8 PROVIDER PARAMETERS .................................................................. 14-10
FIGURE 15-1 SOFTWARE UPGRADE UTILITY - MAIN WINDOW ...................................... 15-2
FIGURE 15-2 ADD SITE OPTIONS .......................................................................... 15-2
FIGURE 15-3 ADDING A SINGLE SITE FOR UPGRADE .................................................. 15-2
FIGURE 15-4 SINGLE SITE ADDED FOR UPGRADE ...................................................... 15-3
FIGURE 15-5 SOFTWARE UPGRADE SITE OPTIONS ..................................................... 15-4
FIGURE 15-6 SOFTWARE UPGRADE IN PROGRESS - NOTE THE STOP BUTTON ................... 15-4
FIGURE 15-7 SOFTWARE UPGRADE COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY ..................................... 15-5
FIGURE 16-1 ACTIVATING AN ODU - INACTIVE LINK ................................................. 16-2
FIGURE 16-2 AIR INTERFACE DIALOG BOX .............................................................. 16-2
FIGURE 16-3 THE LOCAL ODU AFTER ACTIVATION - PROBING ..................................... 16-3
FIGURE 16-4 BOTH SITES ACTIVATED AND AWAITING CONFIGURATION ........................... 16-4

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xvii

 FIGURE 16-5 CHANNEL SELECT DIALOG BOX - ACS PERMANENTLY ENABLED .................... 16-5
FIGURE 16-6 FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHZ OPERATIONAL ................................................... 16-6
FIGURE 17-4 MOUNTING ON A POLE ..................................................................... 17-2
FIGURE 17-5 MOUNTING ON A WALL .................................................................... 17-3
FIGURE 17-6 MOUNTED ODUS WITH CORRECT “WATER NOSE” .................................... 17-4
FIGURE 17-7 INCORRECTLY MOUNTED ODU (NO “WATER NOSE”) ................................ 17-4
FIGURE 18-1 GROUNDING ANTENNA CABLES ............................................................ 18-2
FIGURE 18-2 GROUNDING A TYPICAL POLE INSTALLATION ........................................... 18-3
FIGURE 18-3 GROUNDING A TYPICAL WALL INSTALLATION .......................................... 18-4
FIGURE 18-4 ODU SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING .......................................... 18-4
FIGURE 18-5 TRANSTECTOR’S SURGE SUPPRESSOR ................................................... 18-5
FIGURE 18-6 SURGE SUPPRESSOR AND GROUNDING AT BUILDING ENTRY POINT ............... 18-7
FIGURE 19-1 LOG ON WINDOW FOR LOCAL CONNECTION........................................... 19-2
FIGURE 19-2 OPENING RADWIN MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION ............... 19-3
FIGURE 19-3 CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ............................................................ 19-3
FIGURE 19-4 MANAGEMENT ADDRESSES - SITE CONFIGURATION DIALOG BOX ................. 19-4
FIGURE 19-5 ODU WITH IP ADDRESSING CONFIGURED ............................................. 19-4
FIGURE 19-6 CONFIRMATION OF IP ADDRESS CHANGE .............................................. 19-4
FIGURE 19-7 MAIN WINDOW AFTER IP ADDRESS CHANGE .......................................... 19-5
FIGURE 19-8 EXISTING IP ADDRESS DISPLAYED AFTER LOG-ON WITH LOCAL CONNECTION . 19-6
FIGURE 20-1 BECOMING INSTALLER ...................................................................... 20-2
FIGURE 20-2 OPENING RADWIN MANAGER WINDOW PRIOR TO BAND CHANGE (DEFAULT CIRCLED)20-
3
FIGURE 20-3 CHANGE BAND DIALOG ..................................................................... 20-3
FIGURE 20-4 A DIFFERENT BAND SELECTED............................................................. 20-4
FIGURE 20-5 CHANGE BAND CONFIRMATION ........................................................... 20-4
FIGURE 20-6 MAIN WINDOW AFTER BAND CHANGE - NEW BAND CIRCLED ....................... 20-5
FIGURE 20-7 USING THE OPERATIONS WINDOW TO ENTER A LICENSE KEY ...................... 20-6
FIGURE 21-1 FRESNEL ZONE ............................................................................... 21-4
FIGURE 21-2 ACCESSING THE LINK BUDGET CALCULATOR .......................................... 21-5
FIGURE 21-3 LINK BUDGET WINDOW .................................................................... 21-6
FIGURE 21-4 BAND SELECTOR ............................................................................. 21-7
FIGURE 21-5 RADWIN 2000 SERIES SELECTOR ...................................................... 21-7
FIGURE 21-6 RADWIN 2000 CHANNEL BANDWIDTH SELECTOR .................................. 21-8
FIGURE 21-7 RFP SELECTOR .............................................................................. 21-8
FIGURE 21-8 RFP SELECTION GUIDE .................................................................... 21-9
FIGURE 21-9 RATE SELECTOR ............................................................................ 21-10
FIGURE 21-10 CALCULATION OF DISTANCE FROM SITE COORDINATES ......................... 21-11
FIGURE 21-11 CLIMACTIC C FACTORS ................................................................. 21-12
FIGURE 21-12 CLIMACTIC C FACTOR DESCRIPTION ................................................. 21-13
FIGURE 21-13 WORLD MAP SHOWING C FACTOR CONTOURS ..................................... 21-13
FIGURE 21-14 LBC - RESULTS SECTION .............................................................. 21-14
FIGURE 22-1 STARTING THE ANALYSIS ................................................................... 22-2
FIGURE 22-2 SITE A (MANAGING SITE) DONE .......................................................... 22-2
FIGURE 22-3 SITE B (OVER- THE-AIR SITE) DONE, SHOWING CURRENT CHANNEL ............. 22-3
FIGURE 22-4 RADWIN 2000 SPECTRUM VIEW - ANNOTATED DISPLAY ......................... 22-4
FIGURE 22-5 MOUSE POINTER ACTIVE FOR ZOOMING ................................................ 22-5
FIGURE 22-6 SELECTING AN AREA OF INTEREST TO ZOOM WITH THE RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON DOWN22-
6
FIGURE 22-7 REQUESTED SECTION ZOOMED ............................................................ 22-6
FIGURE 22-8 SPECTRUM VIEW SYSTEM MENU .......................................................... 22-7
FIGURE 22-9 EFFECT OF SETTING SHOW MAX ......................................................... 22-7
FIGURE 22-10 EFFECT OF SETTING SHOW AVERAGE.................................................. 22-7
FIGURE 22-11 FURTHER VIEWING OPTIONS............................................................. 22-8

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xviii

 FIGURE 22-12 ANTENNA A SELECTED .................................................................... 22-8
FIGURE 22-13 SPECTRUM VIEW CSV FILE IMPORTED INTO MS EXCEL ......................... 22-10
FIGURE 23-1 SERVICES WINDOW WITH QOS SELECTED .............................................. 23-2
FIGURE 23-2 ETHERNET QOS CONFIGURATION - MODE SELECTION .............................. 23-3
FIGURE 23-3 TOP: VLAN ALLOCATION. BOTTOM: DIFFSERV ALLOCATION....................... 23-3
FIGURE 23-4 MIR CHOICE - PER QUEUE................................................................. 23-4
FIGURE B-1 EXAMPLE FOR CONNECTING THE ALARM CONNECTOR ....................................B-4
FIGURE D-1 TOP LEVEL SECTIONS OF THE PRIVATE MIB............................................. D-3
FIGURE D-2 PRODUCT MIB: LEFT WINLINK 1000, RIGHT RADWIN 2000 .................... D-3
FIGURE G-4 MONTAGE SUR UN PYLÔNE ................................................................... G-4
FIGURE G-5 MONTAGE SUR UN MUR ....................................................................... G-5

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xix

List of Tables
TABLE 1-1 USER MANUAL - GENERAL LAYOUT ......................................................... 1-13
TABLE 1-2 USER MANUAL LAYOUT ........................................................................ 1-13
TABLE 2-1 LINK INSTALLATION WIZARD ................................................................... 2-2
TABLE 2-2 MIMO - DIVERSITY SETTINGS ............................................................... 2-11
TABLE 2-3 RADWIN 2000 AIR RATES .................................................................. 2-11
TABLE 2-4 ASYMMETRIC ALLOCATION WITH COLLOCATED LINKS - SCENARIOS ................. 2-19
TABLE 4-1 COMPONENTS OF AN IDU-C FRONT PANEL................................................ 4-10
TABLE 4-2 IDU-C FRONT PANEL LEDS ................................................................. 4-11
TABLE 4-3 IDU-C AND NEW STYLE IDU-E FRONT PANEL LEDS FOR HSS ..................... 4-11
TABLE 5-1 PC REQUIREMENTS FOR THE RADWIN MANAGER APPLICATION ...................... 5-1
TABLE 5-2 USER TYPES, DEFAULT PASSWORDS AND FUNCTION .......................................5-5
TABLE 5-3 RADWIN MANAGER: OFFLINE FUNCTIONALITY ........................................... 5-8
TABLE 5-4 DEFAULT SETTINGS ............................................................................ 5-11
TABLE 6-1 RADWIN MANAGER TOOLBAR ............................................................... 6-2
TABLE 6-2 RADWIN MANAGER MAIN MENU FUNCTIONALITY ......................................... 6-3
TABLE 6-3 STATUS BAR INDICATORS ....................................................................... 6-7
TABLE 7-1 LINK CONFIGURATION WIZARD ................................................................7-2
TABLE 8-1 ODU MODE CONFIGURATION FOR COMMON SCENARIOS ................................ 8-17
TABLE 8-2 TELNET COMMANDS SUMMARY ............................................................... 8-26
TABLE 9-1 GET DIAGNOSTICS DATA AND DESCRIPTION ............................................... 9-2
TABLE 9-2 LINK COMPATIBILITY TRAP MESSAGES ....................................................... 9-3
TABLE 9-3 EXPLANATION OF PERFORMANCE DATA ..................................................... 9-12
TABLE 9-4 ACTION OF THE TOOLBAR BUTTONS ........................................................ 9-13
TABLE 9-5 RADWIN MANAGER TRAP MESSAGES ..................................................... 9-16
TABLE 9-6 ACTIVE ALARMS COMMAND BUTTONS ....................................................... 9-18
TABLE 9-7 LED FAULT INDICATORS....................................................................... 9-20
TABLE 9-8 SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 9-21
TABLE 10-1 ODU/HSS UNIT CONNECTION PINOUT.................................................. 10-7
TABLE 10-2 RADIO FRAME PATTERN TABLE - RADWIN 2000 .................................... 10-8
TABLE 10-3 RADIO FRAME PATTERN TABLE - WINLINK 1000 ..................................... 10-8
TABLE 10-4 ASYMMETRIC ALLOCATION WITH COLLOCATED LINKS - SCENARIOS ............. 10-12
TABLE 10-5 IDU-C AND NEW STYLE IDU-E FRONT PANEL LEDS FOR HSS ................. 10-13
TABLE 10-6 EXTERNAL PULSE STATUS ................................................................. 10-14
TABLE 13-1 TOPOLOGIES SUPPORTED BY RADWIN ETHERNET RING ............................ 13-4
TABLE 14-1 PORT SETTINGS - INGRESS DIRECTION ................................................... 14-4
TABLE 14-2 PORT SETTINGS - EGRESS DIRECTION .................................................... 14-4
TABLE 17-1 BILL OF MATERIALS: ODU MOUNTING KIT .............................................. 17-1
TABLE 23-1 DEFAULT PRIORITIES AN D ALLOCATION BY VLAN ID AND DIFFSERV............. 23-1
TABLE A-2 SUPPORTED FREQUENCIES, REGULATIONS AND CHANNEL BANDWIDTHS .............A-2
TABLE A-3 MECHANICAL .......................................................................................A-2
TABLE B-1 ODU-IDU RJ-45 CONNECTOR PINOUT .....................................................B-1
TABLE B-2 ODU/HSS UNIT CONNECTION PINOUT .....................................................B-1
TABLE B-3 FAST ETHERNET CONNECTOR PINOUT .......................................................B-2
TABLE B-4 TRUNK PORTS - E1/T1 RJ45PINOUT .......................................................B-2
TABLE B-5 HOT STANDBY RJ-11 PORT PINOUT .........................................................B-2
TABLE B-6 IDU ALARM CONNECTOR (DRY-CONTACT) .................................................B-3
TABLE B-7 TERMINAL BLOCK 3-PIN -48VDC.............................................................B-4
TABLE B-8 TERMINAL BLOCK 2-PIN -48VDC.............................................................B-4
TABLE C-1 SFP TYPE AND INTERFACE DESCRIPTION ....................................................C-1
TABLE D-1 SUPPORTED RFC 1213 VARIABLES ......................................................... D-4
TABLE D-2 PRIVATE MIB PARAMETERS ................................................................... D-6
TABLE D-3 MIB TRAPS ......................................................................................D-24

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xx

 TABLE E-1 IDU-C/E - OUTPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION ................................................E-1
TABLE E-2 IDU-C - INPUT ALARMS DESCRIPTION ......................................................E-2
TABLE F-1 SAFETY DISTANCES FOR RADWIN 2000 FCC AND IC PRODUCTS ................... F-1
TABLE F-2 SAFETY DISTANCES FOR RADWIN 2000 ETSI PRODUCTS ............................ F-1

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 xxi

RADWIN 2000

Broadband Wireless Transmission System

USER MANUAL

RELEASE 2.5.00

Part 1: Basic Installation

UM 2000-2500/09.10
 Chapter 1

Introduction
Welcome to RADWIN 2000!
RADWIN 2000 is a portfolio of carrier-class wireless broadband radios in the
sub-6 GHz range. These radios offer unmatched performance and robust-
ness.
The RADWIN 2000 portfolio consists of three product series:
• RADWIN 2000 C-Series supporting 100 Mbps symmetric (full duplex
and asymmetric) throughput and up to 16 E1s/T1s
• RADWIN 2000 L- Series supporting 50 Mbps symmetric (full duplex)
throughput and up to 16 E1s/T1s
• RADWIN 2000 PDH-Series supporting 16 E1s/T1s and 10 Mbps
Ethernet (Note that this model may only be used with an IDU-C or E.
It cannot be used with a PoE device.)

RADWIN 2000 highlights:

• High capacity (up to 100Mbps full duplex net throughput)
• Native TDM transport up to 16 E1/T1 ports
• Multi-band products for maximum flexibility
• Advanced air-interface based on MIMO, antenna Diversity and OFDM
technologies
• Superior range performance
• Simple installation and management
• High Tx power of 25dBm
• Support for 10MHz, 20MHz and 40MHz channel bandwidths
• Monitored Hot Standby (1+1) for TDM services
• Ring Topology (including 1+1) for Ethernet service
• QoS support
• Separate management and Ethernet traffic VLAN support
• GSU support for distributed hub sites
• Hub Site Synchronization

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-1

What’s new in Release 2.5.00 Chapter 1

The RADWIN 2000 radio series supports the 4.8 - 6 GHz and 2.4 GHz spec-
trum bands, and complies with international standards and regulations
(FCC, IC Canada, ETSI and WPC India). DFS is supported where required by
regulation.

What’s new in Release 2.5.00

The main changes in release 2.5.00 from release 2.4.5 are:

» New 6 GHz radios in C-Series

» DC PoE devices: A ruggedized version for outdoor use
» GSU support for distributed hub sites
» New Ethernet features
• VLAN functionality
• QoS (C-Series only)
• Ring protection and Ethernet 1+1
» Additional RFD (RFP B) for collocated WinLink 1000 and RADWIN
2000 units. See Chapter 10.
» IDU-E for Ethernet only or Ethernet plus two TDM ports. VLAN sup-
ported (Layer 2 capabilities).
» Scheduled Software Upgrade
» Telnet access may be enabled or disabled
» Contextual online help for the RADWIN Manager
» Licensed products under sub-6 GHz:
• 2.3-2.4 GHz
• 4.8-4.9 GHz
» License Key for multiple band activation and regulation change
» Public License Key site available

Key Applications

Cellular Backhaul
RADWIN 2000 products enable cellular carriers to expand their networks in
both urban and rural areas quickly and cost-effectively.
RADWIN 2000 and specifically RADWIN 2000 PDH systems are ideally
suited for a broad range of cellular backhaul deployment scenarios; they
empower carriers to expand their presence into remote and low ARPU
areas, provide enhanced overlay coverage in urban spots, and can serve as
a temporary or backup backhaul solution.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-2

Broadband Access Chapter 1

Figure 1-1: Typical Cellular Backhaul application

Broadband Access
With RADWIN 2000 solutions, service providers can expand their service
footprint rapidly and affordably, and provide high-capacity services that
match the ever-growing demand for high-quality, high-speed broadband.
RADWIN 2000 is the ideal solution for last mile access, for large corpora-
tions requiring high capacity either or both IP or TDM traffic.

Figure 1-2: Typical Broadband Access application

Figure 1-3: Typical WiFi Backhaul Application

Key Features of RADWIN 2000

Some of the outstanding features of the RADWIN 2000 radio series are as
follows:

» E1/T1 + Ethernet in one Solution

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-3

Key Features of RADWIN 2000 Chapter 1

RADWIN 2000 systems deliver carrier-class native E1/T1 + Ethernet

in a single platform, making them ideal for a range of backhaul and
access applications. Up to 16 E1/T1 services are supported.
» High Capacity
The RADWIN 2000 system provides a high-capacity link of 100 Mbps
net throughput full duplex
» Superior Spectral Efficiency
Built on advanced MIMO and OFDM technologies, the RADWIN 2000
system provides a high-capacity link at channel bandwidth of
20MHz. This channel bandwidth supports high robustness of the air
interface under interference and harsh conditions.
» Multi-band Products
Every RADWIN 2000 Multi-band radio supports multiple frequency
bands. For example the RW-2050-0250 connectorized radio supports
the bands: 5.9 GHz, 5.8 GHz, 5.4 GHz, 5.3 GHz, 4.9 GHz, and 2.4
GHz. The RADWIN 2000 Multi-band products support the regulations
of FCC, IC Canada, ETSI and WPC India. DFS is supported where
required by regulation.
» Advanced Air Interface
The RADWIN 2000 system provides an advanced air-interface based
on MIMO, antenna diversity and OFDM technologies, resulting in an
exceptionally robust air interface.
Using the following technologies, the RADWIN 2000 air interface is
designed to ensure nonstop, high quality transmission, even under
interference and harsh conditions:
• Automatic Adaptive Rate (AAR) is a mechanism that dynami-
cally adapts the air interface rate by changing both the signal
modulation and coding.
• Automatic Channel Selection (ACS) chooses the best channel by
monitoring the available radio channels and dynamically select-
ing a channel which is best suited for transmission at any given
time.
• Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) is a mechanism for error con-
trol during data transmission. When the receiver detects an
error in the received information, it automatically requests the
transmitter to resend the information. This process is repeated
until the transmission is error free or the error continues
beyond a predetermined number of maximum transmissions.
RADWIN 2000's ARQ mechanism is optimized for time-critical
traffic.
• Forward Error Correction (FEC) with very low overhead and
algorithms specifically designed for the varying conditions of
license-exempt frequency bands, ensuring fast, robust and
error-free communications.
» High transmission (Tx) power

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-4

Key Features of RADWIN 2000 Chapter 1

The RADWIN 2000 system supports high Tx power, compliant with

radio regulations. High Tx power increases the system's availability
and range, and enables the high performance with smaller
antennas, thus reducing the total cost of the solution (lower CAPEX),
installation and tower rent costs (lower OPEX).
The 5 GHz bands support a maximum Tx power of 25dBm whereas
the 2.4 GHz band supports a maximum Tx power of 26dBm.
» Superior range performance
The RADWIN 2000 system supports high capacity at superior
ranges. The Link Budget Calculator (Chapter 21) is used to
determine the capacity and range according to the choice of
product, antenna, type of service and environmental conditions.
» HSS Interoperability between RADWIN 2000 and WinLink
1000
Site Synchronization is supported with any mix of RADWIN 2000 and
WinLink 1000 links. RADWIN 2000 can be used to backhaul WinLink
1000 collocated links without mutual interference
» Monitored Hot Standby (1+1):
The RADWIN Monitored Hot Standby (MHS) protects up to sixteen
E1/T1 services with RADWIN 2000 and up to four E1/T1 services
with WinLink 1000. It is designed to provide high reliability high-
capacity Point-to-Point Links. The RADWIN MHS is -
• Designed to provide redundancy and high reliability for carrier
class operators
• Optimized for high capacity links operating in license-free bands
• A comprehensive solution providing protection against both
equipment failure and loss of air interface, by simple connectiv-
ity between a primary link and a secondary link
• Able to use a different band for maximum protection to the air
interface
The main features of the RADWIN MHS are –
• Cut-over from the primary to the secondary link completely
automatic
• Cut-over time no more than 50 ms
• Automatic restore to primary link as soon as it becomes avail-
able
• WinLink 1000 can backup a RADWIN 2000 link
A major benefit of RADWIN MHS is that is can underpin an afford-
able Service Level Agreement structure by protecting part of the
RADWIN 2000 trunks with WinLink 1000.
MHS supports TDM services; Ethernet services are carried by both
links independently.
» Spectrum View

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-5

Key Features of RADWIN 2000 Chapter 1

Spectrum View displays a visual representation of spectrum avail-

ability during the link installation. It is an RF survey tool supporting
the link installation prior to service activation.
Use Spectrum View to assist you to choose the operating channel.
» Diversity
RADWIN 2000 links using dual bipolar antennas may be configured
to transmit the same data through both radios. This feature provides
added data transmission integrity under harsh conditions.
» Simple installation and management
RADWIN 2000 systems are extremely simple to install and maintain.
They are typically up and running in less than an hour.
The RADWIN Manager application has full local and remote
management capabilities. The user-friendly SNMP based
management tool provides full end-to-end configuration, event
logging, and performance monitoring capabilities.
» Enhanced Security
The security features of RADWIN 2000 include:
• RADWIN 2000's AES 128-bit integrated advanced encryption
support provides enhanced air interface security for carriers and
private networks. It ensures user data protection with one of
the most sophisticated commercially available combined
encryption and authentication techniques, CCM/AES. This tech-
nique combines message authentication (preventing anti-spoof-
ing and replay protection) with commercial encryption, and
complies with the IEEE 802.11i (phase iii) security recommen-
dations.
CCM/AES uses a symmetric 128-bit encryption key (EK), and a
nonce, and provides both message encryption and authenticat-
ing signature. The nonce mechanism enables the receiver to
remember already received genuine messages and reject all
replayed messages.
• Initial encryption and authentication is based on a user-defined
master key (Link Password). While standard Wireless LAN
encrypts only the Ethernet Payload, the AES encrypts both the
source and destination MAC addresses.
• In addition to normal log on access, Read or Write Community
access is available at log on
• Link Lock is a part of the RADWIN 2000 security concept. It is
designed to discourage physical theft of units and “piggyback-
ing” using an otherwise identical ODU to steal bandwidth or
information. It locks a pair of synchronized ODUs for mutually
exclusive communication.
» SFP support in the IDU-C
Standard SFP modules are used, enabling any type of Ethernet phys-
ical connectivity including various fiber connections. E3/T3 or E1/T1
over Ethernet SFPs can be used as well.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-6

Components of a RADWIN 2000 Link Chapter 1

» Separate management and traffic VLAN support

» Ethernet Ring Topology
» QoS Support (RADWIN 2000 C based links)
QoS enables Operator and Service Providers to offer delay-sensitive
services such as VoIP, IP-TV, time critical applications and online
games.

Components of a RADWIN 2000 Link

The Outdoor Unit (ODU)

The Radio Outdoor Unit (ODU)

The ODU is the radio transceiver of the RADWIN 2000 system. It supports
two antennas for MIMO operation. It is available with an integrated antenna
(Integrated Antenna ODU) or with connectors for an external antenna
(Connectorized ODU).
The ODU may be mounted on a pole or a wall, and connects to the IDU or
PoE device using a CAT5e cable.
The ODU comes in two form factors as shown in Figure 1-4 below:

Front Rear
Connectorized
Integrated Antenna

Figure 1-4: ODU Form Factors

• Integrated Antenna ODU
This ODU has an integrated 370mm (1.2ft) flat panel antenna. The
ODU contains both the radio and the antenna as a single unit
housed in a weatherproof case.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-7

The Indoor Unit (IDU) Chapter 1

• Connectorized ODU
This ODU has 2xN-type connectors for connecting an external
antenna.

See the RADWIN Product Catalog for the range of ODU products available
in release 2.5.00.

The external antenna choices are:

Note • Single bipolar antenna

• Two monopolar antennas
• Single monopolar antenna

The Indoor Unit (IDU)

The IDU has the service ports and provides aggregation of these services
towards the ODU that transports them over the air. The IDU also provides
power to the ODU.
New style IDU-E for both WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000
The new style IDU-E is a carrier grade, compact, half 19 inch wide, 1U plas-
tic unit, providing up to two Ethernet ports and up to two E1/T1 interfaces.
It offers Layer 2 support for Ethernet service and HSS support for collocated
links. It is a low cost unit intended for both Access applications and Enter-
prise use.

Figure 1-5: New style IDU-E - front view (Note new HSS LED on the left)
The IDU-E rear panel (right to left) has a 25 pin Dry Contact Alarms port.
the two (or no) trunk ports, two LAN ports, an ODU port and finally a 3 pin
DC power plug identical to that used on the IDU-C.

Figure 1-6: New style IDU-E: Rear panel

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-8

Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices Chapter 1

IDU-C
The IDU-C is a carrier-class 19 inch, 1U unit, providing E1/T1 ports,
Ethernet ports, an SFP port, a STANDBY port for MHS control, dry
contact alarms and indication LEDs. It has two DC power feed
connectors. An AC to DC converter is available for powering the
IDU-C from an AC source. The IDU-C is designed to be rack
mounted.
Four IDU-C products are available in release 2.5.00 with 16, 8 and 4 E1/T1
ports and with Ethernet only ports.

Figure 1-7: IDU-C, Ethernet only, front panel

Figure 1-8: IDU-C, 16 E1/T1 ports, front panel

Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Devices

Basic PoE Device
The basic PoE device provides Ethernet ser-
vice only, with power for the ODU. The PoE
device is extremely compact, having one
Ethernet port, one ODU port and a standard
3 pin male AC power socket.
It may be used with both WinLink 1000 and
RADWIN 2000 radios.

Figure 1-9: Basic PoE device - showing the radio Ethernet port

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-9

GSU Chapter 1

Outdoor (Ruggedized) DC PoE Device

This unit may be used with both WinLink 1000 and
RADWIN 2000 radios.

Figure 1-10: Ruggedized DC-PoE Device: Input is -20 to -60 VDC (single
input)

GSU
The GPS-based synchronization unit (GSU) is designed to handle inter-site
interferences under large-scale deployment scenarios.
The GSU is an outdoor unit consisting of a standard Wireless Link enclosure,
a GPS antenna and a PoE device.
The GSU is connected to the HSS Unit using a standard HSS cable. It syn-
chronizes the transmission timing of multiple Hub-Sites to the same clock
source thus eliminating mutual interference (see Chapter 11).

Figure 1-11: General GSU configuration

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-10

Antennas Chapter 1

Antennas
An antenna is the radiating and receiving element from which the radio signal, in the form of RF power, is radiated to its surroundings and vice versa. The antenna gain and transmitting power may be limited by country regulations.

The RADWIN 2000 may be operated with an integrated antenna that is part
of the ODU unit, or with external antennas connected to the ODU via N-type
connectors. All cables and connections must be connected correctly to
reduce RF losses. The required antenna impedance is 50Ω.
The 5.x GHz Integrated Antenna ODU is provided with 370 mm (1.2ft) flat
panel antenna, with a gain of 23dBi (5.x GHz) / 19dBi (4.9 GHz) and 8°
beam width. The 2.x GHz Integrated Antenna ODU is provided with 370 mm
(1.2ft) flat panel antenna, with a gain of 16dBi and 16° beam width. The
radio and the antenna are housed in a weatherproof case as a single unit.

Figure 1-12: ODU with integrated Flat Panel antenna

External antennas are available for the RADWIN 2000 radios, varying in
operating frequencies, form factor, size and gain, dual or single polarization.
The Flat Panel antenna shown below can be used either as an integrated or
external antenna.

Figure 1-13: External Antennas for use with RADWIN 2000

See the RADWIN products catalog for RADWIN offering of external anten-
nas. External antennas are also available from third party antenna vendors.

RADWIN Manager
The RADWIN Manager is an SNMP-based management application which
manages a complete link over a single IP address. It can also manage each
side of the link separately.
The RADWIN Manager application facilitates installation and configuration
of the link between the ODU units. The intuitive, easy-to-use RADWIN Man-

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-11

RADWIN Network Management System (RNMS) Chapter 1

ager has a graphical Microsoft Windows interface, and can be run locally
and remotely.
The RADWIN Manager provides:
• Installation Wizard
• Frequency band selection
• On-line monitoring of air interface quality allowing the administrator
to monitor the service and status of each link
• On-line monitoring of equipment alarms and QoS
• Local and remote loopback testing
• Configuration Wizard and site settings
• Integrated software upgrade utility
• On-line user manual and help files
• Link Budget Calculator for calculating the expected performance of
the RADWIN 2000 wireless link and the possible service configura-
tions for a specific link range.
The RADWIN Manager can easily be integrated with any SNMP based NMS
system.

Figure 1-14: RADWIN Manager window

RADWIN Network Management System (RNMS)

The RADWIN Network Management System enables Service Providers to
manage all RADWIN links in their network from a Network Operations Cen-
ter (NOC).
Using RNMS, Service Providers can configure and monitor up to 10,000
RADWIN links. The intuitive easy-to-use RNMS provides a full range of net-
work surveillance, monitoring, configuration and fault management capabil-

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-12

Accessories Chapter 1

ities. It offers users complete visibility and control over their RADWIN-based
networks.

Accessories
RADWIN provides a variety of accessories to support the RADWIN 2000 sys-
tem:
• PoE devices
• AC Power Adaptors
• External Lightning Protection Units
• Cables to connect the various system elements
• Grounding cables

Documentation supplied with RADWIN 2000

The technical documentation supplied with a RADWIN 2000, is located on
the product CD. It includes the following items:
• A Quick Installation Guide for experienced installers (also hardcopy)
• A full User Manual - the document which you are reading
• A Help file accessible from the RADWIN Manager
• Link Budget Calculator

How to Use this Manual

This User Manual is divided into three functionally distinct sections reflecting
the activities required to set up a RADWIN 2000. The division is shown in
the following table:

Table 1-1: User Manual - General layout

Section General Content Purpose

1 Basic Installation Core information to install and operate a link

2 Advanced Installation Specialized installation techniques

3 Technical Information Background for advanced use

The Basic Installation section is divided into functionally distinct chapters

reflecting the activities required to set up a RADWIN 2000. The division is
shown in the following table:

Table 1-2: User Manual layout

Chapter/
Subject Audience
Appendix

2 Site Preparation Site survey team

3 Hardware Installation Field technician

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-13

A Little Terminology Chapter 1

Table 1-2: User Manual layout (Continued)

Chapter/
Subject Audience
Appendix

Getting Started with the

4 RADWIN Manager
Installation technician

5 Installing the Link Installation technician

The RADWIN Manager:

6 Main Window
Installation technician, System manager

7 Configuring the Link Installation technician, System manager

8 Site Configuration Installation technician, System manager

Monitoring and Diagnos-

9 tics
Installation technician, System manager

A Little Terminology
In the field, a link typically has a local or headquarters site as for example in
Figure 1-1 above. Here the service provider is the local or headquarters
site. The service recipient is the remote site.
Where the link is completely internal to a corporation, the choice of the local
and remote is just a matter of convenience.
A link then, consists of two sites.
In Broadband Wireless terminology, the local and remote sites are some-
times referred to as “near” and “far”, “HQ” and “remote” and so on.
The site which is closer to the network core (often the local site) will be
referred to as site A, and the opposite side of the link, usually closer to the
end user, as site B.
This choice is application-neutral and will be used throughout the manual
both to describe the sites and their names as in the examples.
The link is configured and managed using a PC, the managing computer
connected to site A. (The precise requirements for the managing computer
are set out on page 4-1).
We will occasionally need to distinguish between the site to which the man-
aging computer is connected, and the second site, when they are not nec-
essarily A or B. The former will be called the managing site and the latter,
the over-the-air site. Which is which, is always determined by the loca-
tion of the managing computer.
RADWIN 2000 supports three connection methods for the managing com-
puter:
• Local - a direct peer to peer connection between the Ethernet ports
on the managing computer and the IDU or PoE device. Local con-
nection is always read-write.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-14

Conventions Used in this Manual Chapter 1

• Network - the managing computer and the site A IDU or PoE

device belong to a LAN and communicate through a router or switch
• Over-the-air - the managing computer connects to site B via the
air interface
• The managing computer may be connected to the link through an
IDU or a PoE device. In what follows, where ever we refer to an IDU
it includes PoE devices unless stated otherwise. Typically, if we need
to refer to an IDU as such, we will use a model name such as IDU-C.
The terms uplink and downlink, originate from the field of Satellite com-
munications. In a backhaul or ISP context, uplink is from the user to the
network and downlink is from the network to the user.

Conventions Used in this Manual

Notifications
Notifications consist of Notes, Cautions and Warnings.

The purpose of a Note is to

• Draw your attention to something that may not be obvious or coun-

ter-intuitive
• Emphasize a special feature or peculiarity of the RADWIN 2000
• Offer an external reference for additional information
• Add a caveat that would not qualify as a full Caution or Warning (see
below)
Note • Provide additional background to what follows
• Offer a recommendation
• Highlight an indication of something to watch out for
• Advise you if an action has “side effects” i.e. it may disturb something
else that would be best left undisturbed
• Remind you of something that should be kept in mind

A Caution is a notification of risk of damage to equipment or of service

degradation
Caution

A Warning is a notification of risk of danger to persons operating near the

equipment
Warning

Typographical conventions
General
Where a term is defined or introduced for the first time, it is shown in Bold-
face. You will have noticed this usage in the Terminology section above.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-15

Windows Terminology Chapter 1

Software
The RADWIN Manager is a Microsoft Windows application following the user
interface conventions of familiar Microsoft Windows programs.
We would describe the chain of menu commands indicated in the navigation
example of Figure 1-15 like this,
Tools|Active Alarms|1 A
using Boldface for the menu labels and vertical bars to separate them.

Figure 1-15: Menu navigation in the RADWIN Manager

Similarly, mouse click items will be referred to like this:

“Click Next to continue.”
(A mouse click always uses the left mouse button unless stated otherwise.)

Windows Terminology
Look at Figure 1-1 above. The main application display which you see con-
sists of a frame-window with a menu bar, system icons and content. It will
be referred to as a window, the main window or the Manager window
depending on context.
The top line of icons is the tool bar, and provides part of the menu bar
functionality with a mouse click.
At the bottom of the window is the status bar, a line of icons and text
boxes.
The central part of the main window consists of several panes: On the
right, there are Radio Interference, Ethernet Service and the Frequency
panes. The left hand pane (with the blue background) is split into three
sub-panes.
If you click Site A or Site B in the tool bar, you will be offered another win-
dow, which in turn displays on of several panels depending on which func-
tion you choose.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-16

Viewing and Printing Chapter 1

Figure 1-16: Site Configuration window with open Management panel

Viewing and Printing

This manual is optimized for viewing online as a PDF file. To this end it uses
an 11 point Tahoma typeface for main text. Tables for most part, use 7 or 8
point fonts. Here are a few pointers for hard-copy printing:
• The text and table typefaces used are large enough to print the
manual at two pages per sheet
• For good legibility, use a commercial grade laser printer. A color
printer is of course best, however a monochrome printer set to use
gray-scale gives acceptable results
• Better quality inkjet printers also give good output

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 1-17

 Chapter 2

Installing the Link

Overview
The installation is carried out using the Installation wizard. Its operation is
detailed in the following pages in a tutorial style.
For the purpose of explanation, we will set up a laboratory link with the fol-
lowing characteristics:
• Channel selection: Automatic
• Antennas: Dual at both sites
• Services: Ethernet + 7xE1 on ports 1, 2, 3, 8, 10, 11, 14. It is
unlikely that you would use a non-contiguous set of ports - but this
shows that if required, it can be done.
The Installation wizard has steps as shown in Table 2-1 below.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-1

Overview Chapter 2

Table 2-1: Link Installation Wizard

1 Wizard welcome

System parameters
2 • Link ID
• Site details

Channel settings - ACS

3 Configuration

Tx Power and antenna

4 settings, MIMO or
Diversity

5 HSS Settings

Services - Types
• Ethernet
• TDM
6
Adaptive or fixed, Jitter
Buffer, MHS, Ethernet
Ring, QoS

Set TDM Clock

7 Parameters

Wizard summary and

8 completion

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-2

Installation Chapter 2

Installation

Step 1, Start the Wizard

In the tool bar of the RADWIN Manager main window, click the Link
Installation button. The Link Installation button is only accessible if the
antennas are properly aligned. If this box is “grayed out”, you should align
the antennas as set out in Chapter 3 on page 3-17.
The Installation Wizard opens:

Figure 2-1: Link Installation Wizard

The bottom data area reproduces the corresponding data from the main
window - which the above panel obscures. See Chapter 6 for a field by
field description of this data area.
Click Next to proceed with the installation procedure.

Step 2, System Parameters

The system dialog box opens:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-3

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-2: Installation Wizard, System dialog box

¾ To complete Installation Step 2:

1. Enter a Link ID. The Link ID must be identical for both ODUs in the
link, otherwise they will not communicate. The Link ID must
include at least eight alphanumeric characters. Up to 24 characters are
allowed. You should use a Link ID composed of both alphabetic and
numeric characters.
2. Enter a Link Name for the link identification. The default name is “Link”.
You should change it.
3. Enter names for Site 1 and Site 2. The default names are both “Location”.
You should change them. Throughout this manual, we use A for Site 1
and B for Site 2.
4. Optionally enter a new Link Password.

If the Link Password is incorrect a link is established but configuration

cannot be performed and no services are available. A new link password
may be obtained from RADWIN Customer Support or use the alternative
password supplied with the product.
Note
The link password is peculiar to the link itself and should not be confused
with the RADWIN Manager log on password.

Here is our completed System panel:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-4

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-3: Installation Wizard, System dialog box filled out

5. Click Next.
The default link with a rate of 6.5 Mbps is evaluated.
The Channel Setting dialog box appears. Proceed to Channel Settings,
below.

Changing the Link Password

The default password is wireless-bridge. Optionally, you can change the
link password as explained here.

¾ To change the link password:

1. Click the Change button in the System dialog box.
The Change Link Password dialog box opens.

Use the Hide characters check box for maximum security

Note

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-5

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-4: Change Link Password dialog box

2. Enter the current link password (The default link password for a new
ODU is wireless-bridge).
If you have forgotten the Link Password, click the Forgotten Link Pass-
word button. The following window is displayed:

Figure 2-5: Lost or forgotten Link Password recovery

Follow the instructions to use the Alternative Link Password, and click OK
to finish. You are returned to the window in Figure 2-4 above. Continue
with the next step.
3. Enter a new password.
4. Retype the new password in the Confirm field.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Yes when asked if you want to change the link password.
7. Click OK at the Password changed success message.

• A link password must contain at least eight but no more than 16

characters excluding SPACE, TAB, and any of “>#@|*?;.”
• Restoring Factory Defaults returns the Link Password to wireless-
bridge.
Note
• If the link is inactive, then the link password may also be changed
from the Site Configuration dialogs. See page 8-13.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-6

Installation Chapter 2

Step 3, Channel Settings

RADWIN 2000 systems have a feature called Automatic Channel Selection
(ACS). In the event of sync loss, ACS chooses the first available channel in a
list of monitored channels nominated in the Channel settings window of
Figure 2-6 below. A channel switch takes place sufficiently fast as to
ensure no loss of service.

Figure 2-6: Channel Settings - Automatic Channel Selection

The default frequency for the product is shown.

¾ To select channels to be used by the link:

1. Select the installation frequency from the Installation Channel box.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-7

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-7: Channel Settings - Showing available installation rates

2. Choose the required Channel Bandwidth.

Figure 2-8: Channel Settings - Showing available Channel Bandwidths

3. Click the check box if Automatic Channel Selection is required.
4. The Available Channels List contains all of the allowable channels for the
link. Check the channels that can be automatically selected.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-8

Installation Chapter 2

Selecting a new channel causes the system quality to change. The Qual-
ity bar provides an indication of the link quality from No serv(ice) (red)
to Ethernet + TDM (green) as shown in the bottom of Figure 2-7
above.
5. Click Next.

Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings

The Tx Power and Antenna Parameters dialog appears.

Figure 2-9: Transmission Power and Antenna Parameters

The choice of Tx Power, antenna gain and cable loss (between the radio and
the antenna) determines the EIRP and is affected by such considerations as
radio limitations and regulatory restrictions.
Before proceeding to antenna installation details, the following background
information should be considered:

About Single and Dual Antennas

Each RADWIN 2000 ODU is made of two radio transceivers (radios). The
radios make use of algorithms that utilize both MIMO and Diversity resulting
in enhanced capacity, range and link availability. The number of antennas
(i.e. radios) used is determined by user configuration and by automatic sys-
tem decisions, explained below.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-9

Installation Chapter 2

Dual Antennas at Both Sites

When using dual antennas at both sites (single bipolar antenna or two mo-
unipolar antennas) you can choose between MIMO Mode and Diversity
Mode.
MIMO Mode
With MIMO the system doubles the link capacity. At the same time, it keeps
the same rate and modulation per radio as was used with single antenna,
thus increasing capacity, range and availability.
For example with a dual antenna RADWIN 2000 can transmit at modulation
of 64QAM and FEC of 5/6 and get an air rate of 130 Mbps, compared to 65
Mbps with single antenna.
To work in this mode, each antenna port must be connected to an antenna,
the RSS level in both receivers should be balanced and a minimal separation
between the antennas must be maintained. (For example, by using dual
polarization antennas a cross polarization separation is attained).
Upon selecting Antenna Type as Dual, RADWIN 2000 automatically selects
MIMO mode and doubles the air rates.
RADWIN Manager indicates a case of unbalanced RSS between the two
antennas.
Diversity Mode
Diversity Mode uses two antennas to improve the quality and reliability of
the link. Often, there is not a clear line-of-sight (LOS) between transmitter
and receiver. Instead the signal is reflected along multiple paths before if-
ally being received.
Each such “bounce” can introduce phase shifts, time delays, attenuations,
and even distortions that can destructively interfere with one another at the
aperture of the receiving antenna. Antenna diversity is especially effective
at mitigating these multi-path situations.
This is because multiple antennas afford a receiver several recordings of the
same signal. Each antenna will be exposed to a different interference envy-
remnant. Thus, if one antenna is undergoing a deep fade, it is likely that
another has a sufficient signal. Collectively such a system can provide a or-
bust link.
Antenna diversity requires antenna separation which is possible by using a
dual-polarization antenna or by two spatially separated antennas.
Use Diversity instead of MIMO in the following situations:
• When the system cannot operate in MIMO Mode
• When one of the receivers has high interference compared to the
second receiver (i.e. the system is “unbalanced”)
• When you achieve higher capacity in Diversity Mode than in MIMO
Mode
• When high robustness is of importance and the capacity of Diversity
Mode is sufficient (up to 25 Mbps full duplex)

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-10

Installation Chapter 2

Single Antennas at Both Sites

By selecting a single antenna at both sites the ODUs operate with a single
radio that is connected to the ANT 1 connector. The second radio is auto-
matically shut down.
Single at One Site, Dual Antennas at the Other
In this mode one of the sites uses the ODU with a single antenna while the
other site uses the ODU with a dual antenna.
The advantages in this mode in comparison to using a single antenna in
both sites are doubled total Tx Power and additional polarization and/or
space diversity (depending on the polarization of installed antennas).
The air rates used in this mode are same as when using single antennas in
both sites.
Table 2-2 summarizes the situation:

Table 2-2: MIMO - Diversity settings

Number of
Max Full
Antennas
Mode Graphic Indication Duplex
Capacity
Site A Site B

MIMO 50 Mbps

2 2

Diversity 25 Mbps

2 1 25 Mbps

1 2 25 Mbps

1 1 25 Mbps

The rates used by RADWIN 2000 are shown in Table 2-3 below:

Table 2-3: RADWIN 2000 Air rates

Air-Rate
Antenna Modulation FEC
[Mbps]

Single BPSK 1/2 6.5

Single QPSK 1/2 13

Single QPSK 3/4 19.5

Single 16QAM 1/2 26

Single 16QAM 3/4 39

Single 64QAM 2/3 52

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-11

Installation Chapter 2

Table 2-3: RADWIN 2000 Air rates (Continued)

Air-Rate
Antenna Modulation FEC
[Mbps]

Single 64QAM 3/4 58.5

Single 64QAM 5/6 65

Dual BPSK 1/2 13

Dual QPSK 1/2 26

Dual QPSK 3/4 39

Dual 16QAM 1/2 52

Dual 16QAM 3/4 78

Dual 64QAM 2/3 104

Dual 64QAM 3/4 117

Dual 64QAM 5/6 130

Considerations for Changing Antenna Parameters

Let:
max Available Tx Power denote the maximum Tx Power practically
available from an ODU. It appears as Tx Power per Radio in
Figure 2-10 below.
maxRegEIRP denote the maximum EIRP available by regulation. It will
be determined by three factors:
• per band/regulation
• per channel bandwidth
• antenna gain
It appears in Figure 2-10 as Max EIRP.
maxRegTxPower denote the maximum regulatory Tx Power for the
equipment, also having regard the above three points.
Then, the following relationship must be satisfied:
maxAvailableTxPower ≤ min(maxRegEIRP ... (*)
– AntennaGain + CableLoss, maxRegTxPower)
These parameters are controlled as follows:

¾ To set Tx Power and configure antennas:

1. Click the Configure buttons in turn to configure the antennas on both
sides of the link. Each one offers a dialog like this:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-12

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-10: Antenna configuration dialog

2. Choose the antenna type and required transmission (Tx) power for the
first site and click OK. You will receive the following warning:

Figure 2-11: Antenna type change warning

3. Repeat the process for the second site.
4. At the same time you can set the Antenna Gain and Cable Loss.
The Tx Power (per radio) indicates the power of each radio inside the
ODU and is used for Link Budget Calculations. The Tx Power (System)
shows the total transmission power of the ODU and is used to calculate
the EIRP according to regulations.

To see the relationship between Tx Power (radio) and Tx Power (system),

note that dBm = 10 × log 10milliWatt so that if you double the power in
Note milliWatts (for two radios) then dBm will increase by 10 × log 102 ≈ 3 .

If you choose to set the Antenna Gain and Cable Loss, you will receive
the following warning message:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-13

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-12: Antenna parameters change warning

• The Max EIRP level will be automatically set according to the selected
band and regulation.
• The EIRP level is the sum of the System Tx Power and the Antenna
Note Gain minus the Cable Loss.

If inequality (*) above is violated, then the following warning window is

displayed:

Figure 2-13: Tx Power Limits

The precise relationship between the items in inequality (*) and the win-
dow of Figure 2-10 is as follows:
• Required Tx Power (per radio) will be adjusted down to the
lesser of the value entered and maxAvailableTxPower
• Tx Power (system) is maxAvailableTxPower + 3 (for 2
radios)
• Max EIRP is maxRegEIRP.
• EIRP is maxAvailableTx Power + Antenna Gain - Cable
Loss
The table in Figure 2-13 only shows rates where the maximum Tx
Power is the limitation, rather than regulations. When you close the win-

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-14

Installation Chapter 2

dow of Figure 2-13, the change you requested will not be honored,
and you will need to try again.

Since our demonstration link is entirely indoors, we have reduced Tx Power

to 5 dBm to obtain a realistic RSS. Although this is much too low for field
Note use, the method is general.

Figure 2-14: Antennas configured for two dual and Tx power 5 dBm
5. Choose Dual Antenna mode if appropriate. The green Antenna Configura-
tion diagram indicates the active state. For dual antennas in Diversity
mode it looks like this:

There are intermediate modes available for dual antennas opposite a sin-
gle antenna as set out on page 2-9 above.
If you make a change you will see a warning similar to this:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-15

Installation Chapter 2

A similarly worded warning applies to a s switch from MIMO to Diversity

mode
6. When you are finished with Tx Power configuration, Click Next.

Step 5, Hub Site Synchronization Settings

Figure 2-15: HSS Settings

The Synchronization Status dialog box displays the current status of each
side of the link. See Chapter 10 for instructions about installing and con-
figuring collocated links. If you do not require HSS, click Next.

Step 6, Services
The Services dialog appears:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-16

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-16: Services and Rates - RADWIN 2000 C only

Figure 2-17: Services and Rates for RADWIN 2000 collocated as a client

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-17

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-18: Services and Rates for models RADWIN 2000 L and RADWIN
2000 PDH
For -
• a collocated link
• Models RADWIN 2000 L and RADWIN 2000 PDH
proceed to TDM Services selection.
Otherwise, you can use the green slider to allocate asymmetric Ethernet
capacity by changing the Transmission Ratio between the sites.
For example: Suppose that during congestion, you might want to use 70%
for the downlink and 30% for the uplink. Your choice would typically be
based on your experienced traffic load during periods of congestion.

If you change the Transmission Ratio, you will be offered the following
warning:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-18

 Installation Chapter 2

If you have active collocated links, or if you are uncertain of whether

collocated links provide TDM services do not use this option now. You can
Caution do it at a less disruptive time using the Link Configuration (Chapter 7).

Otherwise, click Yes to continue.

Limitations on the use of Asymmetric Allocation

For non collocated links, capacity allocation between uplink and downlink
traffic is determined automatically according to actual Ethernet traffic and
air interface conditions. Your manual allocation using this feature “cuts in”
during congestion.

Asymmetric Allocation and Collocation

The use of Asymmetric Allocation is limited where the link is collocated. Pos-
sible scenarios are shown in Table 2-4. In all cases where Asymmetric Allo-
cation is available, it is static for all traffic conditions.

Table 2-4: Asymmetric Allocation with Collocated Links - Scenarios

HSS Master HSS Client Scenario: If you try to... Result Remarks

WinLink 1000 Link down Reversion to 50/50 restores link

• Releases prior to 2.4 -

Link down
• Release 2.4 later (RAD-
WIN 2000 PDH and
Change master to RADWIN 2000 L series) Release 2.4 and later (RADWIN
RADWIN 2000
asymmetric allocation - Link down 2000 C series) - Asymmetric
RADWIN 2000
• Release 2.4 and later Allocation slider visible but
(RADWIN 2000 C cannot be changed
series) - TDM services
stopped, link set to
transmission ratio of
master

WinLink 1000
RADWIN 2000
Change client to Asymmetric Allocation slider You cannot do this
RADWIN 2000
asymmetric not displayed

WinLink 1000
WinLink 1000
Change client to Asymmetric Allocation slider You cannot do this
RADWIN 2000
asymmetric not displayed

The Services and Rates dialog as shown in Figure 2-16 will be different:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-19

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-19: Services and Rates - RADWIN 2000 C master, RADWIN 2000
clients
The yellow areas should not be used. Using those areas, you may loose the
collocated link with the longest distance between sites.

Asymmetric Allocation and TDM

You cannot use this feature when TDM services are used. Selection of TDM
ports as in the next section will reset the Ethernet balance to 50% in each
direction and the green slider will not appear in subsequent Installation or
Configuration runs.
Cancelling TDM port use will make the allocation bar reappear, re-enabling
asymmetric Ethernet traffic allocation.
If you are not using TDM services, clicking Next will take you to Step 8,
and completion of the installation. Your Ethernet capacity allocation will be
reflected in Figure 2-34 below.

TDM Services selection

¾ To select services:
1. Click the Configure button. The TDM services dialog is displayed:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-20

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-20: TDM Type selection

2. Using the TDM Type radio buttons, choose E1 or T1. You are now able to
select the required service ports:

Figure 2-21: TDM service port selection

3. Use the spin button to choose consecutive service ports, the Select
Maximum button to choose all available ports or click on individual
ports to choose them.

• Ethernet is always selected.

• The maximum available services will be reduced in accordance with
Note actual air interface capacity.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-21

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-22: TDM Service port selection - seven services selected

4. Click OK. You are returned to the Services and rates dialog of
Figure 2-24. It is updated to reflect your choice.

Figure 2-23: Services and Rates - Services chosen

The selected ports will be enabled for both sides of the link. You
cannot for example, use ports 1, 3, 5, 7 on one side and 2, 4, 6, 8
Note on the other.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-22

Installation Chapter 2

Modulation Rate Selection

You may choose a specific modulation rate or use Adaptive.

Figure 2-24: Services and Rates dialog: Available rates

¾ To choose a modulation rate:

1. Choose Adaptive or one of the available rates.
2. Click Evaluate to continue or click the TDM Jitter Buffer tab to set the
TDM Jitter Buffer (see next section).
The service is activated as show below:

You are returned to the Services and rates dialog of Figure 2-24.

Setting Monitored Hot Standby Mode

If you are not using Hot Standby Mode, you may skip this section.
To install and use the Hot Standby feature, see Chapter 12. The following
procedure can be used to switch links between primary and secondary or to
disable the mode.

¾ To set the Hot Standby Mode:

1. Click the Hot Standby tab. The following dialog appears:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-23

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-25: Choosing Hot Standby Mode

2. Click the radio button to make this link primary or secondary.

Ethernet Ring
To install and use the Ethernet Ring feature, see Chapter 13.

Ethernet QoS
To install and use the Ethernet QoS feature, see Chapter 23.

Setting the TDM Jitter Buffer

¾ To set the TDM Jitter Buffer size:
1. Click the TDM Jitter Buffer tab. The following dialog appears:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-24

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-26: TDM Jitter Buffer Configuration

• The receiver jitter buffer for each site can be enlarged,

thereby increasing system resistance to interference (the
Note larger the jitter buffer, the longer the interference period
that the system will overcome without TDM errors).
• You can also decrease the jitter buffer to decrease the sys-
tem delay.
• The jitter buffer can be configured between 2.0 and 16.0
ms.
• After setting the new value you must evaluate the expected
quality. During the evaluation the TBFR (TDM Block Failure
Ratio)bar is displayed. You select either Next, which per-
forms the change or Back to cancel the change. Notice that
the Jitter Buffer is configured per site.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-25

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-27: TDM Jitter Buffer Configuration - TBFR evaluation bar

2. After setting the jitter buffer size, if grayed out, the Evaluate button is
enabled while both Back and Next are disabled as shown in the next
figure:

Figure 2-28: Services and TDM delay set - link ready for evaluation

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-26

Installation Chapter 2

3. You may make any further changes to the Service Configuration

or the Jitter buffer. When you are satisfied, click the Evaluate.
The optimum transmission rate for the selected services is evaluated.
Following a short delay for processing, Back and Next are
enabled.
4. Click Next to continue.

The transmission rates used by RADWIN 2000 are shown in Table 2-3
above.
Note

Step 7, TDM Clock Configuration

The following dialog is displayed:

Figure 2-29: TDM Parameters Configuration (1)

¾ To configure TDM clock parameters:

1. For any individual port, click it. For the same parameters for all
ports, click the Select Maximum tag.

• Select Maximum will select the maximum number of services that

were configured for the air interface for configuration
• Deselect All unconditionally deselects all of the services for configu-
ration
Note
• Without selecting anything, right-clicking any port will cause the
appearance of the drop down list of Figure 2-30 below

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-27

Installation Chapter 2

2. Click Configure. The following drop down list is displayed:

Figure 2-30: TDM Parameters Configuration (2)

3. Click the required parameter. Their meanings are as follows:

Please keep in mind that what follows is per port.

Note

Figure 2-31: TDM Parameters

Transparent/Transparent
The clock at Site A regenerates the clock from Site B and
vice versa.
Loop time/Recover
The Site A port receive-clock is used as the transmit-clock
for that port on both sides of the link.
Recover/Loop time
The Site B port receive-clock is used as the transmit-clock
for that port on both sides of the link.
Internal/Recover

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-28

Installation Chapter 2

The Site A port uses its internal oscillator to generate its

transmit clock while the Site B port regenerates the clock
received at the Site A port.
Recover/Internal
The Site B port uses its internal oscillator to generate its
transmit clock while the Site A port regenerates the clock
received at the Site B port.
4. Click Finish to complete the wizard.

Step 8, Installation Summary and Exit

Figure 2-32: Installation Wizard Exit Summary

Click Done to return to the main window.
The main window now reflects the installation:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-29

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-33: Main window of the Manager after installation with loaded
trunks

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-30

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-34: Main window of the Manager after installation with asymmetric
capacity allocation - No HSS
Figure 2-34 shows the results of a 70%/30% Transmission ratio on a lone
link (no HSS). Observe that near 100Mbs is available in either direction

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-31

Installation Chapter 2

Figure 2-35: Main window of the Manager after installation with asymmetric
capacity allocation - HSS enabled
Figure 2-35 shows the results of a 70%/30% Transmission ratio on a lone
link with HSS. The allocation is “hard”.

¾ To verify the installation:

• Verify that the Received Signal Strength (RSS) is according to expected
results as determined by the Link Budget Calculator.

Installation mode, as described above, may be re-entered using Site:A or

Site:B and Installation Mode in the Site Configuration dialog. Some
Installation mode functionality may cause a break in, or degrade link
service.
Caution
If you can accomplish link changes without affecting the service, always
prefer to use Configuration mode, described in Chapter 7.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 2-32

 Chapter 4

Hardware Installation
This chapter sets out the requirements and procedures for the hardware
installation and alignment of a RADWIN 2000 link in accordance with the
prior planning as set out in Chapter 2. It is intended to guide qualified field
technicians.

Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced

installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety
codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate
government regulatory authorities. Failure to do so may expose the end
Warning user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities. RADWIN and its
resellers or distributors are not liable for injury, damage or violation of
regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas.

The material in this chapter is generic to all RADWIN radio link products
unless stated otherwise.
Note

Safety Practices

Preventing overexposure to RF energy

To protect against overexposure to RF energy, install the ODUs so as to pro-
vide and maintain minimal separation distances from all persons.
When the system is operational, avoid standing directly in front of the
antenna. Strong RF fields are present when the transmitter is on. The ODU
must not be deployed in a location where it is possible for people to stand
or walk inadvertently in front of the antenna.

Grounding
All RADWIN products should be grounded during operation. In addition:
• The ODU should be earthed by a wire with diameter of at least
12AWG.
The RADWIN 2000 ODU must be properly grounded to protect
against lightning. It is the user's responsibility to install the

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-1

Protection against Lightning Chapter 4

equipment in accordance with Section 810 of the National Electric

Code, ANSI/NFPA No.70-1984 or Section 54 of the Canadian
Electrical Code. These codes describe correct installation procedures
for grounding the outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire and discharge
unit. It also lays down the size of grounding conductors and
connection requirements for grounding electrodes.
The RADWIN 2000 ODU must be grounded to a Protective Earth as
described in Chapter 18 and in accordance with the Local Electrical
Regulations.
• The earth lug on the IDU-C should be connected to the protective
earth at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider.
Rack-mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks
and cabinets.
Further, you should -
• Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last
• Never connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment
• Ensure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting
the ground
More detailed guidelines are supplied in Chapter 18.

Protection against Lightning

The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user
requirements. All of RADWIN outdoor units are designed with surge limiting
circuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes. RADWIN
recommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to protect the
equipment from nearby lightning strikes.
See Chapter 18 for detailed installation instructions of lightning protection
devices.

General
• It is recommended that installation of the outdoor unit be contracted
to a professional installer.
• Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecom-
munication lines, you should remove jewelry or any other metallic
object that may come into contact with energized parts.
• Use extreme care when installing antennas near power lines.
• Use extreme care when working at heights.
• When using an AC power source for RADWIN 2000 always use the
AC power adapter supplied by RADWIN.
• Use the right tools. In addition to standard tools required for any
kind of ODU or antenna installation, RADWIN 2000 requires addi-
tional specific tools detailed on page 4-5 below.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-2

Package Contents Chapter 4

Package Contents
The RADWIN 2000 packages include the following items:

ODU Package Contents

The ODU package contains:
• One ODU - see Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3 below for front and rear
view
• An ODU mounting kit - see Figure 4-1 below
• A CD containing -
• the RADWIN Manager
• Quick Start Guide
• User Manual - the document you are reading
• Link Budget Calculator
• Label showing the MAC address and the alternative Community
string. The label is self-adhesive. You should keep this label safe
• Cable glands (to be used with the ODU-IDU cable)

Figure 4-1: ODU Mounting kit

ODU - Front View ODU - Rear View

Figure 4-2: Connectorized ODU - Front and rear views

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-3

IDU-E package containing: Chapter 4

ODU - Front View ODU - Rear View

Figure 4-3: Integrated ODU - Front and rear views

IDU-E package containing:

• IDU-E
• AC/DC Converter
• IDU-E wall-mounting drilling template
• Self adhesive label showing the IDU LED operation

Figure 4-4: IDU-E- front view

IDU-C Package Contents

The IDU-c package contains:
• IDU-C - see Figure 4-5 below.
• 19” rack mounting kit - see Figure 4-7 below
• Two DC power plugs for power cables - see Figure 4-7 below

Figure 4-5: IDU-C Package contents - the IDU-C, Ethernet only

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-4

External Antenna Package Contents Chapter 4

Figure 4-6: IDU-C Package contents - the IDU-C, 16 E1/T1 ports

Figure 4-7: IDU-C Package contents - the mounting kit and DC power plugs

External Antenna Package Contents

• Antenna
• RF cable 1m (3’) long; two cables supplied with bipolar antennas,
single cable supplied with monopolar antennas
• Mounting kit

Additional Tools and Materials Required

The following is a list of the equipment and materials required to install
RADWIN 2000 hardware.

Tools and Materials

• Crimping tool for RJ-45 (if the ODU-IDU cable is without connectors)
• Spanner/wrench 13 mm (½”)
• Drill (for wall mounting only)
• Cable ties
• Sealing material

Cables and connectors

• ODU grounding cable 12AWG
• IDU grounding cable 18AWG
• ODU-IDU cable (outdoor class, CAT-5e, 4 twisted pairs, 24AWG)

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-5

Hardware Installation Sequence Chapter 4

• For PoE based links: A crossed Ethernet LAN cable

Hardware Installation Sequence

The following steps are required to install the RADWIN 2000 system:
1. Mounting the ODUs, page page 4-7.
2. Mounting the external antennas (if used), page page 4-7.
3. Mounting the Lightning Protection devices (if used), page page 4-8.
4. Outdoor connections, page page 4-8.
5. Mounting the IDUs, page page 4-9.
6. Indoor connections, page page 4-12.
7. Aligning the ODUs/antennas, page page 4-13.
See Figure 4-8 below, which illustrates a typical installation of a RADWIN
2000 or a WinLink 1000 with external antenna(s).

Figure 4-8: Typical Installation (with external antenna) Left: RADWIN 2000 Right: WinLink
1000
The installation steps are detailed in the following sections.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-6

Outdoor installation Chapter 4

Outdoor installation

Preparing the ODU before Deployment

Each ODU must be pre-loaded with an IP address. This may be done prior
to deployment in the field, or on-site using a Laptop computer. The process
is quite straight-forward and described in Chapter 19.

Mounting the ODU

The ODU can be mounted on a pole or a wall. In both installations, the sup-
plied mounting kit is used to secure the ODU.

A mast-sited ODU typically uses a pole attached to the mast.

Note

A RADWIN 2000 link operates in pairs of two ODUs with the same configu-
ration. Both ODUs must be installed, and the antennas aligned for maxi-
mum throughput.

Prior to connecting cables to the ODU, the protective earth terminal (screw)
of the ODU must be connected to an external protective ground conductor
or to a grounded pole.

• Only a qualified person using the proper safety equipment should

Warning climb the antenna mast
• Only qualified professional personnel should install or dismantle
ODUs and masts

¾ To mount the ODU on a pole or a wall:

1. Ensure that the ODU is properly grounded.
2. Mount the ODU onto the pole or wall. Ensure that the unit is oriented so
that the cable connectors are at the bottom. (If they are on top,
water may penetrate into the unit causing damage.) It is possible
to mount an ODU horizontally. See Chapter 17 for details.
3. Refer also to Chapter 17 for detailed ODU mounting kit contents and
schematics.

• Do not tighten the ODU to its mounting brackets until the alignment
process of the antenna is complete.
• Ensure that there are no direct obstructions in front of the ODU or
Note interference from man-made obstacles.

Mounting external antennas

If you are using ODU with an integrated antenna, skip to Mounting the
Lightning Protection Devices below.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-7

Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices Chapter 4

The supplied mounting kit is used to mount the antenna onto a pole. The
antennas must be aligned for maximum throughput.

Do not stand in front of a live antenna.

Warning

¾ To mount an external antenna:

1. To mount an external antenna, ensure that the antenna is properly
grounded and then mount the antenna onto the pole. Refer to Chapter
17 for detailed antenna mounting instructions.
2. Follow the mounting instructions supplied with the antenna.

Mounting the Lightning Protection Devices

The use of lightning protection is dependent on regulatory and end user
requirements. The RADWIN 2000 ODU is designed with surge limiting cir-
cuits to minimize the risk of damage due to lightning strikes. RADWIN rec-
ommends the use of additional surge arrestor devices to protect the
equipment from nearby lightning strikes.
Refer to Chapter 18 for detailed installation instructions of lightning pro-
tection devices.

Outdoor Connections
¾ To complete the outdoor connections:
1. Connect the ground cable to the ODU chassis as marked on the ODU.
2. Connect the antenna cable(s) to the ODU.
3. Connect the lightning protection device to the ODU (see Chapter 18).
4. Attach the ODU-IDU cable to the ODU RJ-45 connector (see Appendix B
for the connector pinout)
5. Screw in the cable glands to ensure hermetic sealing of the ODU.
6. Secure the cables to the pole, mast or brackets using UV-rated cable ties.

Indoor Installation

Installing IDU-E
IDU-E Installation
The IDU-E can be wall mounted, placed on a desktop or take up one half of
a 1U rack slot. The unit should be grounded, cabled to the ODU and con-
nected to power using the supplied AC/DC adapter.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-8

Mounting the IDU-C Chapter 4

Figure 4-9: New style IDU-E: Rear panel

Mounting the IDU-C

The RADWIN 2000 IDU-As are all rack mountable, as shown in Figure 4-
10. A front panel keyed schematic of a rack mounted IDU-C is shown in the
figure below.

Figure 4-10: IDU-C front panel

In Figure 4-11 we display a perspective view of the IDU-C:

Figure 4-11: IDU-C - A perspective view

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-9

Mounting the IDU-C Chapter 4

Further description of the keyed items in Figure 4-10 is shown in Table 4-

1 below:

Table 4-1: Components of an IDU-C front panel

Key Label Remarks

A Indicator LEDs See Figure 4-12.

B ODU Port RJ-45 connector, see Table B-1.

C LAN RJ45Ports Ethernet, RJ-45 connector, see Table B-3.

D LAN SFP Port See Appendix C.

E Alarm Ports Standard DB25 female connector, see Table B-7.

F Label indent Place for adhesive identification labels.

G Primary 3 pin Power Connector

Standard 3 pins in line power connector, see Table B-8.
H Secondary 3 pin Power Connector

I Grounding Lug Use the lug supplied.

J Rack mounting holes

K Detachable Rack mounting brackets

L 0, 4, 8 or 16 E1/T1 Ports See Table B-5.

M Standby Port Hot Standby ready: HSB cable socket, see Table B-6.

The Indicator LEDs (Item A in Table 4-1 above) are shown in more detail
below:

Figure 4-12: IDU-C Front Panel LEDs

Figure 4-13: IDU-E Front Panel LEDs

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-10

Mounting the IDU-C Chapter 4

The purpose of the LEDs is shown in Table 4-2 below:

Table 4-2: IDU-C Front Panel LEDs

Name Color Function

Green IDU operational

Blinking Green During power-up only
IDU Red Failure
Blinking Orange During power-up; continues if ODU fails to load IDU firmware.
Also, when using an IDU-C to replace a PoE device in which case all other LEDs off.

Green ODU-to-IDU communication link is operating

ODU
Red ODU-to-IDU communication link is disrupted

Green Wireless link is synchronized

AIR I/F Orange During installation mode; also signals software mismatch on some identical ODUs
Red Wireless link lost synchronization

Green E1 or T1 line is synchronized

Orange Alarm detected at the opposite site interface; Normal or LOSS
SVC Blinking Orange Local or remote loopback
Red Alarm detected at this site interface
Off Ethernet only IDU or E1/T1 not configured

HSS See supplementary Table 4-3 following.

Hot Standby Mode Link State

Green Primary Active

STBY Blinking Green Secondary Not active

Red Primary Not active
Orange Secondary Active
Off Off HSM not activated

Table 4-3: IDU-C and New Style IDU-E Front Panel LEDs for HSS
Color Function

Green This ODU is HSS master, generating signal, and HSS Sync is OK

Blinking
This ODU is a HSS client and in Sync
Green

Red HSS not operational due to improper signal detection. This ODU is not transmitting

HSS is operational. One of the following conditions apply:

• This ODU is a master that is generating signals and detecting signals
• This ODU is a master that is generating signals but detected improper signals
Orange
• This ODU is a client “Continue Tx” but is not detecting signals
• This ODU is a client “Disable Tx” and is detecting signals from multiple sources
All orange cases transmit.

HSS is not activated

Off
Disconnection between ODU and IDU

¾ To mount an IDU-C:
1. Attach the rack mounting brackets (K) to the IDU.
2. Bolt the IDU into an empty slot in the rack, ensuring that it sits securely.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-11

Connecting power to the IDU Chapter 4

3. Ground the IDU to the rack using grounding lug I. The IDU should be left
permanently grounded.

Instead of using the rack mounting brackets, the IDU may be rail mounted
using the four screw holes on each of its sides.
Note

Connecting power to the IDU

The IDU-C has redundant power connection circuits (items G and H in
Figure 4-10 above). An enlarged schematic of the power connectors is
shown in below:

Figure 4-14: IDU-C Power connectors

The connectors are 3 pin in line female, with polarities (left to right) minus,
ground, plus. To avoid damage to the IDU, always use an AC/DC adapter
supplied by RADWIN.
Ensure that the IDUs at both sites are powered up.
The IDU-E has a single three pin power connector, the same as used on the
IDU-C.

Connecting the ODU to the IDU

The ODU-IDU cable conducts all the user traffic between the IDU and the
ODU, and also provides power to the ODU. The maximum length of the
ODU-IDU cable is 100m (328ft) in accordance with 10/100BaseT standards.
The ODU-IDU cable is supplied pre-assembled with RJ-45 connectors, at the
length specified when ordering, or as a cable drum with spare connectors. If
the ODU-IDU cable was not ordered, use an outdoor class, CAT-5e 24AWG
shielded cable. See Appendix B for Wiring Specifications.
To connect the ODU to the IDU, route the cable from the ODU to the IDU,
secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to the ODU RJ-45
connector on the IDU (see item B in Figure 4-10 above).

Installing a Link using PoE Devices

The PoE device is a very simple unit having a power input connector and
two Ethernet ports. It is AC powered, and has a power LED.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-12

Connecting User Equipment Chapter 4

¾ To prepare a link using PoE devices:

1. To connect the ODU to the PoE device, route the cable from the ODU to
the PoE device, secure the cable along its path and connect the cable to
the LAN-OUT RJ-45 connector on the PoE device.
2. Connect it to AC power.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 for the second link.

Connecting User Equipment

¾ To connect user equipment to an IDU:
1. Connect user switch/router or any other compatible device to the IDU
panel RJ-45 ports designated LAN. (For an IDU-C, see item C in
Figure 4-10 above.)
2. Connect user E1/T1 traffic to the IDU panel RJ-45 ports designated
TRUNKS. (For an IDU-C, see labeled item L in Figure 4-10 above.)
3. IDU-C only: To use the SFP Port (labeled item D in Figure 4-10 above),
insert an SFP plug-in module into the port and connect the user switch/
router or any other compatible device to the SFP plug-in module.
Refer to Appendix B for connector pinouts.

Do not connect two LAN ports to the same network, or flooding may occur.
Note

¾ To connect user equipment to a PoE device:

• Connect a user switch, router or any other compatible device to the PoE
device RJ-45 port designated LAN-IN. Refer to Appendix B for connec-
tor pinouts.

Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas

You perform antenna alignment using the ODU's audible tone.
To speed up the installation time, alignment of a RADWIN 2000 system
should be performed by two teams simultaneously, at site A and at site B.

¾ To align ODUs with integrated antennas or external bipolar antennas:

1. For external bipolar antennas: Using a coax cable with N-Type connec-
tors, connect the vertical polarization connector of the antenna to the
ANT 1 connector of the ODU.
2. For external bipolar antennas: Using a coax cable with N-Type connec-
tors, connect the horizontal polarization connector of the antenna to the
ANT 2 connector of the ODU.
3. Ensure that power is connected to the IDUs at both sites.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-13

Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas Chapter 4

4. Ensure normal operation of the IDUs by the LED indications on the front
panel.
Provided that site A detects the signal from site B, the ODU starts beep-
ing 20 seconds after power up, and continues beeping until the ODUs are
aligned, and the installation is complete.
In the following steps, “antenna” refers both to an external antenna and
an integrated antenna.
5. Direct the antenna of site B in the direction of site A. This is simplified if a
previous site survey has been completed and azimuths are known.

When aligning the antennas, do not stand in front of a live antenna.

Warning

6. Make a horizontal sweep of 180 degrees with the site A antenna so that
the strongest signal from site B can be detected.
7. Slowly turn the site A antenna back towards the position of site B, listen-
ing to the tone until the best signal is reached. See the following figure
for audible signal variations.

Figure 4-15: Beep Sequence for antenna alignment

• Three beeps and a pause is 'best signal so far'

• Two beeps and a pause is 'signal quality increased'
• One beep and pause is 'no change in signal'
• Long beep and short pause is 'signal quality decreased'
Note
• One beep and a long pause is 'no air link'
• Any other signal does not relate to antenna alignment

8. Secure the site A antenna to the pole/wall.

9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 for site B.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-14

Connecting and Aligning ODUs / Antennas Chapter 4

¾ To align two external monopolar antennas:

The ODU buzzer only works on the radio connected to the ANT 1 connector
marked . You will therefore need to use ANT 1 to align both antennas in

Note turn. Upon completion of the alignment procedure, you may connect the
two antennas to ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors.

1. Using a coax cable with N-Type connectors, connect one antenna to the
ANT 1 connector of the ODU.
2. Follow the steps 3 to 7 above to align the antenna connected to the ODU
connector ANT 1 on both sides of the link.
3. On both sides of the link, disconnect the antenna connected to the ODU
connector ANT 1. Connect the other antenna to connector ANT 1 and fol-
low the steps 3 to 7 above to align the second antenna.
4. Secure the antennas to the pole/wall.
5. Restore one of the antennas to ANT 2 on both sides of the link.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 4-15

 Chapter 3

Site Preparation
Planning the Link Site

Overview
Link site planning consists of a set of surveys, which must be carried out
before any equipment is brought to the site. If for some reason, the out-
come of any of these surveys is negative, site re-location will need to be
considered.
A Site Survey consists of three stages:
1. Preliminary survey - The proposed link is analyzed in the office using a
topographic map.
2. Physical survey - The locations of the indoor and outdoor equipment are
determined on-site.
3. Radio Frequency (RF) survey - It is recommended that the installation
area be scanned with a spectrum analyzer, to identify RF interference so
as to determine a clear channel for radio installation (on-site).

The Site Survey

Introduction
RADWIN wireless links must be planned before installation. The designated
installation site must be appraised to determine that the wireless system is
able to operate efficiently and provide connectivity without signal degrada-
tion.
RADWIN 2000 offers a wide operating frequency range. A free frequency
channel must be determined within the operating range, for optimum per-
formance.

Recommended Equipment
Stage 1: Preliminary Survey
• Topological map of the area
• Urban map of the area

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 3-1

Stage 1: Preliminary Survey Chapter 3

• Compass
Stage 2: Physical Survey
• 100 meter tape measure
• Ohmmeter, to check ground connection
• Binoculars
• Map
• Digital camera
• Paper, pencil, and a clipboard
• GPS device (optional)
• Compass (optional)
Stage 3: RF Survey
• Spectrum Analyzer with Max Hold function and screen capture facil-
ity that can store multiple images, for documentation purposes
• RF accessories (connectors and cables)
• Communication devices (for example, cellular phones, or a set of
walkie-talkies)

Stage 1: Preliminary Survey

A preliminary survey is necessary before visiting potential installation sites.
As much detail as possible should be obtained about the two designated
ODU installation sites and the area between them.

¾ To perform a preliminary survey:

1. Mark the two designated installation sites on a topographic map of the
area.
2. Measure the distance between the sites; check that it is within the speci-
fied range of the equipment.
3. On the urban map, check for developed areas situated between the two
installation sites. Pay attention to these areas when performing the phys-
ical site survey; there may be tall buildings, RF towers, or transmitters,
which could cause interference to the link.
4. Check the area between the two sites for obstructions such as:
• High ground - hills or mountains
• Lakes or large bodies of water. Water has a reflection effect on RF
signals like a building. This type of reflection causes the received
amplitude to be reduced. As a rule of thumb, the presence of a large
body of water between the link sites may double the required
antenna height.
5. Determine and record the compass bearings between both ODUs, rela-
tive to north.
6. If there are obstructions between the two sites, calculate the Fresnel
Zone (see Chapter 21 for details).
7. If the site chosen does not meet requirements, consider alternative sites.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 3-2

Stage 2: Physical Survey Chapter 3

8. Use the Link Budget Calculator (on the CD supplied with the equipment
or using the RADWIN Manager) to determine the expected performance.

Stage 2: Physical Survey

The physical site survey reviews the environment of the proposed installa-
tion location, to ensure that the link sites are suitable for the wireless net-
work. The results of the physical site survey should be recorded.

It is advisable to go on a clear day, so you can more easily see any

obstructions between the two sites.
Note

¾ To perform a physical survey:

1. From the compass readings taken in the preliminary survey, find the azi-
muth (horizontal position) that the ODU should face towards the second
ODU.
2. Using binoculars, locate any obstructions such as tall trees, high build-
ings, hills or mountains. Look for other RF towers between the two sites.
Mark the locations of the obstructions on the map.
3. Determine the location for the ODU (having regard for existing rooftop
installations and tower space). It should be above any obstructions, con-
sidering the Fresnel zone (see Chapter 21).
4. If you need to install the ODU on a tower, make sure that the tower is far
away from overhead electric power lines.
5. Determine a location for the indoor equipment; it should be as close as
possible to the ODU. At an existing site, there is probably an equipment
room with cable-routing channels.

The IDU - ODU cable length limit is 100m, in accordance with IEEE 10/
100BaseT standards.
Note

6. Measure and record the path length of the cable from the ODU position
to the indoor equipment room.
7. Determine the ground and lightning connection points of the installation.
The ODU and IDU must both be grounded.
8. Using the Ohmmeter, measure and record the resistance of the required
installation to the grounding point. The resistance must be less than 1O
ohm.
9. Review the results of the physical site survey. Decide if the site is suitable
for the wireless network installation.
• If the site is suitable, continue with stage 3, the RF survey
• If the site is not suitable, survey another site

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 3-3

Additional Outdoor Site Requirements Chapter 3

Additional Outdoor Site Requirements

The ambient outdoor operating temperature should be -35 to 60°C (-31 to
140°F).

Additional Indoor Site Requirements

The following requirements guarantee proper operation of the system:
• For IDU-C units, allow at least 90 cm (36 “) of front clearance for
operating and maintenance accessibility. Allow at least 10 cm (4 “)
clearance at the rear of the unit for signal lines and interface cables
• The ambient operating temperature should be 0 to 50°C (32 to 122
°F) at a humidity of up to 90%, non condensing

Stage 3: RF Survey
The RF survey examines the wireless environment of the installation site, to
determine whether there are available channels within the radio operating
frequency band. An RF survey is performed using a spectrum analyzer.
It is advisable to familiarize yourself with the spectrum analyzer before
going out on site, specifically the Max Hold and Marker functions.
You should perform the RF survey at both proposed link sites.
The survey should be carried out during a busy time of day, to best judge
the worst-case radio interference. Allow 2-4 hours duration for a good RF
survey.

It is possible to install the link and use the RADWIN Manager to find a clear
channel. Each frequency channel can be evaluated in turn. Achievement of a
clear channel is indicated by the marker in the Quality bar on the Channel
Note Setting window (see Figure 5-6) moving into the green area.

RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites

Interference may arise from
• Self interference from collocated RADWIN radios
• Other collocated radio devices installed on the same site.
To avoid or minimize interference, follow these recommendations:
• For collocated RADWIN units, use an HSS unit to synchronize
between them. Select a different operating channels for each collo-
cated RADWIN unit.
• If one or more collocated units are not RADWIN units, ensure that
there is a physical separation of at least three meters between a
RADWIN unit and any other collocated radio on the site.
• Use the largest possible frequency gap between these units.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 3-4

RF Planning for Dense Installations and Collocated Sites Chapter 3

• Choose the best frequency channel (as clear as possible form inter-
ference). You may change band with “Combo” WinLink 1000 prod-
ucts and all RADWIN 2000 products).
• To select a frequency channel, move the link to Installation Mode
(using Site configuration) and start the Installation wizard. In the
Channel Settings window, use the quality bar at the bottom to
help you choose a better channel (clearer of interference).
• If you are using WinLink 1000 radios, install the collocated links with
different antenna polarizations.
• If you are using the RADWIN 2000 radios, use the Spectrum View
tool to find the best working channel (Tools | Spectrum View).
• Decreasing the Tx Power of a link will reduce collocation interference
(Site Configuration | Air Interface).

Use the Link Budget Calculator to determine the minimum Tx Power

required to maintain link stability.
Note

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 3-5

 Chapter 5

Getting Started with the

RADWIN Manager
Installing the RADWIN Manager Application

Minimum System Requirements

The RADWIN Manager application is distributed on a CD. Operating system
specific PC resources required by the application are set out in Table 5-1
below:

Table 5-1: PC Requirements for the RADWIN Manager Application

Windows Version

2000 XP Pro Vista/7

Memory 128 MB 512 MB 1 GB

Processor P III P IV P IV Dual Core

Requirements common to all systems are:

• Hard disk: 1 GB free space
• Network: 10/100BaseT NIC
• Graphics: 1024x768 screen resolution with 16 bit color
• Microsoft Explorer version 5.01 or later

Installing the Software

Any PC running the RADWIN Manager application can be used to configure
a RADWIN 2000 link.

¾ To install the RADWIN Manager application:

1. Insert the CD into the CD/DVD drive of your computer.
The CD opening window appears:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-1

Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager Chapter 5

2. Choose Install RADWIN Manager and follow the on-screen instructions

of the installation wizard to complete the setup of the RADWIN Manager
application.
If the installation program fails to start, browse to your CD/DVD drive,
chose the setup.exe program and run it.

Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager

If your links are within easy reach, you can configure them using the proce-
dure described below. If however, your links are to be geographically scat-
tered, it may be convenient to pre-load each ODU with its network address
prior to physical installation. The procedure is quite straight forward, and
set out in Chapter 19.

Each ODU requires a static IP address, since part of the link definition is the
IP address pair of both ODUs. Network Managers should ensure that these
addresses are outside of the automatic allocation ranges used by their
Note network DHCP server.

¾ To start the RADWIN Manager:

1. Connect the managing computer to one of the two LAN ports as shown in
Figure 5-1 below:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-2

Getting Started with the RADWIN Manager Chapter 5

Figure 5-1: LAN ports on the front panel of the IDU-C

For IDU-E users: The LAN ports are located on the rear panel on the unit.
Note

If you are not using a direct connection as above, ensure that you have
IDU to managing computer connectivity (e.g. through a LAN).
2. Check that you have connectivity to the ODU. You can do this by opening
up a command line session (Start|Run and then type, cmd). At the
command prompt, type
ping 10.0.0.120
You should see something like this:

Figure 5-2: Pinging an uninstalled and unconfigured link

Any other response from ping means that the ODU is not responding.
Check your Ethernet connection and that both the IDU and ODU are
switched on and then try again. If you do not succeed, seek assistance
from RADWIN Customer Support.
3. Dismiss the command line session.
4. Double-click the RADWIN Manager icon on the desktop, or click
Start|Programs|RADWIN Manager|RADWIN Manager.
The Log-on dialog box appears.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-3

The RADWIN Manager log-on Concept Chapter 5

Figure 5-3: First time log-on window

The RADWIN Manager log-on Concept

The RADWIN Manager provides three levels of access in one of two entry
modes. To see them, click Options at any time in the Log on window
(Figure 5-3 above). You are offered an extended log-on window:

Figure 5-4: Extended log-on window

Connection through the RMNS Sever will be available in a future release. If

you have an immediate requirement for this service, please contact
Note RADWIN Customer Support.

At the User Type field, click the list button:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-4

The RADWIN Manager log-on Concept Chapter 5

Figure 5-5: Log on window exposing the user types.

There are three user types:

• An Observer has read-only access to the link. An Observer can
monitor the link, generate reports, but may not change any link
parameters.
• An Operator can install and configure the link.
• An Installer can, in addition to functioning as an Operator, also
change the operating band. The latter function has legal ramifica-
tions, requiring familiarity with local regulations.
The following table summarizes these options:

Table 5-2: User types, default passwords and function

Default Community
User Type Function Community
Password String

Observer admin Monitoring Read-Only public

Installation,
Operator admin Read-Write netman
configuration

Operator plus
Installer wireless Read-Write netman
set band

The Network Manager should change the default passwords as soon as pos-
sible.

¾ Continuing the log-on procedure:

5. Type an IP address for the ODU (if you connect through a LAN), or click
Local Connection (if you are connected directly to the IDU port).

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-5

Log-on Errors and Cautions Chapter 5

• If you log on using Local Connection, but your physical connection

is not local (i.e. anything other than a direct connection between the
managing computer and the IDU), then any configuration you carry
out may affect other links in the network. Do not do this!

Warning

• Network log on (IP address to the ODU) is recommended.

• If you log on via an over-the-air IP address, you will receive a warn-
ing. If you reset the site to which you are connected to factory set-
tings, you can lock yourself out of the link.

• If you log on using Local Connection through a PoE device, you will
need to connect it to the managing computer using a crossed Ether-
net cable.
• The default IP address for the ODU is 10.0.0.120. The subnet mask is
255.0.0.0.
Note
• The actual IP address is defined during link configuration (see Site
Management: IP Address, VLAN and Protocol on page 8-7. See
also, Chapter 19).

6. If your User Type is not Operator, then choose it now.

7. Enter the password.
8. If you are a user with Read-Write permission, click Options to enter the
Community options if required
9. For initial log on:
• Leave the default Community passwords, netman for read-write,
and public for read-only.
• If Community values were previously defined, enter them under
Community in the Read-Only or Read-Write boxes.
• If you are a user with read-only permission, then you may only log
on as Observer.
The RADWIN Manager main window is displayed (see Figure 5-10).

Log-on Errors and Cautions

Unsupported Device
Attempting to connect to an unsupported device on an otherwise valid IP
address (for example, a LAN printer) will result in the following error mes-
sage:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-6

Incorrect IP Address Chapter 5

Figure 5-6: Unsupported device message

Incorrect IP Address
If the IP address chosen is invalid or the link is unreachable, the following
error message will be displayed:

Figure 5-7: Unreachable device message

In both of the above situations, if you click No, you will see a warning

graphic alongside the IP Address field.

Incorrect Password
If you type an incorrect password in the Login window, you will see a warn-

ing graphic alongside the password field.

Invalid Read/Write Community String

This will result in the following message:

Figure 5-8: Invalid Community String message

Logging in to the Over-the-Air Site

You can log on to the over-the-air site of an established link (Site B in our
example). However, you will be first offered the following caution:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-7

Continuing without an IP Address Chapter 5

Figure 5-9: Logging on to an over-the-air site

Continuing without an IP Address

The RADWIN Manager provides limited “offline” functionality when there is
no accessible IDU/ODU. It is primarily for setting managing computer
related parameters, running the Link Budget Calculator or viewing online
Help. The offline functionality is shown in Table 5-3 below. The table does
not show menu items grayed out.

Table 5-3: RADWIN Manager: Offline Functionality

Menu level
Function Reference
Top +1 +2

Return to log-on dialog. Same as Log Off

Log Off
button
File
Exit the RADWIN Manager. Same as Exit
Exit
button

Change
Change the log-on password page 5-8
Password

Clear Events Clear local events log

Tools
Events Log page 9-17
Save to File Save events log data to a file

Preferences Set managing computer preferences

RADWIN
View online help version of the User Manual
Manager Help

Link Budget
Calculator opened in default browser Chapter 21
Calculator
Help
Get Diagnostics
Obtain system information page 9-1
Information

About RADWIN
RADWIN Manager build information
Manager

Changing the Log-On Password

¾ To change the log on password:
1. From the Tools menu, select Change Password.
The Change Password dialog box appears.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-8

First steps Chapter 5

2. Enter the current password, and the new password.

A valid log-on password must contain at least five characters excluding

SPACE, TAB, and any of “>#@|*?;.”
Note

3. Click OK to confirm.

First steps
For what follows, it is assumed that you have set the IP addresses of both
ODUs. For the purposes of illustration, we will use the following IP
addresses:

Our managing computer has its NIC set to IP address 192.168.1.100. The
log-on ODU is set to IP address 192.168.1.101 and the over-the-air ODU is
Note set to 192.168.1.102. The Subnet Mask for both sites is 255.255.255.0 and
the Default Gateway is left unset. We will maintain this arrangement
throughout the remainder of this manual.

Other defaults are shown in Table 5-4.

At this point the main window of the RADWIN Manager should be displayed:

Figure 5-10: Opening RADWIN Manager window prior to installation - IDU-C

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-9

First steps Chapter 5

The Dynamic Tx Ratio bar only appears for model RADWIN 2000 C
Note
A detailed field by field description of the contents of the RADWIN Manager
main window may be found in Chapter 6.
The procedure required to make the link functional has three phases:
1. Link Installation - which we will detail below.
Installation actually gets the link operational by setting the link parame-
ters. It uses a fixed channel at the lowest possible modulation, BPSK at
6.5Mbps and will work under the harsh interference condition.

During the installation procedure, the definition of all parameters is

automatically applied to both sides of the link.
Note

• The ODUs as supplied by RADWIN are set up with a factory default

band. If for some reason the default band needs to be changed, it
should be done before link Installation. The procedure is set out in
Caution Chapter 20.
• Use of an incorrect band may be in violation of local regulations.

2. Link Configuration - described in Chapter 7.

Configuration provides much the same functionality as Installation, but
for a running link. A fallback to Installation mode is provided for situa-
tions which cannot be handled without resetting the link, such as
antenna realignment and IDU or ODU replacement.
The Link Installation and Configuration phases are both carried out with
Wizards, which “walk you through” the processes. The Wizards are visu-
ally quite similar and will be described in detail below.
3. Site Configuration - described in Chapter 8.
Site specific configuration for each side of the link is available at any time
- under a running link or under the restricted Installation mode.
Site Configuration consists of a set of panels, which may be invoked indi-
vidually in any order, as needed.

An installed and configured link can be returned to installation mode for re-
installation and configuration from last settings or from factory settings.

• Reversion to installation mode requires a complete break in the link

Note service
• Configuration mode may vary the service throughput and quality, but
without a service break

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-10

Default RADWIN 2000 Settings Chapter 5

Default RADWIN 2000 Settings

The default settings of the RADWIN 2000 configuration parameters are
listed in the second column of Table 5-4 below. The third column shows
the values we use in this manual for illustrative purposes.

Table 5-4: Default Settings

Parameter Default Value Illustrative Value

Factory default band Product dependent 5.820GHz

ODU IP Address 10.0.0.120 192.168.1.101 and 102

Subnet Mask 255.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

Trap destination 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

RADWIN Manager log-on

passwords

Observer admin

Operator admin

Installer wireless

Link ID Link EBG_20561334

Link Name Name TPSF_BTT

Site 1 Site A

Site 2 Site B

Location (per site) Location A B

Name (per site) Name Here There

Contact (per site) Person John Mary

Link Password wireless-bridge

Rate Adaptive

Ethernet Configuration Auto Detect

Radio Link Failure Actions No action

Bridge or Hub mode Hub Mode, Aging time = 300 sec

Read-write – netman
Community values
Read-only – public

Using RADWIN Manager Spectrum View

Prior to running the Installation Wizard (Chapter 5), you may use the RAD-
WIN Manager Spectrum View utility.
The RADWIN Manager Spectrum View utility is an RF survey tool designed
to support the link installation prior to full link service activation. The tool
provides comprehensive and clear information enabling easier, faster and
better quality installations.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-11

Using RADWIN Manager Spectrum View Chapter 5

To launch Spectrum View, go to the main window menu (Figure 5-11) and
click Tools | Spectrum View. A display similar to the following appears:

Figure 5-11: Spectrum View - Opening Display on installed link

See Chapter 22 for detailed information about operating Spectrum View
and understanding the displayed statistics.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 5-12

 Chapter 6

The RADWIN Manager:

Main Window
One Manager for all RADWIN Radio Products
The RADWIN Manager application is largely generic to all RADWIN Radio
Products.
Functionality differences are minimal according to radio series (WinLink
1000 and RADWIN 2000) capabilities.

The Main Window of the RADWIN Manager

Ensure that the RADWIN Manager is running.
The main window should look similar to that in Figure 6-1:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 6-1

The RADWIN Manager Toolbar Chapter 6

Figure 6-1: Main window, Wireless Link is Active

The main window of the RADWIN Manager contains a large amount of
information about the link. Before proceeding to details of link configuration
we set out the meaning of each item in the main window.

The RADWIN Manager Toolbar

In configuration mode, the RADWIN Manager toolbar contains the following
buttons:

In Installation mode, Link Configuration is grayed out and Link Installation

is open.
The button functions are set out in Table 6-1:

Table 6-1: RADWIN Manager Toolbar

Item Description

Changes configuration parameters of an operating wireless link; assigns text files

Link Configuration for storing alarms, statistics and configuration data. This button is disabled
until a link installation has been completed

Performs preliminary configuration of the system. This button is disabled after

Link Installation
the link is installed

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 6-2

 Main Menu Functionality Chapter 6

Table 6-1: RADWIN Manager Toolbar (Continued)

Item Description

Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site 1. Same as Configuration | 1

Site: <Site 1 name>
Configure <Site 1 name>

Opens the Site configuration dialog for Site 2. Same as Configuration | 2

Site: <Site 2 name>
Configure <Site 2 name>

Get Diagnostics Obtain system information

Clear Counters Clears TDM error blocks counters. Disabled for Ethernet-only link

Log off Closes the current session and logs off RADWIN Manager

Exit Exits RADWIN Manager

Help Opens Help on the use of contextual online help

Main Menu Functionality

The main menu contains the following items:

The RADWIN Manager menu functionality is displayed in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality

Menu level
Function Reference
Top +1 +2

Return to log-on dialog. Same as Log

Log Off
Off button
File
Exit the RADWIN Manager. Same as
Exit
Exit button

Run the Configuration Wizard. Not

Link Configuration Chapter 7
available in Installation Mode

Opens the Site configuration dialog for

1 Configure <Site 1
Site 1. Has a path to return to
name>
Installation Mode
Configuration Chapter 8
Opens the Site configuration dialog for
2 Configure <Site 2
Site 2. Has a path to return to
name>
Installation Mode

Runs the Installation Wizard. Not

Link Installation Chapter 5
available in Configuration Mode

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 6-3

 Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 6

Table 6-2: RADWIN Manager main menu functionality (Continued)

Menu level
Function Reference
Top +1 +2

Performance
On screen and printable
Monitoring Report

Shows active alarms for <Site 1

1 <Site 1 name>
name>
Chapter 9
Active Alarms
Shows active alarms for <Site 1
2 <Site 2 name>
name>

Recent Events Displays recent events by site

Software Upgrade Upgrade ODU firmware Chapter 14

Tools
Monitor and evaluate spectrum
Spectrum View Chapter 22
availability

Change Band
Change the link band Chapter 20
(Installer only)

Change Password Change the log-on password dialog page 4-9

Clear Events Clear local events log

Events Log page 9-17
Save to File Save events log file

Preferences Local preferences dialog

Clear counters Clear TDM counters

Loopbacks Set TDM loopbacks page 9-4

Estimate Ethernet throughput by

Estimate Eth.
Maintenance transmitting full size frames over the page 9-11
Throughput
air for 30 sec

1 <Site 1 name> Reset <Site 1 name> ODU

Reset
2 <Site 2 name> Reset <Site 2 name> ODU

RADWIN Manager
View help on online help
Help

Link Budget
Calculator opened in default browser Chapter 21
Calculator

Get Diagnostics
Help Obtain system information page 9-1
Information

Check for updates from the RADWIN

Check for Updates
Web site

About RADWIN
Manager build and system information
Manager

Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window

Link details pane
The Link details pane on the left is split into three sections, which are
largely self explanatory. The top section summarizes information about the
link:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 6-4

Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 6

For Link status possibilities and color codes, see Table 9-2.
The two lower left panels show basic link site details:

The three fields for each site are user definable. see page 8-7ff.
The Monitor pane
The monitor pane, is the main source of real time information about link
performance at both link sites. It includes the following panes (top to bot-
tom):
• Radio Interface, Received Signal Strength (RSS) in dBm and Trans-
mission Ratio:

The Dynamic Tx Ratio bar only appears for model RADWIN 2000 C
Note
• Ethernet Service:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 6-5

Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 6

• Estimated Ethernet Throughput: The numbers are the current

calculated throughputs at each site. The colored bars (with
numbers) indicate the maximum possible throughput having
regard for air conditions.
• Rx and Tx Rates: The Rx and Tx rates are the receive and
transmit rates on the LAN side of each ODU, not the air side.
For a balanced link, the Rx and Tx rates at the LAN side of Site
A will match the Tx and Rx rates at the LAN side of Site B
respectively. In all cases, The LAN side Rx rate shown will be
the same as the air side Tx rate for each individual ODU.
Actual Ethernet traffic received and transmitted rates per site, is
in Mbps of Fps, selectable in the panel title bar.
• TDM Services: IDU-C and new style IDU-E:

• The title bar enables you to switch between Accumulative and

Current view.
• Immediately below the title bar is displayed the TDM Block Fail-
ure Ratio. It is zeroed by the Clear Counters button in the tool
bar.
• Error block count is shown immediately above the active TDM
channels display.
• The color of the TDM ports reflects their current status:
• Green - Operational
• Red - Error: LOS for loss of signal and AIS for Alarm Indi-
cation Signal
• Yellow - Loopback
• Gray - Inactive
• Frequency box: It shows the link frequency. The color of the box
indicates the status

• Green is an active link

• Red is an inactive link

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 6-6

Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 6

• Magenta indicates an authentication or compatibility problem

• Brown indicates severe compatibility problem
Events Log
The Events Log, stores alarms generated from both sides of the link and is
detailed in Chapter 9.

Status Bar

The Status bar, displays the following icons:

Table 6-3: Status bar indicators

Icon or Label Purpose

Connectivity Shows if RADWIN Manager is communicating with the ODU.

Connection mode to the ODU

• Over-the-Air connection - using the IP address of the remote unit.
• Local connection - direct connection to the IDU without using an IP
Connection available address.
• Network connection - through a LAN

ODU unreachable

IP Address Log on IP address

Normally encrypted link

Encryption indicator Unencrypted link - lock open

Link password validation failed. The link is encrypted with default keys.
Service and configuration are unavailable. Change the link password.

Link Lock enabled

Link Lock Link Lock encrypted

Link Lock mismatch

Ethernet Ring Member

DFS in use

Rescue Alarm In the event of an active alarm, opens alarms dialog

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 6-7

Elements of the RADWIN Manager Main Window Chapter 6

RADWIN RNMS users will see an additional field showing the IP address of
the RNMS server:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 6-8

 Chapter 7

Configuring the Link

Overview
This chapter describes the link configuration procedure, which is performed
after the installation of both sides of the RADWIN 2000 link, as set out in
Chapter 5.
Link configuration uses a Link Configuration wizard to redefine the configu-
ration parameters and fine-tune an operational link. Both sides of the link
are configured simultaneously.
Link configuration allows you to configure link parameters, which do not
lead to sync loss or require a reset. Some may change service performance,
in respect of which, warnings are displayed.
For ease of use, the Link Configuration wizard follows the same pattern as
Link Installation. You should therefore be familiar with the content of Chap-
ter 5.
The following parameters are configured using the Link Configuration Wiz-
ard:
• System parameters
• Channel settings
• Transmission power and antenna settings
• Service parameters
The Configuration Wizard has seven steps as shown in Table 7-1 below.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-1

Overview Chapter 7

Table 7-1: Link Configuration Wizard

1 Wizard welcome

System parameters
2 • Link ID
• Site details

Channel settings - ACS

3 Configuration

4 HSS settings

Tx Power and antenna

5 settings, MIMO or
Diversity

Services - Types,
Adaptive or fixed, Jitter
6 Buffer, MHS, Ethernet
Ring, QoS

Set TDM Clock

7 Parameters

Wizard summary and

8 completion

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-2

Configuration Chapter 7

Configuration
Since configuration functionality is included in the installation, we will briefly
review the main steps and for most part offer references to the correspond-
ing installation step.

Step 1, Start the Wizard

In the tool bar of the RADWIN Manager main window, click the Link Con-
figuration button. The Link Configuration button is only accessible on a
fully installed link as set out in Chapter 5.
The Configuration Wizard opens:

Figure 7-1: Link Configuration Wizard

Click Next to proceed with the configuration procedure.

Step 2, System Parameters

The System dialog box opens:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-3

Configuration Chapter 7

Figure 7-2: Configuration Wizard, System dialog box

The System attributes may be edited and the Link Password may be
changed exactly as in the corresponding Link Installation step on page 5-
5.
Click Next to continue.

Step 3, Channel Settings

Configuring the Channel Settings follows the same pattern as the Installa-
tion procedure:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-4

Configuration Chapter 7

Figure 7-3: Channel Settings dialog box - Automatic Channel Selection

Notice that the operating channel is grayed out. If you use the Reselect
Channel button, to change it, you will be asked for confirmation:

If you accept, then the system will search for the best operating channel:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-5

Configuration Chapter 7

Figure 7-4: Searching for the best operating channel

The link will return to the status of Figure 7-3 above with a possible
change to the operating channel.
If you work without automatic channel selection, the Channel Settings win-
dow looks like this:

Figure 7-5: Channel Settings without automatic channel selection

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-6

Configuration Chapter 7

If you click the Operating Channel drop-down list, the following window
appears:

Figure 7-6: Channel frequency options

Selecting one of the frequencies presented returns you to the status of
Figure 7-5 with the appropriate change. If you choose Other..., the fol-
lowing window opens:

Figure 7-7: Choosing an “Other” Operating Channel frequency

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-7

Configuration Chapter 7

The right hand drop-down list (showing the current Operating Channel)
allows you to fine-tune the frequency in increments of ±5MHz within a
range of the operating band, which in this example is 5.740 - 5.835 GHz.
The Channel Bandwidth may also be changed. The available choices are 10,
20 and 40MHz depending on regulation (see Appendix A).
When you have completed making your choice, click Next to continue.

Step 4, Tx Power and Antenna Settings

The Tx Power and Antenna Settings window is similar to that for Installa-
tion:

Figure 7-8: Transmission Power and Antenna Parameters

As in Installation mode, you need to consider three items:
• Number of antennas at each Link site (1 or 2)
• Tx Power setting for each one
• MIMO or Diversity mode

Changing Number of Antennas and Tx Power

TX Power, Antenna Gain and Cable Loss
If you chose to configure either antenna, you are presented with the follow-
ing window:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-8

Configuration Chapter 7

Figure 7-9: Antenna configuration dialog with opened type selection

(Recall that we are using an unrealistically low Tx power here because our
link in a laboratory.)
So far, the procedure duplicates the corresponding Installation process. If
you choose a different antenna type and click OK, you will receive the fol-
lowing cautionary message:

In this context, entering Installation mode causes a service break until it is

restored by running the Installation wizard.
Caution If you are uncertain, do not do this without expert technical assistance.

You may also change the Required Tx Power, Antenna Gain and Cable Loss.
The procedure is the same as that set out in the Installation procedure on
page 5-13.
Switching Between Single and Dual Antennas
Single/Dual Antenna mode selection works precisely the same way as
shown on page 5-20. If you use this option you will receive a warning sim-
ilar to this:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-9

Configuration Chapter 7

Switching Between MIMO and Diversity Modes

A similarly worded warning applies to a s switch from Diversity to MIMO
mode. The considerations are otherwise no different from those set out in
the corresponding Installation step.
When you have completed making your choice, proceed to the Services
window.

Step 5, Hub Site Synchronization Settings

Figure 7-10: HSS Settings

The Synchronization Status dialog box displays the current status of each
side of the link. See Chapter 10 for instructions about installing and con-
figuring collocated links. If you do not require HSS, click Next.

Step 6, Services
Here is the services dialog:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-10

Configuration Chapter 7

Figure 7-11: Services and Rates dialog

To choose Services, see the corresponding Installation procedure in Chap-
ter 5.
If you are using a link that -
• is non-collocated
• is Ethernet-only
• uses model RADWIN 2000 C ODUs
then you may use Asymmetric Allocation. You may change the capacity allo-
cation here the same way as during installation. In place of the IDU box in
Figure 7-11, you will see the Asymmetric Allocation slider:

The procedures for setting the Jitter Buffer and Hot Standby parameters are
also the same as the corresponding procedures in Chapter 5.
Click Next to continue.

Step 7, TDM Clock Configuration

The following dialog is displayed:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-11

Configuration Chapter 7

Figure 7-12: TDM Parameters Configuration

To configure the TDM Parameters, see the corresponding procedure in
Chapter 5.

Step 8, Configuration Summary and Exit

Figure 7-13: Configuration Wizard Exit Summary

Click Done to return to the main window.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-12

Configuration Chapter 7

The main window now reflects the configuration:

Figure 7-14: Main window of the manager after configuration

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 7-13

 Chapter 8

Site Configuration
The Site Configuration dialog panels are used to configure parameters,
which may differ between both sides of the link.
The parameters configured using the Site Configuration dialog panels
include (among others):
• System settings
• Air interface - Transmit (Tx) power and antenna
• Hub Site Synchronization status
• Network management including VLAN
• Inventory - link hardware and software model details
• Security settings
• Date and time
• Ethernet service settings
• TDM Hot Standby status
• External alarms settings
• Operations - Revert to factory settings
The Operations dialog offers a “doorway” to jump into installation mode.
The Site Configuration dialog has its own main menu with the following
extra functionality:
• Backup ODU software
• Restore ODU software or configuration from a backup file
• Refresh the current panel
• Enable/disable the site ODU buzzer
• Jump back into installation mode keeping current configuration set-
tings

Configuring the Site

Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site

You can edit the configuration parameters for each site individually. The fol-
lowing functions are available from the left side of the dialog box.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-1

Editing the Configuration Parameters by Site Chapter 8

Figure 8-1: Configuration Dialog Box

Functions on the left of the dialog box:
System Edit the contact person and location details. View the system
details

Air Interface Change the Tx Power, cable loss, antenna type and settings.
View HSS settings

Management Configure the IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Trap

Destination and VLAN

Inventory View the hardware and software inventory (product

identification, versions, MAC address and serial number)

Security Change the Community Values and the Link Password. Set Link
Lock.

Date and Time Set the date and time of the link from an NTP servers or from the
managing computer

Advanced Choose Hub or Bridge ODU mode, IDU aging time, set the
Ethernet ports configuration, set max. information rate, TDM
MHS status, set the external alarm inputs, restore factory
settings, set IDU detection mode.

Functions at the top of the dialog box:

Backup Save the current ODU software to a file

Restore Restore an ODU’s software or configuration from a backup file

created by the backup facility

Refresh Refresh current panel with latest values

Installation Mode Return to Installation Mode for the entire link.

Selecting the Mute check box before clicking the Install Mode
button mutes the Beeper.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-2

Viewing System Details Chapter 8

Buzzer Mutes the alignment tone in installation mode. Reactivate the

beeper during alignment.

¾ To edit the Configuration Parameters:

1. Click the required site button on the main tool bar of the RADWIN Man-
ager
OR
Click Configuration from the main menu and choose a site to config-
ure.
The Configuration dialog box opens (see Figure 8-1 above).
2. Choose the appropriate item in the left hand list to open a dialog box.
3. Click Apply to save changes.
In subsequent instructions, we will simply say “Choose a site to configure”
on the understanding that the foregoing procedure is implied.

Viewing System Details

This is the first window displayed - as depicted above. You can edit the con-
tact details and site names.

Viewing Air Interface Details

Click the Air Interface item in the left hand list. A window similar to the fol-
lowing appears:

Figure 8-2: Air interface details

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-3

Changing the Transmit Power Chapter 8

Changing the Transmit Power

Each site can have a different Tx Power level.

¾ To change the Transmit Power:

1. Choose a site to configure.
The Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Choose Air Interface (see Figure 8-3).
3. Choose the required Transmit (Tx) Power Level.
4. Click Apply to save the changes.

Figure 8-3: Changing the Transmit Power

For detailed explanation about the relationship between these parameters,
see page 5-13 to 5-21.

Changing the Tx Power will affect service quality. The same considerations
apply here as were noted in the Installation procedure on page 5-17.
Caution

Hub Site Sync

Here you can view the HSS status:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-4

Site Management: IP Address, VLAN and Protocol Chapter 8

Figure 8-4: HSS Status

Site Management: IP Address, VLAN and Protocol

Configuring the ODU Address

Each site must be configured separately. For an over-the air configuration,
first configure site B then site A so as to avoid lockout. See Chapter 19 for
detailed instructions about the best way to do this on-site.
See Chapter 15 for further details about VLAN Functionality for RADWIN
2000.

¾ To define the Management Addresses:

1. Choose a site to configure.
The Configuration dialog box opens:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-5

Configuring VLAN Settings Chapter 8

Figure 8-5: Management Addresses - Site Configuration dialog box

5. Choose Management.
6. Enter the IP address of the ODU in the IP Address field.

If performing configuration from the RADWIN Manager, the IP address is

that entered from the Login window.
Note

7. Enter the Subnet Mask.

8. Enter the Default Gateway.
9. Enter the Trap Destination. This could be the IP address of the managing
computer. The events log will be stored at this address.
10. Click Apply to save the changes.

Configuring VLAN Settings

VLAN IDs are used by RADWIN products in three separate contexts:

Management VLAN, Traffic VLAN and Ethernet Ring. It is recommended that
Caution you use different VLAN IDs for each context.

VLAN Management enables separation of user traffic from management

traffic whenever such separation is required. It is recommended that both
sides of the link be configured with different VLAN IDs for management traf-
fic. (This reduces your chances of accidentally locking yourself out of the
link.)

¾ To enable VLAN management:

1. Click Configuration from the main menu.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-6

Configuring VLAN Settings Chapter 8

2. Choose a site to configure. If you are configuring both sites, choose site
B first to avoid locking yourself out.
3. Choose Management.
4. Open the VLAN tab.
5. Check the Enabled box.
6. Enter a VLAN ID. Its value should be between 1 and 4094.
After entering the VLAN ID, only packets with the specified VLAN ID are
processed for management purposes by the ODU. This includes all the
protocols supported by the ODU (ICMP, SNMP, TELNET and NTP). The
VLAN priority is used for the traffic sent from the ODU to the managing
computer. Using VLAN for management traffic affects all types of man-
agement connections (local, network and over the air).
7. Enter a Priority number between 0 and 7.
8. Change the VLAN ID and Priority of the managing computer NIC to be
the same as those of steps 6 and 7 respectively.

Changing this parameter causes the RADWIN Manager to immediately

disconnect. To avoid inconvenience, you should verify the change by
setting the VLAN only to one ODU, and only after verifying proper
Caution management operation, change the other ODU VLAN setting.

9. Click Apply or OK.

Figure 8-6: Configuring management traffic VLAN Settings

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-7

Lost or forgotten VLAN ID Chapter 8

Lost or forgotten VLAN ID

If the VLAN ID is forgotten or there is no VLAN traffic connected to the
ODU, then reset the relevant ODU.
During the first two minutes of connection, the ODU uses management
packets both with and without VLAN. You may use this period to reconfigure
the VLAN ID and priority.

Enable / Disable Telnet Access

For a link managed in a network, direct access to an ODU using Telnet is
considered to be a security breach. Telnet access may be enabled or dis-
abled by clicking the Protocol tab and enabling/disabling Telnet access using
the Telnet check-box:

Figure 8-7: Enable/Disable Telnet Access

Displaying the Inventory

¾ To view the inventory data
1. Choose a site from the main menu.
The Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Choose Inventory.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-8

Security Features Chapter 8

Figure 8-8: Inventory window

Security Features
The Security dialog enables you to change the Link Password and the SNMP
Community strings and use the Link Lock feature:

Figure 8-9: Available security features

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-9

Changing the Link Password Chapter 8

Changing the Link Password

This item is only available when the link is down. Otherwise, it works the
same way as the corresponding item on page 5-8.

RADWIN Manager Community Strings

The ODU communicates with the RADWIN Manager using SNMPv1 protocol.
The protocol defines three types of communities:
• Read-Only for retrieving information from the ODU
• Read-Write to configure and control the ODU
• Trap used by the ODU to issue traps.
The Community string must be entered at log on. The user must know the
password and the correct Community string to gain access to the system. A
user may have read-only privileges.
It is not possible to manage the ODU if the read-write or the read Commu-
nity values are forgotten. A new Community value may be obtained from
RADWIN Customer Support for the purpose of setting new Community. You
must also have available the serial number or the MAC address of the ODU.
The read-write Community strings and read-only Community strings have a
minimum of five alphanumeric characters. (bru1 and bru4097 are not per-
mitted). Changing the trap Community is optional and is done by clicking
the check box.
Editing Community Strings
The Community change dialog box is available from the Configuration |
Security tab. Both read-write and read-only communities must be defined.
On logging on for the first time, use the following as the current Commu-
nity:
• For Read-Write Community, use netman.
• For Read-Only Community, use public.
• For Trap Community, use public

¾ To change a Community string:

1. From the Configuration dialog box, choose the Security tab.
2. Type the current read-write Community (default is netman).
3. Choose the communities to be changed by clicking the check box.
4. Type the new Community string and re-type to confirm. A community
string must contain at least five and no more than 32 characters exclud-
ing SPACE, TAB, and any of “>#@|*?;."
5. Click OK to save.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-10

Link Lock Security Feature Chapter 8

Figure 8-10: Changing the Community String

Forgotten Community string
If the read-write Community string is unknown, an alternative Community
key can be used. The alternative Community key is unique per ODU and can
be used only to change the Community strings. The alternative Community
key is supplied with the product, and should be kept in a safe place.
If both the read-write Community and the alternative Community key are
unavailable, then an alternative Community key can be obtained from RAD-
WIN Customer Support using the ODU serial number or MAC address. The
serial number is located on the product label. The serial number and the
MAC address are displayed in the Site Configuration inventory tab.
When you have the alternative Community key, click the Forgot Commu-
nity button and enter the Alternative Community key (Figure 8-11). Then
change the read-write Community string.

Figure 8-11: Alternative Community Dialog box

Link Lock Security Feature

Link Lock is a part of RADWIN’s security concept intended to meet a
form of abuse encountered in the field. It is designed to prevent the

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-11

Link Lock Security Feature Chapter 8

situation where a remote ODU can be stolen and used as a “pirate”

link to steal services or information. The Link Lock feature actually
locks the local ODU to be synchronized ONLY to specific remote
ODU. It is a site oriented feature.
The lock can only be set from a live link. It is based on MAC
authentication and is site oriented and activated on a per ODU
basis. For example, if you lock the Site B ODU to the Site A ODU,
you must still lock the Site A ODU to the Site B ODU to ensure
complete two way locking.
Link Lock can only be removed when the link is unsynchronized. In
such a case, an alarm is raised by the RADWIN Manager.

¾ To enable Link Lock:

1. Click Site A on the main tool bar.
2. Choose the Security tab. The following window is displayed:

3. Click the Link Lock check-box and then OK. You are asked to
confirm the lock:

4. Click the Yes button and you are returned to the main window of
the RADWIN Manager.
Observe that a link icon is now displayed in the status bar on the bottom
right of the RADWIN Manager window.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-12

Setting the Date and Time Chapter 8

The link to the remote unit is now locked. If you repeat steps 1 and 2
above, the Security screen will look like this:

The Link Lock check-box is now unavailable.

5. If required, repeat the procedure for Site B.

To revert the Link Lock status to unlocked, power down each ODU
in turn. Use the above procedure to uncheck the Link Lock status
Note box for the live ODU.

A simple ODU reset at either end will restore the link to its previous
locked or unlocked state.

Setting the Date and Time

The ODU maintains a date and time. The date and time should be synchro-
nized with any Network Time Protocol (NTP) version 3 compatible server.
During power-up the ODU attempts to configure the initial date and time
using an NTP Server. If the server IP address is not configured or is not
reachable, a default time is set.
When configuring the NTP Server IP address, you should also configure the
offset from the Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). If there is no server
available, you can either set the date and time, or you can set it to use the
date and time from the managing computer. Note that manual setting is not

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-13

Setting the Date and Time Chapter 8

recommended since it will be overridden by a reset, power up, or synchroni-

zation with an NTP Server.

The NTP uses UDP port 123. If a firewall is configured between the ODU
and the NTP Server this port must be opened.

Note It can take up to 8 minutes for the NTP to synchronize the ODU date and
time.

¾ To set the date and time:

1. Determine the IP address of the NTP server to be used.
2. Test it for connectivity using the command (Windows XP), for example:
w32tm /stripchart /computer:216.218.192.202
You should get a continuous response of times, each a few seconds
apart.
3. Choose a site to configure.
The Configuration dialog box opens.
4. Choose Date & Time:

Figure 8-12: Date and Time Configuration

5. If entering an IP address for the NTP Server, click Clear, and then enter
the new address.

6. Set your site Offset value in minutes ahead or behind GMT1.

7. To manually set the date and time, click Change and edit the new values.

1. Greenwich Mean Time

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-14

Ethernet Properties Chapter 8

Figure 8-13: Change Date and Time

If you used an NTP Server, you will see a window like this:

Figure 8-14: Date and Time configured from an NTP Server

8. Click OK to return to the Configuration dialog.

Ethernet Properties

Configuring the Bridge

Bridge configuration is required in various network topologies, such as pro-
tection (Ethernet 1+1) and ring applications. The bridge configuration
parameters are located under the Advanced tab of the Site Configuration
dialog box:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-15

Configuring the Bridge Chapter 8

Figure 8-15: Bridge, VLAN and MIR Configuration

ODU Mode

RADWIN 2000 C-Series ODU products work in Hub mode only. The bridge
capability is built in to the IDU-C (it is not configurable). If an IDU-C is
connected to an RADWIN 2000 C ODU, then the IDU-C performs the
Note bridging.

This parameter controls the ODU mode with two optional values:
• Hub Mode - in Hub mode the ODU transparently forwards all packets
over the wireless link.
• Bridge Mode - In Bridge mode the ODU performs both learning and
aging, forwarding only relevant packets over the wireless link. The
aging time of the ODU is fixed at 300 seconds.

Changing these modes requires system reset.

Note

IDU Aging time

This parameter controls the IDU aging time.
The aging time parameter controls the time after which each MAC address
is dropped from the MAC address learning table.
The default value is 300 seconds.

• Any change to these parameters is effective immediately.

• Each side of the link can be configured separately, with different
Note aging times.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-16

Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode Chapter 8

The following table shows the appropriate configuration for several common
scenarios. Both link sites must be configured with the same parameter:

Table 8-1: ODU mode configuration for common scenarios

ODU IDU Aging
Scenario
Mode Time

Standard (default) Configuration for Ethernet

Bridge 300 sec
Applications

Rapid network topology changes where fast

Hub 1 sec
aging is required

Configuring Ethernet Ports Mode

The ODU Ethernet port is configured to auto-detect by default and may not
be changed.
The ODU Ethernet port mode is configurable for line speed (10/100BaseT)
and duplex mode (half or full duplex).
An Auto Detect feature is provided, whereby the line speed and duplex
mode are detected automatically using auto-negotiation. Use manual con-
figuration when attached external equipment does not support auto-negoti-
ation. The default setting is Auto Detect.

You should not reconfigure the port that is used for the managing computer
connection, since a wrong configuration can cause a management
Caution disconnection or Ethernet services interruption.

¾ To configure the Ethernet Mode:

1. From the Configuration menu, choose the site to configure.
The Site Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Click Advanced | Ethernet.
3. In the Ethernet Ports Configuration pane, use the drop-down menu to
choose the configuration.
4. Click Apply to save the changes.

It is possible to close the Ethernet service by disconnecting the Ethernet

port.

If you close the port, you may subsequently be unable to access the
device. If this should occur, a workaround is as follows:

Note • Connect the system from the remote site

• Connect via other Ethernet port (of the IDU)
• Power down the equipment and connect immediately after power
up (the fastest way is to enter install mode)

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-17

VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service: Configuration Chapter 8

VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service: Configuration

If you are using a PoE device, this feature is unavailable. You may skip this
section.

VLAN IDs are used by RADWIN products in three separate contexts:

Management VLAN, Traffic VLAN and Ethernet Ring. It is recommended that
Caution you use different VLAN IDs for each context.

To set up VLAN tagging for Ethernet Service, click the VLAN Configuration...
button in Figure 8-15. The following window is displayed:

Figure 8-16: VLAN tag settings

If you are using a new style IDU-E, the SFP row will not appear.
Note

The choices for Ingress Mode are -

and for Egress Mode are -

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-18

Setting the Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Chapter 8

The details of setting up VLAN tagging require advanced network manage-

ment skills beyond the scope of this manual. Further information for the
Network Manager is provided in Chapter 15.

Setting the Maximum Information Rate (MIR)

What is the MIR
The maximum Ethernet throughput of the link (MIR) can be limited. The
default setting is Best Effort (see Figure 8-15 above), where the highest
information rate available for the link conditions and settings is used.
What is it for
The MIR setting limits the throughput for Ethernet service. It does not
affect the capacity of TDM services.
If the Link Budget Calculator or air conditions limit the capacity to X Mbps,
and suppose that you use Y (< X) Mbps for TDM services, then you are left
with X - Y=Z Mbps for Ethernet.
Suppose for example, that Z = 20 Mbps.
As a Service Provider, you can decide to sell a package based on 10Mbps
and charge $P1 for it, or 15 Mbps for $P2 > $P1.
The MIR setting allows you do this.
The default value is “best effort” which will give Z above.

The minimum value is 256 Mbps.

The maximum value will be the minimum between Z above and -

• 10 Mbps for RADWIN 2000 PDH

Note • 50 Mbps for RADWIN 2000 L
• 100 Mbps for RADWIN 2000 C

The MIR setting is independent per direction.

¾ To limit the Ethernet information rate:

1. From the Configuration menu, choose the site to reconfigure.
2. Click Advanced | Ethernet
The Configuration dialog box opens.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-19

Setting the Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Chapter 8

Figure 8-17: Bridge Configuration - Site Configuration dialog box

3. In the Information Rate pane, use the drop-down menu to choose the
MIR.

Figure 8-18: Ethernet MIR - Throughput selection

4. Choose Other to define the throughput with 1 Kbps resolution
5. Choose Best Effort for the highest information rate possible for the link
conditions and settings
6. Click Apply to save the changes.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-20

TDM MHS Status Chapter 8

TDM MHS Status

Here you can see the TDM MHS status. There is nothing to set.

Figure 8-19: TDM MHS status

Setting External Alarm Inputs

The IDU-C and the new style IDU-E have four external alarm inputs and
four external alarm outputs in the form of dry-contact relays. The Alarm
interface is located on the front panel of the IDU-C and is a 25-pin D-type
female connector. See Appendix B, for wiring specifications and pinout.
You may enable or disable each of the alarms and configure the alarm
description text appearing in the alarm trap message. The ODU sends the
alarm within less than a second from actual alarm trigger.

¾ To set the external alarm inputs:

1. Choose External Alarms from the Site Configuration window.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-21

Resetting Chapter 8

Figure 8-20: External Alarms Configuration

2. Choose an alarm and set its mode to Enabled or Disabled
3. Enter a description of the alarms in the text field.
4. Click Apply to save.
5. Click OK to exit from the dialog.

Resetting
You may reset the link, preserving the current configuration, or reset to fac-
tory defaults.

Resetting the link causes service disconnection.

To maintain the connection between the managing computer and

Caution the link, first reset Site B.

¾ To reset the link preserving current configuration:

1. From Maintenance on the main window, reset the remote unit.
2. From Maintenance on the main window, reset the local unit.

¾ To reset to Factory Defaults

1. Choose either of the sites to be reset. The Configuration dialog box
opens.
2. Choose Operations in the Configuration dialog box.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-22

IDU Detection Chapter 8

Figure 8-21: Site Configuration - Reset to factory defaults

3. Click the Restore Defaults button.
A message box asking if you want to restore factory default settings
appears.

4. Click the check box if you want to keep the current IP address settings.
5. Click Yes to continue.

After a few moments the site will be reset and you will need to log on to
it to re-install the link.

IDU Detection
An ODU always tries to detect the IDU to which it is connected. IDU Detec-
tion is effected by an IDU responding to special ODU packets.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-23

Backup/Restore of ODU Software Files Chapter 8

If a PoE device is in use, the detection packets spread to the containing net-
work and may cause flooding. In such a case, the IDU Detection feature,
(Figure 8-21), should be disabled.
To disable IDU Detection Mode, just toggle the check box in Figure 8-21.

Backup/Restore of ODU Software Files

Backup ODU Software to a File

RADWIN Manager allows you to backup the ODU software of both units of a
link to the managing computer as binary files. Each site is backed up in a
separate file. Backup files are matched to the MAC address of the site ODU.
The default backup file name is constructed from the ODU IP address and
the date as in the following example:
Backup of Site A as used in our examples:
192.168.1.101_1.12.2009.backup
If you perform more than one backup on a given date you will need to
change the file name to something like this:
192.168.1.101_1.12.2009_00.backup
192.168.1.101_1.12.2009_01.backup
...

¾ To backup the ODU software a file:

1. Choose a site to back up. The Site Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Click Backup.
3. In the Save As dialog box, indicate in which folder and under what name
configuration file is to be saved, and click Save.

Restoring ODU Software or Configuration

Backup files can be uploaded from the managing computer. You may choose
a full software restore or configuration-only restore.

¾ To restore from a backup file:

1. Choose a site to restore (from a previous backup).
The Site Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Click Restore. You are offered the choice of a Full or Configuration
Restore as shown:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-24

Muting the alignment tone buzzer Chapter 8

3. Click the required Restore type. You are then offered a standard Open
File dialog box.
4. From the Open File dialog box, navigate to your backup storage area and
choose file to upload. Click OK.

Muting the alignment tone buzzer

The ODU alignment tone becomes audible as soon as power is supplied,
and continues until the ODUs are aligned and the link established.
It is possible to mute the tone during regular operation of the link. It must
be enabled when performing the alignment procedure.

¾ To mute the alignment tone buzzer:

1. Choose a site. The Configuration dialog box opens.
2. In the Configuration dialog box, click the Buzzer button.

Figure 8-22: Alignment tone buzzer states

3. Click Off. The tone is disabled.

¾ To restore the alignment tone buzzer:

1. Choose a site. The Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Click On to have the buzzer beep continuously or Auto to have the
buzzer beep only in install mode.

Configuration with Telnet

A Telnet terminal can be used to configure and monitor the RADWIN 2000.
To start a Telnet session, use telnet <ODU_IP>.
For example, if you run Telnet as follows,
telnet 192.168.1.101

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-25

Configuration with Telnet Chapter 8

you will be asked for a user name and password.

The Telnet log on user name is the password that you used to enter the
RADWIN Manager (for example, the default: admin). The Telnet password
is the corresponding Community string (default: netman).

Figure 8-23: Telnet session log on

A Read-Only Community string allows display only whereas a Read-Write
Community string allows display and set commands.
Supported Telnet commands are shown in Table 8-2. Note that some of
the commands are model-specific. For example, TDM commands will not
apply to Ethernet only and PoE based links.
Table 8-2: Telnet Commands Summary
Command Explanation

Displays ODU product name, Name, Location, hardware and software

display inventory revisions, uptime, MAC address, IDU product name, IDU software and
hardware revisions

display management Displays IP, Subnet, Gateway, Traps table

Displays State, Link ID, Channel BW, RSS, TSL, Frequency/ACS, DFS,
display link
Rate/ARA, Distance

display ethernet Displays Bridge Mode, Aging time, Port table (State, Status and action)

Displays Clock Mode, Master Clock Mode, Current Clock, Quality, TDM
display tdm
table (Line status, Error Blocks)

display ntp Displays Time, Server and Offset

display PM <interface:AIR,LAN1,LAN2,TDM1, Shows the performance monitor tables for each interface according to
TDM2,...,TDM16> <interval:current,day,month> user defined monitoring intervals

Set the ODU IP address, subnet mask and gateway. The user must reset
set ip <ipaddr> <subnetMask> <gateway>
the ODU after the command completion

set trap <index:1-10> <ipaddr> <port:0- Set a specific trap from the traps table (e.g. set trap 3 192.168.1.101
65535> 162)

set readpw <oldpasswd> <passwd> Set the read access password (Read Community)

set writepw <oldpasswd> <passwd> Set the read-write access password (Read-Write Community)

set trappw <oldpasswd> <passwd> Set the trap Community string

set buzzer <mode:0=OFF,1 =ON> Toggle the buzzer mode (0 – off, 1 – on)

set tpc<power:Value between minimal Tx power, Set the ODU Tx Power. If a wrong value is entered, both min and max
and maximal Tx power> values shall be displayed in the error reply

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-26

Configuration with Telnet Chapter 8

Table 8-2: Telnet Commands Summary (Continued)

Command Explanation

set bridge <mode:0=Bridging OFF,1= Bridging

Set the ODU bridge mode (0 – off, 1 – on)
ON >

set name <new name> Set the name of the link

set location <new location> Set the name of the location

set contact <new contact> Set the name of the site manager

set <ssid> Set Link ID

set ethernet <port:MNG,LAN1,LAN2>

Set the mode and speed of each Ethernet port
<mode:AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,DISABLE>

Resets both the IDU and the ODU. The user is warned that the command
reboot will reset the ODU. A new Telnet session to the ODU may be opened
after the reset is complete. (Watch the IDU LEDs.)

help Displays the available commands

Figure 8-24, below, shows the available Telnet commands using the help
command.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-27

Configuration with Telnet Chapter 8

[email protected]> Type "help" for help.

[email protected]> help

Display commands
display inventory
display management
display link
display ethernet
display tdm
display ntp
display PM <interface:AIR,MNG,LAN1,LAN2,TDM1,TDM2,TDM3,...,TDM15,TDM16>
<interval:current,day,month>
display bands

Set - immediate commands

set ip <ipaddr> <subnetMask> <gateway>
set trap <index:1-10> <ipaddr> <port:1-65535>
set readpw <writePasswd> <newPasswd>
set writepw <writePasswd> <newPasswd>
set trappw <writePasswd> <newPasswd>
set buzzer <mode:0=OFF,1=AUTO,2=ON>
set tpc <power:Value between minimal TX power, and maximal TX power>
set name <new name>
set location <new location>
set contact <new contact>
set ethernet <port:MNG,LAN1,LAN2> <mode:AUTO,10H,10F,100H,100F,DISABLE>
reboot
help

Set - reset required commands

set ssid <ssid>
set rate <index:1-15,adaptive>
set bridge <mode:0=Bridging OFF,1=Bridging ON>

Command "help" finished OK.

Figure 8-24: Telnet Management window

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 8-28

 Chapter 9

Monitoring and
Diagnostics
The RADWIN Manager application enables you to monitor the link, as well
as perform diagnostic operations such as loopback tests.
This chapter covers:
• Retrieving link information
• Link compatibility issues
• TDM port loopbacks
• Reinstalling and realigning a link
• Link Budget Calculator
• Performance monitoring
• Throughput checking
• Events, alarms and Traps
• Reverting alert messages
• Remote power fail indication
• Troubleshooting
• Replacing an ODU
• Restoring to factory setup
• Online help
• Obtaining support

Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics)

The Get Diagnostics feature collects and writes all link and Manager infor-
mation (from both sites) into a text file. The file information can be used for
diagnostics and should be sent to RADWIN Customer Support to speed up
assistance.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-1

Retrieving Link Information (Get Diagnostics) Chapter 9

The following table lists link and system information that can be monitored.

Table 9-1: Get Diagnostics Data and Description

Data Description

System Data General information about the system

Link Information Information about the link properties

• List of system events including those from other sites if this

Events Log site is defined as the trap destination
• Last 256 events from both sites

Site Configuration Data about the site parameters

Active Alarms List of active alarms

Performance Monitor Network performance data over defined time periods

Monitor Detailed event data record

Spectrum View Data from last Spectrum View run

¾ To get diagnostics
1. From the Help menu, choose Get Diagnostics Information.

Figure 9-1: Get Diagnostics Dialog Box

2. Select or deselect the data options. If the file is to be sent to RADWIN
Customer Support leave all options checked.
3. Click File Path to specify the folder in which you want to save the file
and then click Start to save the information.
The file is saved in the specified folder as Diagnostics Informa-
tion.txt

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-2

Link Compatibility Chapter 9

Link Compatibility
Link Compatibility indicates the version compatibility using software traps.
As new hardware or software is added to existing networks compatibility
issues may arise. An incompatibility issue is indicated to the user by a
change of color of the Link Status box on the Main Menu window. Trap mes-
sages (can be viewed in the Events Log) indicate the problems or limitations
and suggest upgrades when appropriate.
The following Link Status messages are given:
fullCompatibility - different software versions were detected that are fully
compatible. The message indicates that an upgrade is available.
restrictedCompatibility - different software versions were detected that
operate correctly. However, new features are not supported.
softwareUpgradeRequired - different software versions were detected allow-
ing limited operation. The message is, that a software upgrade is required.
versionsIncompatibility - different software versions were detected that are
incompatible. You need to perform local upgrades.

Table 9-2: Link Compatibility Trap Messages

Link State Link Status
Link State Site Description
text Color

Software Upgrade
fullCompatibility Active Green
Available

Active - Magenta
Software (Same as Software Upgrade
restrictedCompatibility
Version authenticatio Recommended
mismatch n error)

Active –
Software Brown Software Upgrade
softwareUpgradeRequired
Upgrade (Major) Required
Required

Not Active -
Software Local Software
versionsIncompatibility Red
Upgrade Upgrade Required
Required

TDM Loopbacks
Internal and external loopbacks on both sites of a link are used to
test the TDM connections

¾ To activate a loopback:
1. From the Maintenance menu, choose Loopbacks... or right-click
the TDM display in the main window.
The Loopbacks dialog box appears:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-3

TDM Loopbacks Chapter 9

Figure 9-2: Loopback configuration box

2. From the active ports, click those required for loopback activation. The
selected port icons change color to light blue as in the following exam-
ple:

Figure 9-3: Loopback configuration box with one Site A port selected
3. Click configure to choose a loopback mode:

Figure 9-4: Loopback options

4. Click the required loopback mode.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-4

TDM Loopbacks Chapter 9

Figure 9-5: Loopback defined

5. Click OK to activate the selected loopback(s).

This activates selected loopback(s). The corresponding service
port icon changes color and appearance to indicate an active
loopback.

Figure 9-6: Site A port 2 set to loopback

¾ To deactivate a loopback:
• Return to the situation of Figure 9-4 and click None.
When a loopback is deactivated, the corresponding icon in
Figure 9-6 reverts to its previous state (like the right side of the
figure).

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-5

Local Line Loopback Chapter 9

Local Line Loopback

A Local line loopback can be set to test the local E1/T1 port and its connec-
tion to local side user equipment. In this mode, data coming from the local
user equipment is looped back to it. This loopback is initiated from a man-
aging computer connected to the local unit.

Figure 9-7: Local Line Loopback

Remote Reverse Loopback

A remote reverse loopback can be set to test connection between the local
and remote units and between the local E1/T1 port and its connection to
the local user equipment. In this mode, data coming from the local user
equipment is looped back at the remote side. This loopback is initiated from
a managing computer connected to the local unit.

Figure 9-8: Remote Reverse Loopback

Remote Line Loopback

The remote unit can be set to a line loopback to test the remote E1/T1 port
and its connection to the remote side user equipment. In this mode, data

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-6

Local Internal Loopback Chapter 9

coming from the remote user equipment is looped back to it locally. This
loopback is initiated by the managing computer connected to the local unit.

Figure 9-9: Remote Line Loopback

Local Internal Loopback

The local unit can be set to close a remote loopback to test connection
between the local and remote units and between the remote E1/T1 port
and its connection to the remote user equipment. In this mode, data com-
ing from the remote user equipment is looped back to it locally. This loop-
back is initiated by the managing computer connected to the local unit.

Figure 9-10: Local Reverse Loopback

Reinstalling and Realigning a Link

It may be necessary to reinstall the link if the ODUs need to be realigned.

Activating Install Mode causes both sites to go into install mode, causing
disruption in service for approximately fifteen seconds.
Note

¾ To reinstall the link:

1. Choose a site.
The Configuration dialog box opens.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-7

The Link Budget Calculator Chapter 9

2. In the Configuration dialog box, click the Install Mode button.

A message box asking if you want to enter install mode appears.
3. Click Yes to continue.
The system enters Install mode and the alignment tone becomes audi-
ble.
4. Realign the ODUs and start the Installation wizard (see Chapter 5).

The Link Budget Calculator

The Link Budget Calculator is part of the RADWIN Manager software and is
found in the Help menu. This useful utility enables you to calculate the
expected performance of the wireless link and the possible configurations
for a specific link range including antenna size, cable loss and climate condi-
tions. For full details, see Chapter 21.

Throughput Checking
In this mode, RADWIN 2000 estimates Ethernet throughput by filling frames
over the air to maximum for 30 seconds. This mode should not influence
service.

¾ To use Throughput Checking:

1. At the main menu, click Maintenance | Estimated Eth. Throughput.
A confirmation message appears:

2. Click Yes to continue. The Ethernet services area changes appearance

and the estimated throughput is displayed:

At the end of 30 seconds, the display reverts to normal.

Performance Monitoring
RADWIN 2000 Performance Monitoring constantly monitors traffic over the
radio link and collects statistics data for the air interface, TDM and Ethernet
ports. It does so continuously, even when the RADWIN Manager is not con-
nected.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-8

The Monitor Log Chapter 9

Two types of logs are recorded:

• Monitor Log that records statistics on traffic rate and radio signal
strength.
• Events Log that records when the rates fall above or below a pre-
defined threshold. See page 9-14 below.
Both the statistics Monitor log and events log can be saved as text files.

The Monitor Log

The Monitor Log records performance statistics for predefined intervals. You
can save the monitor log to a text file, as well as display the information in
an on-screen report.
Saving the Monitor Log
You can save the recorded Monitor Log statistics to a text file.

¾ To save the monitor log:

1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box appears:

Figure 9-11: Preferences dialog box

2. Click the Monitor Tab.
3. Select the file to save.
4. Click the check box to open the file for saving.

5. Click the button and in the Select File dialog box indicate in which
folder and under what name the monitor log file is to be saved.
6. Set the time interval for adding data to the file.
7. Click OK to save the file.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-9

The Monitor Log Chapter 9

Viewing Performance Reports

The Performance Monitor Report displays performance views of each of the
interfaces.

¾ To obtain performance monitoring reports:

1. From the main menu, choose Tools | Performance Monitoring
Report ...
You are presented with the following window:

Figure 9-12: Basic Performance Monitoring Report

2. Choose a report type from the left panel and click the Get Data toolbar
button. For example, if you choose Site A, Air and Current, you will be
offered a report looking like this:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-10

The Monitor Log Chapter 9

Figure 9-13: A typical Performance Monitoring Report based on 15 minute

intervals
Notice the Min RSL value of -100 on the fourth line. It Indicates that dur-
ing the interval 12:30 to 12:45, there was a link sync loss. The next fig-
ure shows the effect of a reset between 14:15 and 14:30.

Figure 9-14: Performance Monitoring Report showing the effect of a Reset

The prior data is invalidated as shown by the red crosses in the left hand
column. Further, Min and Max RSL for the invalidated period is set to
zero.
3. Click the Selection Pane icon to toggle the side panel on or off.
The other reports look similar. Here is a detailed description of the reports
and their fields:
Several performance data occurrences are collected for each of the inter-
faces (ES, SES, and UAS), as well as specific data per Interface type (e.g.,
Tx and Rx bytes for Ethernet). For the Air Interface, user defined thresholds
data are collected. Refer to Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 below.
Data is collected and selectively displayed based on three time intervals as
selected by the Interval radio buttons:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-11

The Monitor Log Chapter 9

• Current (t=0)
• 15 minutes Intervals
• Daily

Table 9-3: Explanation of performance data

Data type Reported Value Explanation

UAS – Unavailable
Seconds in which the interface was out of service.
Seconds

The number of seconds in which there was at least one error

ES – Errored Seconds block. Note that the notation of an error block is different per
interface.

The number of seconds in which the service quality was low

SES – Severe Errored
(the quality is different per type of interface and determined by
Generic PM Data Seconds
the BBER threshold per interface).

BBE – Background Block

The number of errored blocks in an interval.
Error

A flag indicating that the data was valid. Note that the
Performance Monitoring data is not valid if not all the values
Integrity
were stored (e.g., due to clock changes within the interval or
power up reset).

Max RSL The maximum of the receive signal level (measured in dBm).

Min RSL The minimum of the receive signal level (measured in dBm).

Max TSL The maximum of the transmit signal level (measured in dBm).

Min TSL The minimum of the transmit signal level (measured in dBm).

The number of seconds in which the Receive Signal Level (RSL)

Additional Air Interface RSL Threshold 1
was below the specified threshold.
PM Data
The number of seconds in which the RSL was below the
RSL Threshold 2
specified threshold.

The number of seconds in which the Transmit Signal Level

TSL Threshold
(TSL) was above the specified threshold.

The number of seconds in which the Background Block Error

BBER Threshold
Ratio (BBER) exceeded the specified threshold.

The number of Megabytes received at the specified port within

Received Bytes
the interval

The number of Megabytes transmitted at the specified port

Additional Ethernet Transmitted Bytes
within the interval.
Interface PM Data
Throughput threshold Seconds count when throughput fell below the threshold

Traffic threshold Seconds count when actual traffic exceeded the threshold

The number of seconds that the configured TDM services are

TDM interface Active seconds
active

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-12

The Monitor Log Chapter 9

Performance Monitoring Report Toolbar

You can use the toolbar to perform the actions described in the following
table:

Table 9-4: Action of the toolbar buttons

Command Button Action

Get Data Gather current performance monitoring data.

Save Save current performance monitoring data to a file

Clear Clear current performance monitoring data

Thresholds Set Thresholds

Selection Pane Toggle on/off left panel

Close Closes the Performance Monitoring window

Setting Air Interface Thresholds

Use the Thresholds button on the Monitoring Performance Report toolbar
to set the Air Interface Thresholds:

Figure 9-15: Threshold configuration dialog box

RSL Thresholds
Two RSL Thresholds can be defined. They are used as an indicator of prob-
lems in the radio channel. You can check the RSS from the Link Budget Cal-
culator results during installation. Values of -5dB and -8dB from the current
RSS are typical.
TSL Threshold
A counter is maintained, of the number of second intervals during which Tx
power exceeds this threshold.
BBER Threshold
The Background Block Error Ratio is measured as a percentage. The thresh-
old can be set from 0.1% up to 50%.
For links with Ethernet only service, 8% threshold is recommended. If there
are no problems during the interval, then for that threshold, the recom-

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-13

Events, Alarms and Traps Chapter 9

mended BBER value should be 0. Since the system provides a lossless

Ethernet service, there is throughput degradation in case of interference.
The degradation is proportional to the BBER.
Ethernet Thresholds - Capacity
This is used as a basis for checking adherence to a Service Level Agree-
ment. It is the number of seconds count that the link capacity falls bellow
the threshold.
Ethernet Thresholds - Traffic
The number of seconds count that received traffic exceeded this threshold.
It can be used to measure traffic peaks.

Events, Alarms and Traps

The Events Log

The Events Log records system failures, loss of synchronization, loss of sig-
nal, compatibility problems and other fault conditions and events.

The foregoing event types include events from all links for which this
managing computer has been defined as the traps address. Only events
Note from RADWIN equipment will be shown.

Alarms (traps) are displayed in the Events Log in the lower panel of the
main window. The Events Log may be saved as a text file.
The Events Log includes the following fields:

» Sequential number (ID)

» Date and time stamp
» Message
» Trap source
» IP address of the ODU that initiated alarm.
For complete information about traps and alarms see Appendix E.
The events are displayed in the Events Log in the lower right-hand panel of
the RADWIN Manager main window:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-14

The Events Log Chapter 9

Figure 9-16: Events Log Display

¾ To save the Events Log:

1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box appears
2. Click the Events Tab.
3. Select the file to save.
4. Click the check box to open the file for saving.

Click the button and in the Select File dialog box indicate in which folder
and under what name the Events Log file is to be saved, and click OK.

To store the Events Log, first define the IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway and trap destination address of the managing computer (see
Note page 8-7 for details).

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-15

 RADWIN Manager Traps Chapter 9

RADWIN Manager Traps

The RADWIN Manager application issues traps to indicate various events,
displayed in the Events Log.

Table 9-5: RADWIN Manager Trap Messages

Trap Message Severity Remarks

Cannot bind to trap service port. Port 162 already in use by Warning RADWIN Manager will not catch any traps from the
ProcessName (pid: ProcessId) ODU, some other application has grabbed this
port. For further detail see this web site.

Device unreachable! Error Check connectivity to ODU

Connected to <site_name> Information

<site_name> Site will be reset. Information

Restore Factory Default Settings in process on Site <site_name> Information

Factory Settings: The process was not finished due to connection Warning Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem
issues. to ODU

Reset: The process was not finished due to connection issues. Warning Factory setting failed due to connectivity problem
to target - ODU will not be reset

Cannot Write to Monitor file. There is not enough space on the disk. Warning Free some space on disk on the managing
computer and retry

Windows Error: <error_ID>. Cannot Write to Monitor file. Warning Operating System error on the managing computer

TDM Counters were cleared for both sides Information

Identical IP addresses at <local_site_name> and Warning Set up a different IP to each site

<remote_site_name>

The Product is not identified at the <local_site_name> site. Warning RADWIN Manager is incompatible with the ODU
software version

The Product is not identified at the <remote_site_name> site. Warning

The Product is not identified at both sites. Warning

Product Not Identified! Warning

The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the Warning ODU release is newer than RADWIN Manager
<remote_site_name> site. release.
Wizards are not available. RADWIN Manager will
be used just for monitoring. Upgrade the RADWIN
Manager. (You will get this message as a pop up)

The Manager identified a newer ODU release at both sites. Warning

The Manager identified a newer ODU release at the Warning

<local_site_name> site.

Newer Version identified at the <local_site_name> site. Warning ODU release is newer than RADWIN Manager
release.
Wizards are not available. RADWIN Manager will
be used just for monitoring. Upgrade the RADWIN
Manager.

Newer Version identified at the <remote_site_name> site. Warning

Newer Version Identified! Warning

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-16

Setting the Events Preferences Chapter 9

Setting the Events Preferences

You can define a color for the messages to be displayed in the Event Log
window, according to the severity of the event. The severity is predefined.

¾ To set the Message color:

1. From the Tools menu, choose Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box appears.
2. Click the Events Tab:

Figure 9-17: Preferences dialog box - Event tab

3. Select the event type and click on the button.

A color chart opens.
4. Select the required color.
5. Repeat for each of the event types.

¾ To set the message background color:

• Click Background Color to change the text background.

¾ To reset the message colors:

• Click Reset Settings to return to the default color settings.

Saving the Events Log

You can save recorded events in an Events Log text file. New alarms are
automatically added to the text file, as they enter the Events Log.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-17

Active Alarms Chapter 9

Active Alarms
Upon setting a trap destination, applicable events are reported as active
alarms to the user. The active alarms are saved and can be viewed in the
Active Alarms window.

¾ To view summary of saved alarms:

1. From the Tools menu, choose Active Alarm Summary.
2. Choose either of the sites offered.
The Active Alarms Summary window opens:

Figure 9-18: Active Alarms Summary

The active alarms display does not update itself until the Refresh button is
used.
The following table provides an explanation of the command buttons.

Table 9-6: Active Alarms command buttons

Command Action

Save Saves the alarms in CSV or text format for further analysis

Refresh Shows the active alarms at the moment of refresh

Site Selects site for the active alarms

Close Closes the active alarm window

Viewing Recent Events

Each ODU stores the last 256 events:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-18

Reverting Alert Messages Chapter 9

¾ To view the last 256 events:

1. Click Tools | Recent Events ... A window like the following is dis-
played:

Figure 9-19: Recent Events - Up to last 256 events at Site A

2. Use the Site button to choose Site B
3. Use the Save button to store the events in a tab-delimited list.

Reverting Alert Messages

Many alert messages in the RADWIN Manager have an option of the form
“Do not show this message again”. These alert messages can be reverted to
their default state (shown) by choosing the Advanced tab from the Prefer-
ences dialog:

Figure 9-20: Advanced Preferences

Just click the Restore Defaults button, followed by OK.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-19

Other Advanced Preferences Chapter 9

Other Advanced Preferences

Enable and Disable Checking for Software Updates

If you are not on a network with Internet access, disable this.

Setting the RADWIN Manager Language

In the dialog of Figure 9-20, you can set the RADWIN Manager interface
language, where other localizations are available.

Setting SNMP Parameters

Use these choices to set the SNMP monitoring interval and time-out. These
are only significant if you are using an SNMP based network management
system such as RADWIN NMS.

Remote Power Fail Indication

Remote power fail indication indicates to one side that the other side has
suffered a power failure. The failed site sends a final trap indication about
the power loss just before powering off.
A “Dying-Gasp” circuit identifies the power failure at a minimum interval of
20 milliseconds before the ODU or IDU powers off. During that interval a
message notifying the power failure is sent to opposite site. External alarm
output number 4 indicates power failure at the opposite site.

Troubleshooting
Use the following table to troubleshoot LED fault indications:

Table 9-7: LED fault indicators

LED Status Remedy

PWR Off Check that power is connected to the IDU

IDU Red Check that the IDU/ODU cable is properly wired and connected.

ODU Red Check that the IDU/ODU cable is properly wired and connected.

Orange Complete the installation procedure from the RADWIN Manager

AIR I/F
Check the antenna alignment. Check that the radio configuration of both site A and
Red
site B units are the same (Channel and Link ID).

Orange Alarm detected at the Site B interface or Local or Remote loopback

SVC Red Alarm detected at the Site A interface
Off Ethernet only IDU or E1/T1 not configured

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-20

Replacing an ODU Chapter 9

Table 9-7: LED fault indicators (Continued)

LED Status Remedy

Red HSS not operational due to improper signal detection. This ODU is not transmitting
Orange HSS is operational. One of the following conditions apply:
• This ODU is a master that is generating signals and detecting signals
• This ODU is a master that is generating signals but detected improper sig-
HSS nals
• This ODU is a client “Continue Tx” but is not detecting signals
• This ODU is a client “Disable Tx” and is detecting signals from multiple
sources
All orange cases transmit.

Red MHS mode Primary, Link state not active

STBY
Orange MHS mode Secondary, Link state active

Use the following table to troubleshoot faults in the system:.

Table 9-8: System Troubleshooting

Symptom Remedy

Ensure that power is connected to the IDU

No power
Ensure that the ODU cable is properly wired and connected

Complete the installation procedure from the RADWIN Manager

No signal
Check the antenna alignment. Check that the radio configuration of both site A and site B
units is the same (channel settings and Link ID)

Check the antenna alignment, reconfigure the link

Weak signal
received
Check the alignment tone sounds the Best Signal sequence

Replacing an ODU
Prior to any action ensure that both ODUs have the same software version.
You can see this on the inventory panels for each site.
For Site A, click Site A | Inventory and note the ODU software version.
Repeat this for Site B using Site B | Inventory.
If either ODU has an old software version, perform a software upgrade. It is
important to configure the new ODU identically to the old ODU to avoid con-
figuration mismatches, which will disrupt the link.
An ODU may be reconfigured in several ways.
• Use the backup configuration
If a backup of the configuration is available, restore that
configuration using Site A| Restore. Recall that backup files are
linked to a MAC address. This won’t work for an identical
replacement ODU.
• Manual configuration
The new ODU can be configured manually according to the link
configuration. Remember to use the same settings for Link ID,
channels, link password, IP addresses, and names.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-21

Restoring Factory Setup Chapter 9

Restoring Factory Setup

¾ To restore factory setup:
• Use Site Configuration A or B, and then Operations | Restore
Defaults. Always restore the over-the-air site (B) first.

Online Help
Online help can be accessed from the Help menu on the main window of
the RADWIN Manager.

Customer Support
Customer support for this product can be obtained from the local VAR, Inte-
grator or distributor from whom it was purchased.
For further information, please contact the RADWIN distributor nearest to
you or one of RADWIN's offices worldwide (see RADWIN Worldwide
Offices at the beginning of this manual).

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 9-22

RADWIN 2000

Broadband Wireless Transmission System

USER MANUAL

RELEASE 2.5.00

Part 2: Site Synchronization

UM 2000-2500/09.10
 Chapter 10

Hub Site Synchronization

What is Hub Site Synchronization?
When several units are collocated at a common hub site, interference may
occur from one unit to another. RADWIN ODU units support the collocation
of more than two units at a central site. Like any other RF deployment, the
wireless operation is highly dependent on factors such as available frequen-
cies, the physical spacing between radios, other interfering radios, and
whether WinLink 1000 or RADWIN 2000 units are installed.

HSS does not eliminate the need for careful RF planning to ensure the
design will work as planned. See Chapter 2 of the User Manual (both
WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000) for information on installation site survey.
Note For WinLink 1000 units, Hub Site Synchronization support depends on the
product model.

The RADWIN Hub Site Synchronization (HSS) method uses a cable con-
nected from the master ODU to all collocated ODUs; this cable carries
pulses sent to each ODU, which synchronize their transmission with each
other. The pulse synchronization ensures that transmission occurs at the
same time for all collocated units. This also results in all of the hub site units
receiving data at the same time, eliminating the possibility of interference
that could result if some units transmit while other units at the same loca-
tion receive.
Figure 10-1 illustrates interference caused by non-synchronized collocated
units.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-1

What is Hub Site Synchronization? Chapter 10

Figure 10-1: Interference caused by collocated units

Adding HSS removes interference as shown in the next two figures:

Figure 10-2: Collocated units using Hub Site Synchronization (1)

Figure 10-3: Collocated units using Hub Site Synchronization (2)

The units are connected to each other with HSS cables and HSS Distribution
Units.
One of the radios in the site is defined as HSS Master and generates syn-
chronization pulses.
The other collocated radios in the site - the HSS Clients, are connected to
the HSS Master and synchronize their transmission to the pulses. An HSS
Client can be configured to work in one of two modes:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-2

Hardware Installation Chapter 10

• HSS Client-Continue Transmission (HSC-CT): If the unit loses

synchronization with the HSS Master, the link remains active. How-
ever, without synchronization pulses, it is possible that this unit will
cause interference.
• HSS Client-Disable Transmission (HSC-DT): If the unit loses
synchronization with the HSS Master, the link is dropped until the
synchronization pulses resume. This setting prevents the unit from
causing interference.
The remote ODUs that are not located at the hub site, are called Indepen-
dent Units.

WinLink 1000 radios used as independent units do not require HSS

hardware.
Note

Hardware Installation

Connecting an HSS Unit

A single HSS unit supports up to ten collocated ODUs. In addition to each
unit being connected to its IDU or PoE device, the collocated unit has an
additional cable that is connected to the HSS Unit. The HSS Unit is a com-
pact, weatherproof (IP67) connector box that is installed on the same mast
as the ODUs. All collocated units connect to this box using CAT-5e cable.
Cables in prepared lengths are available for purchase.
The HSS unit is supplied with ten protective covers; any port not in use
must be closed with a protective cover.

Figure 10-4: HSS Interconnection Unit

• For a single HSS unit, ensure that the collocated units are connected
in sequence from SYNC 1. If an ODU is removed from the hub site,
then all remaining ODUs must be reconnected to maintain the con-
nectivity.
Note • You may cascade (daisy-chain) two or more HSS Units with an HSS
cable. The method is described in detail below.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-3

Using a Single HSS Unit Chapter 10

¾ To connect an ODU to an HSS unit:

1. Unscrew the protective cover from the port marked SYNC 1.
2. Connect the RJ-45 connector from one end of the prepared CAT-5e cable
to SYNC 1.
3. Connect the other end of the CAT-5e cable to the ODU connector labeled
SYNC.
4. Tighten the protective seal that is on the prepared cable over the RJ-45
connector.
5. Repeat for all ODUs that are to be collocated at the hub site. The next
ODU to be connected is inserted in SYNC 1, SYNC 2, followed by SYNC 3
and so on.

Using a Single HSS Unit

Figure 10-5: HSS Wiring schematic

The wiring, as shown in Figure 10-5 is self explanatory. The Sync signal
path is less self evident. If we set ODU 1 (on SYNC 1) to HSS Master, then
the Sync signal path is as shown in Figure 10-6. The signal travels from
ODU 1 to SYNC 1, from SYNC 1 to SYNC 2, from SYNC 2 to ODU 2 and back
again. The back and forth paths repeat for the second to fourth ODU, from
left to right. The signal exits the HSS unit at SYNC 5 and terminates in ODU
5.
The choice of the ODU on SYNC 1 as HSS master is not mandatory, but is
good practice. If for example we were to use ODU 3 as HSS master, the
Sync signal path would be ODU 3 to SYNC 3, then left and right to SYNC 2
and SYNC 4. It would then propagate to ODUs 2 and 4, terminating at both
ODUs 1 and 5.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-4

Using More than One HSS Unit Chapter 10

Figure 10-6: HSS sync signal path with ODU 1 as HSS Master

Using More than One HSS Unit

In a large collocation site, several HSS units may be cascaded (daisy-
chained) subject to the following conditions:
Condition 1: Cabling Sequence
1. Up to nine ODUs may be connected to the first HSS unit using HSS ports
SYNC 1, SYNC 2, SYNC 3,... up to SYNC 9 in order without leaving empty
ports.
2. The next available SYNC port of the first HSS unit should be
connected to SYNC 10 of the second HSS unit as shown in
Figure 10-7. In the illustration, the next available port on the
first HSS unit is SYNC 6.
3. The second HSS unit may be filled out with up to nine more
ODUs in reverse order. That is, connect SYNC 9, SYNC 8, SYNC
7... as shown in Figure 10-7.

Figure 10-7: Cascading two HSS units

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-5

Using More than One HSS Unit Chapter 10

4. To add a a further HSS unit: Connect the next available SYNC

port from the second HSS unit in descending order (SYNC 5 in
Figure 10-7) to SYNC 1 of the third HSS unit.
5. ODUs are connected to the third HSS unit from SYNC 2 as shown
in Figure 10-8, in ascending order:

Figure 10-8: Cascading three HSS units

6. If further ODUs are required, observe the convention that
additional even numbered units are populated in descending
order from SYNC 9 and odd numbered HSS units are populated
in ascending order from SYNC 2.

If an ODU is disconnected from an HSS unit, then all remaining ODUs must
be moved up or down to maintain the connectivity.
Note

Condition 2: Total HSS Cable Length

The total path of the HSS sync pulse must not exceed 300m. This applies no
matter how many HSS units are used. To illustrate the method for calculat-
ing the sync pulse path length we show three examples. For our purpose,
let:
Lmn denote the length of the ODU-HSS unit cable at SYNC n on HSS unit
m
Hm be the length of the cable joining HSS unit m to HSS unit m+1

One HSS unit with five collocated ODUs

PathLength = L 11 + 2 × L 12 + 2 × L 13 + 2 × L 14 + L 15

Two cascaded HSS units as shown in Figure 10-7

PathLength = L 11 + 2 × L 12 + 2 × L 13 + 2 × L 14 +
2 × L 15 + H 1 + 2 × L 29 + 2 × L 28 + 2 × L 27 + L 26

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-6

HSS Error Notification Chapter 10

Three cascaded HSS units as shown in Figure 10-8

PathLength = L 11 + 2 × L 12 + 2 × L 13 + 2 × L 14 +
2 × L 15 + H 1 + 2 × L 29 + 2 × L 28 + 2 × L 27 + 2 × L 26 +
H 2 + 2 × L 32 + 2 × L 33 + 2 × L 34 + L 35

HSS Error Notification

In the event of an HSS installation fault, the ODU will sound a beep pattern
according to the following chart, also printed on the ODU product label:

Figure 10-9: ODU beep for HSS Error

ODU/HSS Unit Connection Pinout

Table 10-1: ODU/HSS Unit Connection Pinout
ODU HSS UNIT
Color
RJ-45 RJ-45

White/Green 1 1

Green
Not connected
White/Orange

Orange 6 6

Blue 4 4

White/Blue 5 5

White/Brown 7 7

Brown 8 8

Radio Frame Pattern (RFP)

A Radio Frame Pattern (RFP) is the cycle duration of transmit and receive of
the air-frame.

Without HSS
When selecting TDM or Ethernet services, the system automatically and
transparently chooses the optimal RFP. When TDM and Ethernet services
are configured, the RFP is optimized for TDM.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-7

RFP and HSS Chapter 10

RFP and HSS

When HSS is used, the RFP for the collocated radios must be selected man-
ually.
Both WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000 use the Time Division Duplex (TDD)
mechanism.
Under HSS, TDD enables synchronization of transmission for the collocated
units as shown in Figure 10-10:

Figure 10-10: Radio Frame Pattern

Five RFP types (A to E) are available. Under HSS the RFP must be config-
ured by the user depending on the type of the radio products, services and
channel bandwidth in accordance with the Table 10-2 and Table 10-3.
The tables describe the efficiency of the air interface according to the RFP
type, radio products mix, services and channel bandwidth. The tables may
also be viewed in the RADWIN Manager and in the Link Budget Calculator
for both WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000. The efficiency of the air interface
will vary according to the product used.
Table 10-2: Radio Frame Pattern Table - RADWIN 2000
40 MHz 20 MHz 10 MHz
RFP
TDM Ethernet TDM Ethernet TDM Ethernet
B Fit Fit Fit Fit Fit Fit
E Best Best Best Best Best Best

Table 10-3: Radio Frame Pattern Table - WinLink 1000

20 MHz 10 MHz 5 MHz
RPF
TDM Ethernet TDM Ethernet TDM Ethernet
A Best Best Fit Fit N/A N/A
B N/A N/A Best Fit Best Fit
C N/A N/A N/A Best N/A Fit
D N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Best
E Fit Fit Fit Fit N/A N/A

Legend:
Fit - available RFP for TDM and Ethernet services.
Best - optimal RFP for TDM and Ethernet services.
N/A - service unavailable

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-8

RFP: General Radio Frame Pattern Chapter 10

Select the RFP that gives you the Best or Fit for required system services
and select the channel bandwidth accordingly.

The RFP must be the same for each link within the collocated system.
Note

RFP: General Radio Frame Pattern

When setting the RPF, the following considerations should be borne in mind:
• When synchronizing RADWIN 2000 units you must use RFP B or E
• If you mix RADWIN 2000 and WinLink 1000 units in a collocated
site, you must use RFP B or E
• Selection of the RFP influences the capacity, latency and TDM quality
• RFP influences capacity and latency. Jitter buffer configuration can
be used to set the TDM quality (see Chapter 5, TDM Services
selection)
• Using the Link Budget Calculator, you can see the affect of the RFP
on the Ethernet throughput.

RFP: RADWIN 2000 Considerations

• The performance of RADWIN 2000 radios that operate with RFPs B
or E can be seen in the Link Budget Calculator.
• For RADWIN 2000 C series: If the HSS Master works in asymmetric
Tx/Rx ratio, then all other collocated RADWIN 2000 units must oper-
ate in the same Tx/Rx ratio. In this case the ratio will be fixed and
not automatic-adaptive.
• Installation/Configuration considerations: If you are using RADWIN
2000 C master and RADWIN 2000 clients, the Services and Rates
dialog will look like this:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-9

RFP: RADWIN 2000 Considerations Chapter 10

Figure 10-11: Services and Rates - RADWIN 2000 C master, RADWIN 2000
clients
• The circled areas should not be used. Using those areas, you may
loose the collocated link with the longest distance between sites. If
you do move the slider into a circled area, you will receive a popup
warning:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-10

RFP: RADWIN 2000 Considerations Chapter 10

Figure 10-12: Services and Rates - RADWIN 2000 C master, RADWIN 2000
clients - Extreme asymmetric allocation
By restricting one direction into the restricted area, the more distant
sites may not even be able to sustain the link much less send or
receive data.
• Asymmetric Allocation and Collocation: If the link is collocated, the
use of Asymmetric Allocation is limited.
The effective available range for Asymmetric Allocation (between the
two circled tick in Figure 10-11) is primarily determined by three
factors:
• The RFP in use (B or E)
• Channel Bandwidth
• Link distance
The first two parameters are entered during Link
Installation/Configuration.
• Possible scenarios are shown in Table 10-4.Whenever Asymmetric
Allocation is available, it is static for all traffic conditions.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-11

 RFP: WinLink 1000 Considerations Chapter 10

Table 10-4: Asymmetric Allocation with Collocated Links - Scenarios

HSS Master HSS Client Scenario: If you try to... Result Remarks

WinLink 1000 Link down Reversion to 50/50 restores link

• Releases prior to 2.4 -

Link down
• Release 2.4 later (RAD-
WIN 2000 PDH and
Change master to RADWIN 2000 L series) Release 2.4 and later (RADWIN
RADWIN 2000
asymmetric allocation - Link down 2000 C series) - Asymmetric
RADWIN 2000
• Release 2.4 and later Allocation slider visible but
(RADWIN 2000 C cannot be changed
series) - TDM services
stopped, link set to
transmission ratio of
master

WinLink 1000
RADWIN 2000
Change client to Asymmetric Allocation slider You cannot do this
RADWIN 2000
asymmetric not displayed

WinLink 1000
WinLink 1000
Change client to Asymmetric Allocation slider You cannot do this
RADWIN 2000
asymmetric not displayed

RFP: WinLink 1000 Considerations

• When WinLink 1000 radios are collocated with RADWIN 2000 radios
using HSS, all radios must use RFP B or E.
• The performance of WinLink 1000 radios that operate with these
RFPs can be seen in the Link Budget Calculator.
• The choice of the unit to be the HSS master is a matter of conve-
nience. There is no technical reason to prefer a WinLink 1000 over a
RADWIN 2000 as HSS master or vice versa. It is however, recom-
mended that you use the RADWIN 2000 as master, since it will
enforce the correct RFP on the other collocated units.
The following list summarizes the effect of using RFP B or E on WinLink
1000 radios. These effects should be taken into consideration when plan-
ning new installations:
• Channel bandwidth 5 MHz is available under RFP E but is only sup-
ported for ZZZZ Acceess products
• For products supporting a maximum throughput of 18.1 Mbps, the
maximum Ethernet throughput is 14.5 Mbps at 20 MHz channel
bandwidth and 9.3 Mbps at 10 MHz channel bandwidth
• For products supporting maximum throughput of 22.5 Mbps, the
maximum Ethernet throughput is 21.4 Mbps at the 20 MHz channel
and 9.3 Mbps at 10 MHz channel bandwidth

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-12

HSS Status LED on the IDU-C and New Style IDU-E Chapter 10

HSS Status LED on the IDU-C and New Style IDU-E

The IDU-C and IDU-E have a front panel HSS status LED:

Table 10-5: IDU-C and New Style IDU-E Front Panel LEDs for HSS
Color Function

Green This ODU is HSS master, generating signal, and HSS Sync is OK

Blinking
This ODU is a HSS client and in Sync
Green

Red HSS not operational due to improper signal detection. This ODU is not transmitting

HSS is operational. One of the following conditions apply:

• This ODU is a master that is generating signals and detecting signals
• This ODU is a master that is generating signals but detected improper signals
Orange
• This ODU is a client “Continue Tx” but is not detecting signals
• This ODU is a client “Disable Tx” and is detecting signals from multiple sources
All orange cases transmit.

HSS is not activated

Off HSS is not supported (WinLink 1000 only)
Disconnection between ODU and IDU

Link Configuration and HSS

For WinLink 1000 HSS-enabled units and all RADWIN 2000 units, the Hub
Site Synchronization Settings dialog box appears in both the Link Installa-
tion and Configuration Wizards.

Figure 10-13: HSS Settings: Left - WinLink 1000 client, Right - RADWIN
2000 master
The Synchronization Status dialog box displays the current status of each
side of the link.
• Operation: Type of unit

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-13

Link Configuration and HSS Chapter 10

• Hub Sync Master (HSM)

• Hub Sync Client - Disable Transmission (HSC-DT)
• Hub Sync Client - Continue Transmission (HSC-CT)

Continue Transmission is intended to work if there is no HSM pulse. If a

wrong HSM pulse is detected, a WinLink 1000 will resync, adapting to the
Note HSM RFP and continue whereas RADWIN 2000 may stop.

• Independent Unit
• Synchronization:
• N/A- for Master or Independent Units
• Synchronized - for Hub Site Clients
• Not Synchronized - for Hub Site Clients
• External Pulses:

Table 10-6: External Pulse Status

HSS Sync Status Meaning Color code

ODU is HSM and generates the

Generating
sync pulse

ODU is HSC and detects the Green

Detected
sync pulse

Not detected ODU is independent

Generating and detected HSM, but other HSM present

RADWIN 2000 ODU is HSM,

Generating and
but but detects a WinLink 1000 Orange
Improperly Detected
HSM signal that is not RFP E

Not detected HSC but no HSM present

HSC but HSM pulse doesn’t fit

the HSC as configured. Occurs
Improperly detected Red
only for RADWIN 2000, which
stops transmitting.

¾ To configure the Operational States of the Hub Site unit

1. Click the Enabled check box
2. Click the Configure button
The Hub Site Configuration dialog box with the current status of the
ODUs is displayed.
3. Select the type of unit configuration from the drop-down list.
4. Select the appropriate RFP radio button. Some RFP options may be dis-
abled depending on the bandwidth previously selected.

Take care to avoid incorrect configuration of bandwidth, RFP or to set

multiple Hub Sync Masters, as system interference can occur. RADWIN
Manager provides error messages and tool tips if the system is configured
Note with mismatches.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-14

Site Configuration and HSS Chapter 10

Figure 10-14: Hub Site Configuration dialog - Left WinLink 1000, right RAD-
WIN 2000

Site Configuration and HSS

For units that support HSS, the Hub Site Sync option appears in the Air
Interface section and displays the current HSS of the unit. Configure the
unit from the Link Configuration Wizard according to the procedure
described above.

Figure 10-15: Site Configuration: HSS - Left - WinLink 1000 client, Right -
RADWIN 2000 master
For WinLink 1000 units without HSS support, Figure 10-16 is displayed
instead of Figure 10-15:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-15

Site Configuration and HSS Chapter 10

Figure 10-16: HSS Not Supported

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 10-16

 Chapter 11

Using the RADWIN GSU

What is it for
The GPS-based synchronization unit (GSU) is designed to handle inter-site
interferences under large-scale deployment scenarios.
The GSU is an outdoor unit consisting of a standard Wireless Link enclosure,
a GPS antenna and a PoE device.
The GSU is connected to the HSS Unit using a standard HSS cable. It syn-
chronizes the transmission timing of multiple Hub-Sites to the same clock
source thus eliminating mutual interference.

GSU Functionality
The GSU receives a synchronization signal from the GPS once per second. It
distributes a RADWIN proprietary synchronization signal to all other ODU
units using the RS422 protocol and the standard HSS mechanism, where
the GSU acts as an HSM unit.
When the GSU doesn’t receive a synchronization signal from the GPS for 30
seconds, it moves automatically to Self-Generation mode and acts as a reg-
ular HSM unit, until the GPS recovers.

Typical GSU Scenarios

Independent Distributed Sites

In the scenario of Figure 11-1, we have multiple independent collocated
sites, which may interfere with each other. To meet this situation, we coor-
dinate all of them using the GSU as shown.
The GSU functions like “wide area HSS unit”, ensuring that all participating
radios at the locations marked GSU each transmit and receive at the same
time.
pendent
dis

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-1

Multiple Distributed Sites with Communication Chapter 11

tributed sites

Figure 11-1: GSU Scenario - Independent distributed sites

Multiple Distributed Sites with Communication

What happens if, in Figure 11-1, the GSU towers themselves have radios
communicating as shown in Figure 11-2?
Consider GSU 1 and GSU 2: Both collocated towers transmit and receive
simultaneously. However, the radios communicating at GSU 1 and GSU 2
must transmit and receive in turn according to the scheme in marked “Nor-
mal Phase” in Figure 11-3. This is an impossible situation, if all the links
must send and receive together. It is further complicated by adding a third
and further sites as shown.

Figure 11-2: GSU Scenario - Communicating distributed sites

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-2

Cascaded Sites using Shifted Phase Transmission Chapter 11

Cascaded Sites using Shifted Phase Transmission

The solution offered here is not a “universal cure”. The following conditions
are necessary, but in any specific case may not be sufficient:
• The GSU sites (marked 1, and 3 above) are sufficiently far apart as
to ensure that there is no mutual interference between communicat-
ing sites (1-2 and 2-3 above)
• There should be no interference between non-communicating sites
(1 and 3 above).
To see how it works, we use Figure 11-2. The GSU towers are numbered
and marked for cascading, 1-2 and 2-3. There should not be a link between
1 and 3.
The GSU can synchronize the TDD timing of several sites enabling the cas-
cading of consecutive links without mutual interference.
To use cascading, the TDD timing of the even-ordered links (GSU 2 above)
must be “shifted” (Shifted Phase) and odd-ordered links (GSU 1 and GSU 3
above) must be “unshifted” (Normal Phase). The phase shift is half of the
Radio Frame Duration (RFD) from the chosen RFP. The scheme is shown in
Figure 11-3.
Since the GSU is always HSS master (HSM), at each GSU location, the GSU
can “force” the synchronization of its collocated radios. By half RFD shifting,
alternate collocated sites can talk to each other.

Figure 11-3: Phase shifted transmission - phase shift is 1/2 the RFD
Choice of normal or shifted phase is configurable per GSU using the RAD-
WIN Manager.

GSU Redundancy
The GSU is designed to support redundancy, improving the robustness of a
GSU based topology.
In redundancy mode, two GSUs are installed at the same HSS site. One of
them self-configures to generate HSS sync signals. We will call it the Pri-
mary unit. The other one, the Secondary unit remains dormant merely poll-
ing the first GSU. If the Primary GSU fails, then the Secondary GSU
becomes active immediately. If the Primary unit becomes active again, it
remains dormant, reversing the original roles. The choice of the Primary
GSU is random and of no significance.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-3

GSU Kit Contents Chapter 11

If the Primary GSU fails, and then the Secondary GSU also fails to receive
sync signals from its GPS, then it moves to self-generation HSM mode like
an ordinary HSM ODU until its GPS recovers.

Figure 11-4: Make the GSUs the first two collocated units
Redundancy switching is completely transparent to the GSU-managed links.

GSU Kit Contents

The GSU package includes:
• 1 x GSU
• 1 x Mounting Kit
• 1 x GPS Antenna
• 1 x GPS Antenna Mounting Kit
• 1 x RF Cable, 1.5m
• CD

GSU Installation

Overview
The GSU uses the same container and cabling as a WinLink 1000 unit.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-4

Preparing the GSU for Use Chapter 11

Figure 11-5: General GSU configuration

In that respect, all of the considerations of Chapter 3, Chapter 17 and
Chapter 18 apply to the GSU.
It may be configured using the regular RADWIN Manager or Telnet.

Preparing the GSU for Use

Use the method of Chapter 19, Preloading an ODU with an IP
Address to change the IP address from the default (10.0.0.120). In the
example screen captures below, we use 192.168.222.20 with Subnet Mask
255.255.252.0.

Mounting the GSU

Mount the GSU and antenna. Ensure that its ODU port connected to its PoE
device and the HSS cable is connected to the HSS unit as shown. The exter-
nal LAN port of the PoE device is connected to the managing computer. If
you are accessing the GSU through a network it is essential that you use the
IP preloading method. The default IP address may be inaccessible and you
may not use the Local Connection method over a network.

Configuring the GSU

Getting Started
To configure the GSU, you log on to it, exactly as in Chapter 4.
The GSU Main Window
Here is the main window for GSU configuration:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-5

Configuring the GSU Chapter 11

Figure 11-6: GSU Main widow at startup

The top five items in the GSU Monitor panel are taken from a satellite. The
transmission Phase may be Normal as shown or Shifted. It purpose,
together with the Tx Ratio bar, will be explained below.
The Status Box
Under normal operating conditions, it will be green as shown, indicating
that it is synchronized with a satellite.

If satellite synchronization is lost, then the GSU will function as an indepen-

dent HSM and the status box will change color:

The Main Menu

The main menu is a subset of the main menu applicable to the WinLink
1000. Notice that there are no Installation or Configuration wizards. Such
configuration as is necessary is carried out using a modified version of Site
Configuration for WinLink 1000.
Similarly, the Tool bar is a subset of that applicable to the WinLink 1000.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-6

Configuring the GSU Chapter 11

Using Site Configuration for the GSU

Site Configuration: System
Here is the opening window for Site Configuration:

Figure 11-7: Site Configuration: System

It is similar to that of the WinLink 1000.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-7

Configuring the GSU Chapter 11

Site Configuration: GPS Sync Unit

This window is the main GSU configuration tool:

Figure 11-8: Site Configuration: GPS Sync Unit

The 1000 and 2000 labels refer to WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000 radios,
respectively. The actual annotation seen may vary, but the intention should
Note be clear.

1. Setting the RFP for HSS

The GSU is automatically configured as HSS Master (HSM).

Ensure that no other collocated ODU is configured as HSM.

Note

If the hub site consists only of WinLink 1000 units, then any suitable
RFP may be chosen. If there are one or more RADWIN 2000 units, you
must use RFP B or E.
The permitted RFPs are also dependent on channel bandwidth and are
color coded as follows:
You May use RFP/
Channel
Bandwidth For these collocated radios
combinations with
this color
WinLink 1000 only

RADWIN 2000 only

WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000 together

None - unavailable

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-8

Configuring the GSU Chapter 11

There is a further restriction: If there are two distributed sites transmit-

ting to each other, they must both use the same RFP. This requirement,
together with use of shifted transmission phase (item 3 below), ensures
that communicating distributed sites to not interfere with each other by
transmitting simultaneously.
Two GSU managed sites transmitting with shifted transmission phase and
using the same RFP, transmit one half a RFD apart (see Figure 11-3
above).
2. Setting the Tx Transmission Ratio
Since the GSU is always HSM, it must be able to cater for hub site RAD-
WIN 2000 C based links. (See the RADWIN 2000 User Manual, Chapter
5). If you use asymmetric allocation, shifted transmission phase becomes
unavailable and you cannot “cascade” links as described in step 1.
3. Choosing the Transmission Phase
Chose the Transmission Phase in accordance with considerations in step
1 above. If you choose Shifted Phase then the Asymmetric Ratio selector
is disabled.
Site Configuration: Management

Figure 11-9: Site Configuration: Management

Here you set the GSU IP address, subnet mask and gateway. You also set
trap addresses here. It is identical to the corresponding panel for WinLink
1000.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-9

Configuring the GSU Chapter 11

Site Configuration: Inventory

Figure 11-10: Site Configuration: Inventory

Site Configuration: Security
You can only change the SNMP Community stings:

Figure 11-11: Site Configuration: Security

Site Configuration: Date and Time
ODU Recent events, alarms and traps are time-stamped from the time
method chosen here (NTP, managing computer, ODU default).

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-10

Configuring the GSU Chapter 11

Figure 11-12: Setting the date and time for trap reporting
Site Configuration: Operations
The only available action here is Restore System Defaults:

Figure 11-13: Site Configuration: Operations

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-11

GSU Preferences Chapter 11

GSU Preferences
The Preferences window adds a new tab for the GSU:

Figure 11-14: Site Configuration: Operations

You may chose the units for latitude/longitude coordinates.

GSU Monitoring and Diagnostics

The monitoring and diagnostic reports are similar to those of WinLink 1000.

GSU Telnet Support

To configure the GSU with Telnet, start a Telnet session, using
telnet <GSU_ipaddr>.
For example, if you run Telnet as follows,
telnet 192.168.222.20
you will be asked for a user name and password. You must log on with
administrator privilege under user name, admin and password netman.
The available commands are the same as for WinLink 1000 with the addi-
tion of four additional display commands and three additional set com-
mands.
The additional display commands are
display rfp
display ratio
display tx_phase
display gpsinfo
The last one display gpsinfo, is the most interesting:
[email protected]> display gpsinfo

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-12

Software Update for GSUs Chapter 11

Current GPS time 102941.000

Current GPS latitude 51.500000
Current GPS N\S Indicator N
Current GPS longitude 0.000000
Current GPS E\W Indicator E
Current GPS number of satellites 09
Current GPS altitude 84.0

Command "display gpsinfo" finished OK.

The three additional set commands are
set rfp <index> (2-6)
set ratio <ratio>
set tx_phase <mode:1=normal,2=shifted>

Software Update for GSUs

All GSUs in a distributed site can be updated simultaneously. Use an IP list
as described in Chapter 14.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 11-13

RADWIN 2000

Broadband Wireless Transmission System

USER MANUAL

RELEASE 2.5.00

Part 3: Advanced Installation

UM 2000-2500/09.10
 Chapter 12

Monitored Hot Standby

Installation Procedure
What is a RADWIN Monitored Hot Standby
The RADWIN Monitored Hot Standby (MHS a.k.a 1+1) is a duplicated link
set up as a primary link and a secondary link in hot standby mode as shown
in Figure 12-1 below.

Figure 12-1: RADWIN Monitored Hot Standby

RADWIN MHS provides redundancy and backup to TDM services. It is
designed to provide high reliability high-capacity Point-to-Point links. The
RADWIN MHS is -

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-1

What RADWIN MHS provides Chapter 12

• Designed to provide redundancy and high reliability for carrier class

operators
• Optimized for high capacity links operating in license-free bands
• A comprehensive solution providing protection against both equip-
ment failure and loss of air interface, by simple connectivity between
a primary link and a secondary link
The main service redundancy features of the RADWIN MHS are –
• TDM service cut-over from the primary to the secondary link is com-
pletely automatic
• TDM service cut-over time no more than 50 ms
• Automatic restore to primary link as soon as it becomes available
• Support for up to sixteen TDM channels for RADWIN 2000 and four
TDM channels for WinLink 1000.
MHS is supported between -
• two WinLink 1000 links
• two RADWIN 2000 links
• a WinLink 1000 link and a RADWIN 2000 link.

What RADWIN MHS provides

Equipment Protection
Equipment protection is provided for the electrically-active network ele-
ments, ODU and IDU.
The primary IDU and the secondary IDU are connected by a cable to moni-
tor failure and to control protection switching. Switching time is less than
50ms.
When connecting two WinLink 1000 links as 1+1, one dual-polarization
antenna can be shared by the primary link and the secondary link.

Air-Interface Protection
Air-Interface protection is unique to RADWIN and is optimized for wireless
links operating in license-free bands.
The primary link and the secondary link use different frequency channels. If
the air-interface of the primary link is disturbed and cannot carry the
required TDM service, then the system automatically switches to the secon-
dary link.
In addition, improved robustness and frequency planning flexibility is
achieved, as the primary and secondary air interfaces can operate in the
same frequency band or in different frequency bands.
Automatic Channel Selection (ACS) can be configured for each link to add
additional robustness.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-2

Purpose of this Chapter Chapter 12

The primary and secondary links are synchronized using Hub Site Synchro-
nization (HSS).
It is recommended that both sites be installed with HSS cables. If HSS fails
at one site, it can be operated from the other site by remote configuration.

Purpose of this Chapter

This chapter is an installation and maintenance guide for RADWIN MHS. It
applies to all RADWIN radio products able to support the Monitored Hot
Standby operational mode.

Who Should Read this

This chapter is intended for persons responsible for the installation and
maintenance of RADWIN MHS. To use it you need to know how to -
• Install a WinLink 1000 radio link
• Install a RADWIN 2000 radio link
• Use the RADWIN Manager software

RADWIN MHS Kit Contents

• One Y-Connection Patch Panel
• One MHS cable

Figure 12-2: RADWIN Y-Connection Patch Panel

Installing a RADWIN MHS

The following procedure is substantially generic to all RADWIN radio
products. Differences between WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000 class
products will be stated explicitly. What you see on your running RADWIN
Note Manager may differ in some details from the screen captures used to
illustrate this chapter.

Figure 12-1 above is a schematic of a RADWIN MHS. Figure 12-3 shows

how to connect the IDUs to the Patch Panel.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-3

Installing a RADWIN MHS Chapter 12

Figure 12-3: How to connect the IDUs to the Patch Panel

• With RADWIN 2000 links you can protect up to 16 TDM ports. To pro-
tect more than eight TDM ports use two Patch Panels at each site.
• Ethernet services are carried independently by primary and second-
Note ary links. Each link carries different Ethernet traffic. MHS does not
protect Ethernet traffic.

In what follows, it will be assumed that –

1. We will depart from our usual Site A / Site B conventions. Sites A and B
on the primary link will be Sites 1.2 and 1.4 respectively. The corre-
sponding sites on the secondary link will be Sites 2.2 and 2.4. The site
names reflect their IP addresses. This is a useful convention and is
reflected in the screen captures below.
2. The link will be managed from Site 1.2; Site 1.4 may be a remote site.
3. The links intended as the primary and secondary will be referred to their
respective names, Primary Link and Secondary Link as shown in
Figure 12-1 above, despite their having yet to be installed.

¾ To install a Hot Standby Link:

1. Set up Primary Link in the usual way. Ensure that it is fully operational in
accordance with the relevant instructions in Part 1 of the User Manual.

Do not proceed unless this condition is fully met!

Note

2. Connect user equipment to Site 1.4.

3. At Site 1.2, disconnect the TDM cables from the external equipment or
disconnect external equipment from the Hot Standby Patch Panel.
4. The HSS cable (connecting the ODUs) should be connected at Site 1.2.
The ODU belonging to the primary link should be configured as HSM,
whereas the ODU belonging to the secondary link should be configured
as HSC-CT.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-4

Installing a RADWIN MHS Chapter 12

5. Establish Secondary Link in the usual way, with HSS enabled. The two
link frequencies should be at least 5MHz apart.
6. Connect the MHS cables at Sites A and B as shown in Figure 12-1 and
Figure 12-3 above.
7. Run the Configuration Wizard for Primary Link. Activate TDM services in
the usual way. Navigate to the Hot Standby tab, in the Services Config-
uration panel:

Figure 12-4: Services Configuration Panel: Hot Standby mode selection

Check the Primary button to configure Primary Link as the primary link.
8. Complete the Wizard, and then move to Secondary Link.
9. Repeat step 7 for Secondary Link. For the Services Hot Standby tab, this
time, check the Secondary button.
10. Complete the Wizard.
11. At Site 1.2, reconnect the Hot Standby Patch panel to the external
equipment.
From this point on, we will simply refer to primary and secondary link (no
capitalized names).
At the end of the process, the RADWIN Manager main windows should look
like this:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-5

Installing a RADWIN MHS Chapter 12

Figure 12-5: The primary link under normal operation

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-6

Installing a RADWIN MHS Chapter 12

Figure 12-6: The secondary link under normal operation

To see what happens following a cut-over from the primary link to the sec-
ondary link, you need to have running two copies of the RADWIN Manager
– one logged into the primary link, and one logged into the secondary link.
Here then, is the situation after a cut-over to the secondary link:
For the primary link, the following window will appear for a few seconds:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-7

Installing a RADWIN MHS Chapter 12

Figure 12-7: Primary link a few seconds before regular No-Link display
It will then revert to the standard No-Link-available window.
On the secondary link Manager window, you will see a window like this:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-8

Maintaining a RADWIN MHS Link Chapter 12

Figure 12-8: Secondary Link operating as the Hot Standby link

Notice that the active link notice is highlighted in red, so that there is no
mistaking which link is operational.

Maintaining a RADWIN MHS Link

IDU Replacement
There are two situations, which must be treated differently.
Situation 1:
To replace either of the IDUs at Site 1.4 or the IDU at Site 2.2, nothing spe-
cial is required. Simply disconnect the IDU to be replaced – and replace it
with a new one. Replacing a secondary link IDU obviously has no effect on
the TDM service. Disconnecting the Site 1.4 primary IDU activates Hot
Standby. After the Site 1.4 primary IDU is replaced, the Link will detect the
change and switch back to the primary link.
If you replaced the Site 2.2 IDU, remember to reconnect the MHS cable.
Situation 2:
Replacing the Site 1.2 IDU is different, and requires several steps.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-9

ODU Replacement Chapter 12

¾ To replace the Site 1.2 primary link IDU:

1. Power off the Site 1.2 IDU. This activates the secondary link using Hot
Standby.
2. Run the Configuration manager on the secondary link, and in the Hot
Standby panel of Figure 12-4 above, check the Disabled button.
3. Replace the Site 1.2 IDU without connecting it to the ODU (to prevent
transmission by the primary link with the undefined IDU).
4. Reconnect the MHS cable between the IDUs at Site 1.2.
5. Again, run the Configuration Wizard on the secondary link, and in the
panel of Figure 12-4 above, check the Secondary button to re-enable
the link as secondary.
6. Connect the new Site 1.2 IDU to its ODU.
The Hot Standby will automatically revert to the primary link within
50ms.

ODU Replacement
Both the primary and secondary replacement ODUs require pre-configura-
tion prior to insertion into the link. The items to be pre-configured are
• HSS mode
• Link ID
• Frequency
• Hot Standby mode – using the new Services panel in Figure 12-4
above
• IP address (optional)

Pre-configuration must be carried out before the new ODU is

connected to its IDU. If you try to do it “live” against its IDU, it will
Note cause spurious transmissions and a service break.

¾ To pre-configure an ODU:
1. Attach the new ODU to an IDU or a PoE device.
2. Run the RADWIN Manager and use Hot Standby tab of Figure 12-4
above to configure the new ODU to Primary or Secondary mode as
required.
3. Ensure that it is set to the proper HSS mode in accordance with
Figure 12-4 above. Enter the required Link ID and frequency.

¾ To replace an ODU for primary or secondary link, at either site:

• Install the pre-configured ODU. (Since the other link is working normally,
nothing need be done with it. If the secondary ODU was replaced, TDM
service remains as is on the primary link. If the primary ODU was
replaced, then the TDM service will shift back to the primary link.)

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-10

Switching Logic Chapter 12

Switching Logic

Switching from Primary Link to Secondary Link

Switching from primary link to secondary link will occur following:
• Loss of the primary air interface due to sync loss
• Loss of the primary air interface due to failure of the receiver to
acquire expected E1/T1 data during a period of 24ms
• The Primary equipment (either ODU or IDU, local or remote) is pow-
ered off
Following the switch from the primary to the secondary link, the primary
and secondary link Manager main windows should look like this:

Figure 12-9: Primary link after the switch over to secondary link (After a few
seconds the display moves to No-Link display, with TDM ports grayed out.)

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-11

Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link Chapter 12

Figure 12-10: Secondary link operating after the switch over to secondary.
(After a few moments the TDM icons become green.)

Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link

Switching back from the secondary link to the primary link will occur after
the primary link has become and remains fully functional for a continuous
period of at least one second. Following reversion from the secondary link
to the primary link, the Manager main windows should look like this:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-12

Switching back from the Secondary to the Primary Link Chapter 12

Figure 12-11: Primary link operating after the switch back from secondary

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-13

System Operation description Chapter 12

Figure 12-12: Secondary Link operating after the switch back to Primary

System Operation description

• TDM services are carried by the primary link

Normal operation • The secondary link (equipment and air interface) is operating but not carrying user traffic
• TDM ports on the secondary IDUs are tri-state

• Switching to secondary will occur in the following cases:

• Loss of the primary air interface due to sync loss
• Loss of the primary air interface due to failure of the receiver to acquire expected
TDM data during a period of 24ms
Switching to backup
• Primary equipment power off (either ODU or IDU, local or remote)
• The switching result would be:
• TDM ports on the primary IDUs turn to tri-state
• TDM ports on the secondary IDUs become active

Backup operation • TDM services are carried by the secondary link

Switching back to • Switching back to primary will occur as soon as the Primary link is fully functional for 1
primary second

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 12-14

 Chapter 13

The RADWIN Ethernet

Ring
Scope
The description of RADWIN Ethernet Ring in this Chapter is completely
generic: Both WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000 links may participate in an
Ethernet ring.

VLAN IDs are used by RADWIN products in three separate contexts:

Management VLAN, Traffic VLAN and Ethernet Ring. It is recommended that
Caution you use different VLAN IDs for each context.

What is an Ethernet Ring

An Ethernet ring consists of several nodes connected by hops (links). Loops
are not allowed with Ethernet; therefore one hop is a Ring Protection
Link (RPL) which “blocks” Ethernet traffic. In the event of failure in the
ring, the Ring Protection Link unblocks and Ethernet traffic in the ring is
restored.

Some terminology:
• Normal State – all member links are functional except the RPL
which is blocked.
• Blocked - the air-link is up but Ethernet traffic is not transmitted
across the link. The Ethernet service panel for the RPL in the RAD-
WIN Manager is labeled Idle
• Unblocked - Ethernet traffic is transmitted across the RPL. The
Ethernet service panel for the RPL in the RADWIN Manager is
labeled Active
• Protection State – a member link is broken and the RPL passes
Ethernet traffic
• Ring Protection Link - as described above
• Ring Link - any member link controlled by the RPL

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-1

RADWIN Ethernet Ring Chapter 13

• Independent Link - not subject to ring protection

• Ring Protection Message (RPM) - control message used to moni-
tor and control the ring.

RPM messages are broadcast, so it is essential (to prevent flooding) to

associate the RPL and member Ring LInks with a VLAN ID. This requires in
turn, that equipment used in the ring either supports VLAN or can
Note transparently pass through VLAN tagged packets.

RADWIN Ethernet Ring

The following figure describes the RPL behavior during a ring failure and
recovery cycle.

Figure 13-1: Ring Protection mechanism

The steps below follow the numbering in Figure 13-1:
1. Normal operation
Ethernet traffic runs in the ring, but does not pass through the RPL,
which is blocked. The RPL does however, broadcast RPM packets through
the ring.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-2

RADWIN Ethernet Ring Chapter 13

2. Ring Link down, RPL notified

The RPL detects a link-down condition by the non-arrival of an RPM
packet. It remains blocked for the Minimum time for failure detec-
tion which is configurable using the RADWIN Manager (see page 13-9).
3. Ring Link down, RPL unblocked for traffic
The RPL unblocks for Ethernet traffic after the Minimum time for fail-
ure detection expires and no RPM message has been received.
4. Ring Link restored but still blocked for traffic
The Ring Link is restored, but remains blocked for the Minimum time
for recovery, set using the RADWIN Manager, to avoid rapid fluctua-
tions leading to potential short term loops (see page 13-9).
5. Ring Link restored, RPL blocked for traffic
The RPL blocks to Ethernet traffic after the Minimum time for recov-
ery expires and restores Ethernet traffic to the Ring Link (with a special
RPM packet).
Return to 1.) Ring Link restored, RPL blocked for traffic
The ring is back to normal operation.
With RADWIN links, RADWIN’s Ring Protection solution prevents Ethernet
loops in the ring at all times. The ring is always broken somewhere.
• Under a ring configuration a RADWIN Ring Link that was down and
commences recovery, keeps blocking Ethernet traffic. The RPL iden-
tifies this situation, blocks itself and then unblocks the other Ring
Link. This is the transition from step 4 to 5 in Figure 13-1.
• If the failed hop is not a RADWIN link then there are two possibili-
ties:
• If the hop Ring Link can signal that it is down by issuing a Loss
of Signal (LOS) at the Ethernet port, then the RPL will control
the RADWIN link connected to that port in the same manner as
described above, to prevent an Ethernet loop.
• Otherwise, there may be a short loop period when the RPL is
still open for traffic and the Ring Link is also unblocked during
the Minimum time for recovery.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-3

Ethernet Ring Topologies Supported by RADWIN Chapter 13

Ethernet Ring Topologies Supported by RADWIN

The following ring topologies are supported:
Table 13-1: Topologies supported by RADWIN Ethernet Ring
The ring is not connected to other rings

Stand-alone ring

One of the nodes is connected to another network / ring:

Single-homed ring

Two adjacent nodes are connected through a non-RADWIN link (e.g. micro
wave or fiber):

Dual-homed ring

Note:
• The network has to be layer 2 and support VLANs
• The ring control broadcasts RPM packets. Hence it is recommended to
prevent these packets from propagating into the network
Some of the hops are connected through non-RADWIN links:

Mixed ring

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-4

Protection Switching Chapter 13

Table 13-1: Topologies supported by RADWIN Ethernet Ring (Continued)

Some of the hops are connected through RADWIN links with PoE devices, not
supporting ring functionality:

Repeater sites

RADWIN rings with shared hops.

Shared ring

Note:
• A RADWIN link hop can be a part of up to 4 rings
• The RPL cannot be a shared link
• The two RPLs should use different Minimum Time for Activation values
to prevent duplicate action causing a loop

Protection Switching
Protection switching occurs upon failure in the ring.
The Ethernet service restoration time depends on the number of hops in the
ring. With four hops the Ethernet service is restored in less than 50 ms.
In single and dual homed topologies the service restoration may take longer
due to the aging time of the external switches. Switches that are immedi-
ately aware of routing changes reduce the restoration time.

Hardware Considerations
Ethernet Ring Protection is supported by the IDU-C, IDU-E and PoE.
A typical Ring Protection Link consists of an IDU-C or new style IDU-E, a
PoE and two ODUs as shown in Figure 13-2. Hence one end of the RPL
and of ring controlled links, as shown in Figure 13-2 has to be an IDU. It is
recommended to have an IDU at each node to have the flexibility to change
the RPL.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-5

Special Case: 1 + 1 Ethernet Redundancy Chapter 13

A ring node is built from two ODUs from adjacent links. The ODUs can be
connected to either an IDU or to a PoE device as in Figure 13-2. Port
names in the IDU are shown.

Figure 13-2: Node with IDU and PoE device

Connect the switch at the site only to one IDU.

Note

The switching function is carried out by the IDU-Cs and IDU-Es, both of
which provide Layer 2 support (see Chapter 15).

Special Case: 1 + 1 Ethernet Redundancy

The same device may be used to provide economic 1 +1 redundancy for a
single link.
A 1+1 Ethernet is a ring with two nodes. One of the links is RPL.
The equipment in a 1+1 Ethernet installation is as follows:

Figure 13-3: 1+1 Ethernet

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-6

Using RADWIN Manager to Set up a Ring Chapter 13

Figure 13-4: Using IDU-C or IDU-E with PoEs for the RPL
Notice that link content drops from four PoEs plus two switches to two PoEs
and two IDU-Cs or IDU-Es.

Using RADWIN Manager to Set up a Ring

Creating a Ring using RADWIN Manager requires two stages:
6. Set up each participating link separately, in the usual way
7. For each link, run the Configuration wizard to define it as RPL or
a Ring Link

• The Ring uses a VLAN ID for the RPL. It is used to manage the Ring
and nothing else; it is completely separate from the management
and traffic VLANs referred to elsewhere
Note • A regular Ring Link may be a member of up to four rings and each of
their RPL VLAN IDs must be configured

Here then, is step 2 in more detail:

¾ To integrate a link into an Ethernet Ring:

1. Using either the Installation or Configuration wizards, navigate to the
Services window and chose the Ring tab.

Figure 13-5: Services window with Ring selected

2. Click Configure. The Ring definition window is displayed. The default is
Independent Link and is used when the link is not part of any Ring.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-7

Using RADWIN Manager to Set up a Ring Chapter 13

Figure 13-6: Ring Options

3. To configure the link as a regular Rink link, click Rink Link (Non- RPL)
and enter the ring LAN VIDs (at least one) to which it belongs and click
OK:

Figure 13-7: Configuring Ring LAN VIDs

4. To configure the link as RPL, click Ring Protection Link (RPL) and
enter its Ring VID.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-8

Using RADWIN Manager to Set up a Ring Chapter 13

Figure 13-8: Configuring RPL VIDs

5. Enter the minimum times for failure detection and recovery.
For dual-homed configurations, where part of the ring goes through the
core, if a core segment fails, the core should be allowed to recover
before the RPL enters Protection State. Otherwise, it could happen that
both the core and the RADWIN ring will switch in parallel. You should
therefore, configure a Minimum time for failure detection high
enough to take this possibility into account.
The Minimum time for recovery is a delay switch to prevent rapid
“on-off” fluctuations. It functions like a delay switch use to protect elec-
trical devices from rapid “on-off” power fluctuations, which in this con-
text, may lead to potential short term loops .
6. Click OK to accept your settings.
The RPL will be clearly indicated in the RADWIN Manager. In the Link
status area on the top left, you will see an Ethernet (Blocked) notice:

A Link-Idle message is displayed on the Ethernet Services Bar:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-9

Using RADWIN Manager to Set up a Ring Chapter 13

When the RPL cuts in as a result of a failure, the “Ethernet (Blocked)”

notice disappears. The Ethernet Services Bar indicated that the RPL is
active:

Upon restoration of the broken link, the RPL returns to idle status with
the appropriate indications on the RADWIN Manager main window.
On the status bar for all ring member links, you will see the ring mem-
bership indicator icon:

• Do not configure more than one RPL. If you do, you will break the
Ring
• If you forget to configure one RPL in a Ring, you will introduce a loop
Caution into your network

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 13-10

 Chapter 14

VLAN Functionality with

RADWIN 2000
VLAN Tagging - Overview

VLAN Terminology
Both the technical literature and the RADWIN Manager use the terms VLAN
ID and VID interchangeably to denote a VLAN identification number.

VLAN Background Information on the WEB

The standards defining VLAN Tagging are IEEE_802.1Q and extensions.
For general background about VLAN see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
IEEE_802.1Q.
Background information about Double Tagging also known as QinQ may
be found here: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/802.1QinQ.

VLAN Tagging
VLAN tagging enables multiple bridged networks to transparently share the
same physical network link without leakage of information between net-
works:

Figure 14-1: Two network using the same link with tagging

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-1

QinQ (Double Tagging) for Service Providers Chapter 14

IEEE 802.1Q is used as the encapsulation protocol to implement this mech-

anism over Ethernet networks.

QinQ (Double Tagging) for Service Providers

QinQ is useful for Service Providers, allowing them to use VLANs internally
in their “transport network” while mixing Ethernet traffic from clients that
are already VLAN-tagged.

Figure 14-2: Separating client data streams using double tagging

The outer tag (representing the Provider VLAN) comes first, followed by the
inner tag. In QinQ the EtherType = 0x9100. VLAN tags may be stacked
three or more deep.
When using this type of “Provider Tagging” you should keep the following in
mind:
• Under Provider Tagging, the system double-tags egress frames
towards the Provider’s network. The system adds a tag with a VLAN
ID and EtherType = 0x9100 to all frames, as configured by the ser-
vice provider (Provider VLAN ID).
• The system always adds to each frame, tags with VLAN ID and
EtherType = 0x9100. Therefore,
• For a frame without a tag – the system will add a tag with
VLAN ID and EtherType = 0x9100 so the frame will have one
tag
• For a frame with a VLAN tag – the system will add a tag with
VLAN ID and EtherType = 0x9100 so the frame will be double-
tagged
• For a frame with a VLAN tag and a provider tag – the system
will add a tag with VLAN ID and EtherType = 0x9100 so the
frame will be triple-tagged and so on

VLAN Untagging
VLAN Untagging means the removal of a VLAN or a Provider tag.

Port Functionality
The VLAN functionality is supported by all LAN and SFP ports in the IDU.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-2

Port Functionality Chapter 14

Each port can be configured how to handle Ethernet frames at the ingress
direction (where frames enter the IDU) and at the egress direction (where
frame exit the IDU).
The configuration is independent at each port.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-3

Port Functionality Chapter 14

Ingress Direction
Table 14-1: Port settings - Ingress direction
Transparent The port ‘does nothing’ with regard to VLANs - inbound frames are left untouched.

Frames entering the port without VLAN or QinQ tagging are tagged with VLAN ID and Prioritya, which
are pre-configured by the user. Frames which are already tagged at ingress are not modified.

Tag

a. Priority Code Point (PCP) which refers to the IEEE 802.1p priority. It indicates the frame priority
level from 0 (lowest) to 7 (highest), which can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic
(voice, video, data, etc).

Egress Direction
Table 14-2: Port settings - Egress direction
Transparent The port ‘does nothing’ with regard to VLANs - outbound frames are left untouched.

All frames are untagged.

Untag all

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-4

Port Functionality Chapter 14

Table 14-2: Port settings - Egress direction (Continued)

Untags only frames tagged with one of the user defined VIDs. You can define up to eight VIDs per
port. Other frames are not modified.

Untag selected
VIDs

This setting allows for mutial filtering of multiple ingrees tags not relevant at the egress end:

Filtered VLAN
IDs at egress

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-5

VLAN Availability Chapter 14

Table 14-2: Port settings - Egress direction (Continued)

With Provider tagging, the system double-tags egress frames towards the provider’s network. All
frames are tagged QinQ with a VLAN ID, which is configured by the service provider (Provider VLAN
ID).

Provider With this setting, ingress frames which are not tagged with the configured Provider VLAN ID are
tagging blocked (filtered).

Note: Each port can be configured independently to a tagging mode. However, only a single Provider
VLAN ID can be defined per IDU.

This setting functions like Provider tagging. However, all ingress frames are passed through.

Provider
tagging without
filter

VLAN Availability
VLAN is available for links using either WinLink 1000 or RADWIN 2000
radios. VLAN support requires the use of IDU-Cs or new style IDU-Es.

VLAN Configuration Using the RADWIN Manager

VLAN IDs are used by RADWIN products in three separate contexts:
Management VLAN, Traffic VLAN and Ethernet Ring. It is recommended that
Caution you use different VLAN IDs for each context.

If you are not a VLAN expert, please be aware that incorrect VLAN
configuration may cause havoc on your network. The facilities described
below are offered as a service to enable you to get best value from your
RADWIN 2000 links and are provided “as is”. Under no circumstances does
Disclaimer RADWIN accept responsibility for network system or financial damages
arising from incorrect use of these VLAN facilities.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-6

Management Traffic and Ethernet Service Separation Chapter 14

Management Traffic and Ethernet Service Separation

You can define a VLAN ID for management traffic separation. You should
configure the system to prevent conflicts as detailed below.
When configured for the default operational mode, a “Provider port” will
handle ingress traffic as follows:
• Filters frames that are not tagged with the Provider VLAN ID
• Removes the Provider double tag
Therefore, if a port is configured for management traffic separation by VLAN
and as ‘Provider port’, then the received management frames must be dou-
ble tagged as follows:
• The outer tag has to be the Provider’s tag (so the frame is not fil-
tered)
• The internal tag has to be management VLAN ID
To avoid mix-ups, best practice is to:
• Separate the management and data ports
• Define only a data port with Provider function
All IDU-C and new style IDU-E models have two LAN ports so you can easily
separate management and Ethernet service.

VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service: Configuration

VLAN Configuration is carried out per site. It is up to you to ensure consis-
tency between the link sites. The discussion below is based on Site A how-
ever, it also applies to Site B.
To set up VLAN tagging for Ethernet service, enter Site Configuration for
Site A, choose the Ethernet tab and click the VLAN Configuration... but-
ton (Figure 8-15). The following window is displayed:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-7

VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service: Configuration Chapter 14

Figure 14-3: VLAN tag settings

If you are using a new style IDU-E, the SFP row will not appear.
Note

The choices for Ingress Mode are -

Figure 14-4: VLAN: Ingress modes

The two choices correspond respectively to the two rows of Table 14-1.
Choosing Tag causes the VLAN ID and VLAN Priority fields to become avail-
able:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-8

VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service: Configuration Chapter 14

Figure 14-5: VLAN: Ingress mode - setting VLAN ID and Priority

Throughout this chapter, all VLAN IDs must be between 1 and 4094,
inclusive. All VLAN priorities must be between 0 and 6, inclusive. The values
entered are range-checked. If for example, you enter a VLAN ID of 4095,
Note then 4094 will be reflected back.

The choices for Egress Mode are -

Figure 14-6: VLAN: Egress modes

The five non-transpatarent choices correspond respectively to the five rows
of Table 14-2 in the order, row 1, 2, 4, 5, 3.
The first two choices, Transparent and Untag all require no further
action.
Untag selected VIDs causes the eight VLAN ID fields to become avail-
able:

Figure 14-7: Untagging selected VIDs

You may nominate up to eight VIDs for untagging; beyond simple range
checking, there is no other validation.
Both Provider tagging and Provider tagging without filter enable the
Provider parameters fields:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-9

VLAN Tagging for Ethernet Service: Configuration Chapter 14

Figure 14-8: Provider parameters

There is of course only one Provider VLAN ID. It is most likely yours, as the
Provider!
Filtered VLAN IDs enables you to filter and block only frames tagged with
one of the user defined VIDs. You can define up to eight VIDs per port.
Other frames are not modified and are forwarded transparently.
When you are finished, remember to click OK (Figure 14-3) to save your
entries.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 14-10

 Chapter 15

Software Upgrade
What is the Software Upgrade Utility?
The RADWIN Manager provides a Software Upgrade Utility (SWU) to
upgrade the software (firmware) of installed ODUs in a network. The
update files may be located anywhere accessible by the operator.
The SWU provides for:
• Prior backup of the current files prior to upgrade
• Upgrade from a list
• Delayed upgrade
• Various ODU reset options
The default location of the software files is in the installation area, and can
be used to restore factory defaults.

The following procedure is generic to all RADWIN radio and GSU products.
Note

Upgrading an Installed Link

¾ To upgrade software for a link:
1. In the RADWIN Manager main menu, click Tools | Software Upgrade
... The following detached window appears

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 15-1

Upgrading an Installed Link Chapter 15

Figure 15-1: Software Upgrade Utility - Main window

The default sites shown in the Software Upgrade list panel belong to the
currently link. The list may be empty if you are running the RADWIN
Manager “offline”.

What follows about adding sites manually or from a list file, assumes that all
sites to be upgraded are of the same type - either WinLink 1000 or RADWIN
Warning 2000. but not both. This will not work with a mixed list.

2. Click Add Site to add additional sites for upgrade.

Figure 15-2: Add site options

Click Add Single Site for one site only:

Figure 15-3: Adding a single site for upgrade

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 15-2

Upgrading an Installed Link Chapter 15

Enter the IP address of the site, the Community strings (Default: public
and netman, respectively) and then click OK. The site will appear in the
Software Upgrade list box. For example if we add the site at IP address
192.168.2.101, the SWU main window of Figure 15-1 looks like this:

Figure 15-4: Single site added for upgrade

The list can be cleared using the Clear All button.
As an alternative to adding sites one at a time, you can add sites from a
prepared list using the Add from File option in Figure 15-2. The list
has the following format:
<IP address>,<Read-Only community>,<Read-Write community>

Here is an example:
192.168.1.101,public,netman
192.168.1.102,public,netman
192.168.2.101,public,netman
192.168.2.102,public,netman
3. Having created an update list, click Upgrade Package to chose the rel-
evant files. The default files are located in the SWU subdirectory in the
RADWIN Manager installation area. They are currently named
SWU_1k.swu and SWU_2k.swu. You may have to find them else-
where, depending on your system.
4. You make limited changes to the list by right-clicking any line:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 15-3

Upgrading an Installed Link Chapter 15

Figure 15-5: Software Upgrade site options

5. To back up your existing system, check Backup device software

check-box. Then click the button for a standard file dialog. The
default location is the My Documents directory on the managing com-
puter or the last backup directory you used.

The backup here is the same as that in page 8-32, and serves the same
purpose. It provides a fallback if the upgrade proves problematic.
Note

6. In addition to the previous step, you may opt to perform a delayed

upgrade. Check the Delayed Upgrade box, and enter the date and time
for the delayed upgrade.
7. The radio buttons on the right determines how your sites should be reset.
Bear in mind that on the one hand, a reset involves a service interrup-
tion, but on the other hand, the software upgrade will not become effec-
tive until after the reset is carried out.
8. Click Start Upgrade to commence the process. For an immediate
upgrade you will be able to observe the upgrade progress from the green
progress bars:

Figure 15-6: Software upgrade in progress - Note the stop button

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 15-4

Software Update for GSUs Chapter 15

Figure 15-7: Software upgrade completed successfully

9. Click Close to exit.
10. If you requested a delayed upgrade, a notice like this will appear in the
SWU title bar:

If one or both sites fail to update, a warning notice will be displayed.

If one site of a link updates but the other fails, you should correct the
problem and update the second site as soon as possible. If you do not,
Caution following the next reset of the updated site, you could experience a link
software mismatch which may affect service. See page 9-3 for details.

Software Update for GSUs

All GSUs in a distributed site can be updated simultaneously. Use an IP list
as described above.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 15-5

 Chapter 16

FCC/IC DFS Installation

Procedure
FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Links: Background
The FCC/IC regulation for 5.4/5.3 GHz allows unlicensed wireless data
equipment, provided that it does not interrupt radar services. If radar activ-
ity is detected, the equipment must automatically change frequency chan-
nel. This feature is termed Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). According
to the standard, a channel with active radar is prohibited from use for 30
minutes. Before using a channel for transmission, the radio equipment must
probe it for radar signals for a period of 60 seconds.
RADWIN radio products support DFS as well as ACS.
An immediate consequence of the FCC/IC regulation for 5.4/5.3 GHz is that
the standard method of link installation using a single default fixed installa-
tion channel, cannot be used.
Instead of the installation procedure of Chapter 5, a link activation
method is used.
The ODUs are either supplied from the factory ready for use at 5.4 GHz or
5.3 GHz FCC/IC or alternatively, they can be set up for these bands using
the RADWIN Manager.

The following procedure is generic to all relevant RADWIN radio products.

What you see on your running RADWIN Manager may differ in some details
Note from the screen captures used to illustrate this chapter.

FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation

¾ To Activate a FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link:
1. Install RADWIN Manager software as usual.
2. Connect the PC to the IDU-ODU pair to be used as the local site.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 16-1

FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation Chapter 16

3. Run the RADWIN Manager and log in as Installer. You will see the follow-
ing window:

Figure 16-1: Activating an ODU - Inactive link

When the Manager Main Screen is displayed it appears with the Link Sta-
tus label red and showing Inactive.
4. Click Site:Location | Air Interface for the logged in site.
5. The Air Interface dialog box opens:

Figure 16-2: Air Interface dialog box

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 16-2

FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Activation Chapter 16

6. Enter the Link ID and note it for use with the second site of the link.
7. Check the Master radio button.
8. Click OK. The following window appears:

Figure 16-3: The local ODU after activation - Probing

Notice that the Link ID is shown in the Link details pane (circled).
9. Repeat the above procedure for the remote ODU, ensuring that in the Air
Interface window, that you enter exactly the same Link ID, but this time
that you check the Slave radio button.
If both ODUs are powered up, after a minute or so a link will be estab-
lished. If you are still connected to the remote site (from the previous
steps), the window of Figure 16-3 will look like this:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 16-3

FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration Chapter 16

Figure 16-4: Both sites activated and awaiting configuration

FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration

The Configuration procedure may be carried out from either site using the
Configuration wizard as shown in Chapter 7.

Both sites in a FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link must be configured

identically.
Note

The only difference is in the Channel Settings window:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 16-4

FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration Chapter 16

Figure 16-5: Channel Select dialog box - ACS permanently enabled

ACS cannot be disabled.

Note

Upon completion of the wizard, the Site configuration dialogs can be used in
the usual way. Once operational, the RADWIN Manager window is the same
as for other radio equipment models.
Here is the RADWIN Manager main window upon completion of the wizard:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 16-5

FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz Link Configuration Chapter 16

Figure 16-6: FCC/IC 5.4/5.3 GHz operational

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 16-6

RADWIN 2000

Broadband Wireless Transmission System

USER MANUAL

RELEASE 2.5.00

Part 4: Field Installation

Topics
UM 2000-2500/09.10
 Chapter 17

Pole and Wall Installation

ODU Mounting Kit Contents
Table 17-1: Bill of Materials: ODU mounting kit
Item Qty

Large Clamp (see Figure 17-1) 1

Small Clamp (see Figure 17-2) 1

Arm (see Figure 17-3) 1

Screw hex head M8x40 4

Screw hex head M8x70 2

Washer flat M8 4

Washer spring M8 3

M8 Nuts 2

Figure 17-1: Large Clamp Figure 17-2: Small Clamp Figure 17-3: Arm

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 17-1

Mounting an ODU on a Pole Chapter 17

Mounting an ODU on a Pole

Figure 17-4: Mounting on a pole

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 17-2

Mounting an ODU on a Wall Chapter 17

Mounting an ODU on a Wall

Figure 17-5: Mounting on a Wall

Mounting an External Antenna

Optional external antennas can be mounted on a pole. The external mount-
ing kit varies according to the specific antenna model.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 17-3

Mounting a Connectorized ODU Horizontally Chapter 17

Mounting a Connectorized ODU Horizontally

What follows applies to both WinLink 1000 and RADWIN 2000 with obvious
differences.
An ODU may be mounted horizontally as shown in Figure 17-6.

¾ To mount an ODU horizontally, observe the following cautions:

1. To ensure your warranty rights for horizontally installed ODUs, make sure
that the four ports ANT1, ANT2, HSS and ODU are firmly secured or
moisture sealed with the supplied caps.
2. Further, ensure that cables are connected using a “water nose” as shown
in Figure 17-6.

Figure 17-6: Mounted ODUs with correct “water nose”

Do not do this:

Figure 17-7: Incorrectly mounted ODU (No “water nose”)

3. If you attach an external PoE device close to the ODU, the same consid-
erations apply.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 17-4

 Chapter 18

Lightning Protection and

Grounding Guidelines
Meticulous implementation of the guidelines in this chapter will provide best
protection against electric shock and lightning.

100% protection is neither implied nor possible.

Warning

This chapter is at best a guide. The actual degree of lightning protection

required depends on local conditions and regulations.
Note
The RADWIN Lightning Protection System consists of the following compo-
nents:
• Grounding for the antenna coax cable
• Grounding for each IDU and ODU
• External Primary Surge Suppressor units and grounding for the out-
door cable
• Internal ESD protection circuits over the Power/Telecom lines

Grounding for Antenna Cable

A Grounding Kit must be connected to the coax antenna cable and reliably
grounded. The grounding kit is an Andrew Type 223158-2
(www.andrew.com). See Figure 18-1 below.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 18-1

Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units Chapter 18

Figure 18-1: Grounding antenna cables

Grounding for Indoor/Outdoor Units

ODU Grounding
RADWIN Lightning Protection System uses a Shielded CAT-5e cable to inter-
connect the Outdoor (ODU) and Indoor (IDU) units.
However, this shielding does not provide a good lightning discharge path,
since it can not tolerate the high Lightning Current surges.
To provide an alternate Lightning Discharge path, the ODU and antenna
grounding posts should be connected to ground point by a 10 AWG short
copper wire.
The device should be permanently connected to ground.

IDU Grounding
The IDU’s grounding post should be connected to the internal ground point,
using a grounding wire of at least 10 AWG. The grounding wire should be
connected to a grounding rod or the building grounding system.
The device should be permanently connected to ground.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 18-2

External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Chapter 18

External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding

A Grounding Kit and Surge Arrestor Unit must be located near the ODU and
properly grounded as illustrated in Figures 18-2 and 18-3 below:

Figure 18-2: Grounding a typical pole installation

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 18-3

External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Chapter 18

Figure 18-3: Grounding a typical wall installation

The next figure shows a close-up of the rear of grounded ODU:

Figure 18-4: ODU Surge Suppressor and grounding

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 18-4

External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Chapter 18

The Transtector protection circuits shown in Figure 18-5 below, utilize sili-
con avalanche diode technology. The unit consists of an outdoor rated
NEMA 3R type enclosure with easy mounting flanges, ground stud attach-
ment and easy wiring.
The ALPU-POE features RJ-45 protection circuits for the ODU-IDU data pairs
(pins 1,2 & 3,6) and DC power (pins 4,5 & 6,7 with the pairs bonded).
The unit is designed to be wall mounted. An optional set of bracket is avail-
able to allow a wide range of pole mount applications. A dedicated ground
stud is provided inside the unit that must be bonded to the nearest ground-
ing system (or Master Ground bar) for proper surge protection.
The system wiring is installed with RJ-45 type connectors that can feed
directly into the chassis without having to cut, splice or route through awk-
ward strain relief holes.

Figure 18-5: Transtector’s Surge Suppressor

¾ To mount the lightning protection devices:

1. Mount the device as close to the ODU as possible. Mount the unit so that
the cable connectors are at the bottom (to prevent water from penetrat-
ing), with the strain reliefs facing the ground.
2. Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit.
3. Mount the unit to an outside surface using the two mounting holes.
4. Connect the ODU-IDU cable using the RJ-45 jack.
5. Connect one cable between the ODU and the suppressor using an RJ-45
jack.
6. Connect the suppressor’s ground stud to a grounding point. Use the
appropriate wire gauge and type, keeping the wire as short as possible,
less than 1m (3’), between the stud and the site grounding point.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 18-5

External Lightning Surge Suppressors and Grounding Chapter 18

7. Replace the cover.

There may also be regulatory requirements to cross bond the ODU-IDU CAT-
5e cable at regular intervals up the mast. This may be as frequent as every
Note 10 meters (33 feet).

A second Surge Arrestor Unit should be mounted at the building entry point
and must be grounded, as shown in Figure 18-3 above.

¾ To mount the lightning protection at the building entry point:

1. Mount the device outside the building, located as near as possible to the
entrance of the CAT-5e ODU-IDU cable. Mount the unit so that the cable
connectors are at the bottom (to prevent water from penetrating), with
the strain reliefs facing the ground.
2. Remove the cover by unscrewing the front of the unit.
3. Mount the unit to an outside surface using the two mounting holes.
4. Connect the ODU-IDU cable using the RJ-45 jack.
5. Connect one cable between the IDU and the suppressor using an RJ-45
jack.
6. Connect the suppressor’s ground stud to a grounding point. Use the
appropriate wire gauge and type, keeping the wire as short as possible,
less than 1m (3’), between the stud and the site grounding point.
7. Replace the cover

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 18-6

Internal ESD Protection circuits Chapter 18

Figure 18-6: Surge Suppressor and grounding at building entry point

Internal ESD Protection circuits

RADWIN equipment is designed to meet the ETSI/FCC/Aus/NZ/CSA EMC
and Safety requirements. To fulfill these requirements, the system's Tele-
com lines at the ODU/IDU are Transformer-isolated and include internal ESD
(Electro-Static-Discharge) Protection circuits.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 18-7

 Chapter 19

Preloading an ODU with

an IP Address
Why this is Needed?
All ODUs supplied by RADWIN come pre-configured with an IP address of
10.0.0.120. For use in a network, the ODUs must be configured with suit-
able static IP addresses. The method for doing this under office conditions
is set out in Chapter 5.
There are two situations under which ODUs may need to be pre-loaded with
an IP address prior to installation to a link:
• Changing an individual ODU in the field
• Preparing a large number of ODUs in a warehouse prior to deploy-
ment in the field, according to a network installation plan.
This chapter explains how do this.

Required Equipment
The minimal equipment required to pre-load an ODU with an IP address is:
• Laptop computer (managing computer) satisfying the requirements
of Table 4-1
• An installed copy of the RADWIN Manager
• A PoE device
• A crossed Ethernet LAN cable
• An IDU-ODU cable
• If you have connectorized ODUs, two N-type RF terminators

Do not carry out this procedure using a multi homed managing computer
also connected to a network. It will flood the network with broadcast
packets. Further, it will throw any other links on the network into Installation
Caution mode.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 19-1

The procedure Chapter 19

The procedure
The following procedure is generic to all RADWIN radio products. What you
see on your running RADWIN Manager may differ in some details from the
Note screen captures used to illustrate this chapter.

¾ To Preolad an ODU with an IP address:

1. Using the IDU-ODU cable, connect the PoE device to the ODU, ensuring
that the cable is plugged into the PoE port marked P-LAN-OUT.
2. For connectorized ODUs, screw the RF terminators into the two antenna
ports.

A powered up ODU emits RF radiation from the antenna port (or connected
antenna). When working with a powered up connectorized ODU, always use
RF terminators.
Warning For an ODU with an integrated antenna, ensure that the antenna is always
directed away from other people.

3. Connect the Poe device to AC power.

4. Using a crossed LAN cable, connect the LAN-IN port of the PoE device to
the Ethernet port of the managing computer. The ODU will commence
beeping at about once per second, indicating correct operation.
5. Launch the RADWIN Manager.
6. At the log on window, choose Local Connection.

Figure 19-1: Log on Window for Local Connection

7. Enter the default password, admin. After a few moments, the RADWIN
Manager main window appears:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 19-2

The procedure Chapter 19

Figure 19-2: Opening RADWIN Manager window prior to installation

8. Click the un-grayed Site:Location button. The following dialog window
appears:

Figure 19-3: Configuration Dialog Box

9. Click the Management item in the left hand panel. The following win-
dow is presented:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 19-3

The procedure Chapter 19

Figure 19-4: Management Addresses - Site Configuration dialog box

10. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway as requested.
For example, the ODU used here is to be configured as follows:

Figure 19-5: ODU with IP Addressing configured

11. Click OK. You are asked to confirm the change:

Figure 19-6: Confirmation of IP Address change

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 19-4

The procedure Chapter 19

12. Click Yes to accept the change. After about half a minute the changes
will be registered in the ODU. On the left hand panel of the main win-
dow, you will see the new IP configuration for the ODU.

Figure 19-7: Main Window after IP Address change

Some additional things you may want to do now:

• Go to Site Installation | Air Interface. You can enter a Link ID

and change the Installation Frequency and Channel Bandwidth.
Note • If you log on as Installer, you can change the default band (Chapter
20).

13. Click Cancel to leave the open Management dialog. You may now exit
the RADWIN Manager, or connect to another ODU. If you choose to con-
nect to another ODU, after about a minute, the main window of the RAD-
WIN Manager will revert to that shown in Figure 19-2 above. In any
event, power down the changed ODU; your changes will take effect
when you power it up again.

Don’t forget to remove the RF terminators from a connectorized ODU after

powering it down.
Note

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 19-5

Tip: How to Recover a Forgotten ODU IP Address Chapter 19

Tip: How to Recover a Forgotten ODU IP Address

If you have an ODU with lost or forgotten IP address, use the above proce-
dure to log on to it using Local Connection. The IP address will appear in
the left hand status area:

Figure 19-8: Existing IP address displayed after log-on with Local Connec-
tion

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 19-6

 Chapter 20

Changing the Factory

Default Band
Why this is Needed
All ODUs supplied by RADWIN come with pre-configured with a factory
default product-dependent band according to the ODU part number.
For ODUs supporting Multi-band, it may be changed using the procedure in
this chapter. The procedure is generic, applying to all ODUs with the Multi-
band feature.

• If for some reason the default band needs to be changed, it should

be done before link installation.
Caution • Use of an incorrect band may be in violation of local regulations.

Required Equipment
The minimal equipment required to change an ODU default band is:
• Laptop computer (managing computer) satisfying the requirements
of Table 4-1.
• An installed copy of the RADWIN Manager
• A PoE device
• A crossed Ethernet LAN cable
• An IDU-ODU cable

The procedure
The following procedure is generic to all relevant RADWIN radio products.
What you see on your running RADWIN Manager may differ in some details
Note from the screen captures used to illustrate this chapter.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 20-1

The procedure Chapter 20

¾ To change the factory default band:

1. Using the IDU-ODU cable, connect the PoE device to the ODU, ensuring
that the cable is plugged into the PoE port marked P-LAN-OUT.
2. Connect the Poe device to AC power.
3. Using a crossed LAN cable, connect the LAN-IN port of the PoE device to
the Ethernet port of the managing computer. The ODU will commence
beeping at about once per second, indicating correct operation.
4. Launch the RADWIN Manager.
5. Log on as Installer.

Figure 20-1: Becoming Installer

6. Enter the default password, wireless. After a few moments, the RAD-
WIN Manager main window appears:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 20-2

The procedure Chapter 20

Figure 20-2: Opening RADWIN Manager window prior to band change

(default circled)
7. Click Tools | Change Band. The following window appears:

Figure 20-3: Change Band dialog

The bands appearing in Figure 20-3 are product dependent. To see which
bands are available for your product, check your product Inventory (see
Note Figure 8-8) and then consult RADWIN Customer Support.

8. Click the band required:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 20-3

The procedure Chapter 20

Figure 20-4: A different band selected

9. The Change Band warning is displayed. Click Yes to continue.

Figure 20-5: Change Band confirmation

The change, which may take some time, is carried out:

The result is reflected in the RADWIN Manager main window:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 20-4

Changing Band for DFS Chapter 20

Figure 20-6: Main Window after band change - new band circled

If you carry out this operation on a link, the band is effective on both sites
and you are placed in installation mode.
Note

Changing Band for DFS

Changing to a DFS band is similar to the foregoing procedure.
As soon as you establish a link using a DFS band, you are offered Configura-
tion only in the main menu. Installation mode is disabled.

Special Products or Features: Entering a License Key

If you go to the Operations window as Installer (Figure 20-7), you will see
a provision for entering a license key. Should you ever require such a key,
the procedure is as follows:

¾ To enter a License key:

1. Log on as Installer (as for the previous procedure).
2. Click the Site:Location tool bar button from the main tool bar.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 20-5

Special Products or Features: Entering a License Key Chapter 20

Figure 20-7: Using the Operations window to enter a license key

3. Enter your license key and click Activate.
4. When it is accepted, click Cancel.

License keys, where appropriate, are obtainable from RADWIN Customer

Support.
Note
iiiiiii

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 20-6

 Chapter 21

Link Budget Calculator

Overview
The Link Budget Calculator is a utility for calculating the expected perfor-
mance of the RADWIN 2000 wireless link and the possible configurations for
a specific link range.
The utility allows you to calculate the expected RSS of the link, and find the
type of services and their effective throughput as a function of the link
range and deployment conditions.

User Input
You are required to enter or choose the following parameters. Depending
on the product, some of the parameters have a default value that cannot be
changed.
• Band, which determines frequency and regulation
• Channel Bandwidth
• Tx Power (maximum Tx power per modulation is validated)
• Antenna Type (cannot be changed for ODU with integrated antenna)
• Antenna Gain per site (cannot be changed for integrated antenna)
• Cable Loss per site (cannot be changed for integrated antenna)
• Required Fade Margin
• Rate (and Adaptive check box)
• Service Type
• Required Range

Link Budget Calculator Internal Data

For each product (or Regulation and Band) the calculator stores the follow-
ing data required for link budget calculations:
• Maximum Transmit power (per modulation)
• Receiver Sensitivity (per modulation) for Ethernet service and for
TDM services at various BER
• Maximum linear input power (used to calculate minimum distance)

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-1

Calculations Chapter 21

• Antenna gain and cable loss for ODU with integrated antenna
• Available Channel Bandwidths

Calculations

EIRP
EIRP = TxPower + AntennaGain SiteA – CableLoss SiteA

Expected RSS and Fade Margin

ExpectedRSS = EIRP – PathLoss + AntennaGain SiteB – CableLoss SiteB

where:
Site A is the transmitting site
Site B is the receiving site
PathLoss is calculated according to the free space model,

PathLoss = 32.45 + 20 × log 10( frequency MHz ) + 20 × log 10( RequiredRange Km )

ExpectedFadeM arg in = ExpectedRSS – Sensitivity

where Sensitivity is dependent on air-rate.

Min and Max Range

MinRange is the shortest range for which
ExpectedRSS ≤ MaxInputPower per air-rate.
MaxRange (with Adaptive checked) is the largest range for which
ExpectedRSS ≥ Sensitivity , at the highest air-rate for which this relation-
ship is true. In a link with adaptive rate this will be the actual behavior.
MaxRange (for a given air-rate) is the largest range for which
ExpectedRSS ≥ Sensitivity + RequiredFadeM arg in .

Service
The Ethernet and configured TDM trunks throughput is calculated according
to internal product algorithms.

Availability
The Service Availability calculation is based on the Vigants Barnett method
which predicts the downtime probability based on a climate factor (C fac-
tor).

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-2

Antenna Height Chapter 21

Availability
–7 3
= 1 – 6 × 10 × Cfactor × frequency GHz × ( RequiredRangeKM )
–------------------------------------------------------------
ExpectedFadeM arg in
10
× 10

Antenna Height
The recommended antenna height required for line of sight is calculated as
the sum the Fresnel zone height and the boresight height. See About the
Fresnel Zone below. Using the notation of Figure 21-1 below, splitting
ExpectedRange into d1 + d2, the Fresnel zone height at distance d1 from
the left hand antenna, is given by

300
----------------------------------- × d1 × d2
frequency GHz
0.6 × -----------------------------------------------------------
d1 + d2

For the most conservative setting, we take the mid-point between the
ExpectedRange
antennas, setting d 1 = d 2 = -----------------------------------------
2

300 2
----------------------------------- × ExpectedRange
-----------------------------------------
frequency GHz 2
which gives 0.6 × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
ExpectedRange ExpectedRange
----------------------------------------- + -----------------------------------------
2 2

ExpectedRange
simplifying to 0.52 × ----------------------------------------- .
frequency GHz

The boresight clearance height is calculated

2 ExpectedRange 2
as: R Mean + ----------------------------------------- – R Mean
2

where R Mean = 6367.4425Km .

About the Fresnel Zone

The Fresnel zone (pronounced "frA-nel", with a silent “s”) is an elliptically
shaped conical zone of electromagnetic energy that propagates from the
transmitting antenna to the receiving antenna. It is always widest in the
middle of the path between the two antennas.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-3

About the Fresnel Zone Chapter 21

Figure 21-1: Fresnel zone

Fresnel loss is the path loss occurring from multi-path reflections from
reflective surfaces such as water, and intervening obstacles such as build-
ings or mountain peaks within the Fresnel zone.
Radio links should be designed to accommodate obstructions and atmo-
spheric conditions, weather conditions, large bodies of water, and other
reflectors and absorbers of electromagnetic energy.
The Fresnel zone provides us with a way to calculate the amount of clear-
ance that a wireless wave needs from an obstacle to ensure that the obsta-
cle does not attenuate the signal.
There are infinitely many Fresnel zones located coaxially around the center
of the direct wave. The outer boundary of the first Fresnel zone is defined
as the combined path length of all paths, which are half wavelength (1/2 λ)
of the frequency transmitted longer than the direct path. If the total path
distance is one wavelength (1 λ) longer than the direct path, then the outer
boundary is said to be two Fresnel zones. Odd number Fresnel zones rein-
force the direct wave path signal; even number Fresnel zones cancel the
direct wave path signal.
The amount of the Fresnel zone clearance is determined by the wavelength
of the signal, the path length, and the distance to the obstacle. For reliabil-
ity, point-to-point links are designed to have at least 60% of the first Fresnel
zone clear to avoid significant attenuation.
The concept of the Fresnel zone is shown in Figure 21-1 above. The top of
the obstruction does not extend far into the Fresnel zone, leaving 60% of
the Fresnel zone clear; therefore, the signal is not significantly attenuated.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-4

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

For more about Fresnel zone, see http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/

Fresnel_zone.

Running the Link Budget Calculator

The Link Budget Calculator is supplied on the RADWIN Manager CD. It may
be run stand-alone from the CD or from the RADWIN Manager application.

¾ To run the Link Budget Calculator from the CD:

1. Insert the RADWIN Manager CD into the drive on the managing com-
puter. In the window which opens, click the Link Budget Calculator
option.
2. If the CD autorun application does not start by itself, then point your
browser to
Z:\RADWIN\Setup\DATA\Link Budget Calculator.htm
where Z should be replaced with your own CD drive name.

¾ To run the Link Budget Calculator from the RADWIN Manager:

• Choose Help | Link Budget Calculator from the main menu of the
RADWIN Manager as in the following figure:

Figure 21-2: Accessing the Link Budget Calculator

However invoked, your browser displays the following page:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-5

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

Figure 21-3: Link Budget window

• Microsoft Internet Explorer users may see a warning message like

this:

Note

• Click the yellow bar and follow the instructions to allow blocked con-
tent.

¾ To use the Link Budget Calculator for RADWIN 2000:

1. Choose a band from the drop-down list.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-6

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

Figure 21-4: Band selector

2. Chose the relevant RADWIN 2000 series.

Figure 21-5: RADWIN 2000 series selector

3. Choose the Channel Bandwidth.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-7

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

Figure 21-6: RADWIN 2000 Channel Bandwidth selector

4. For a collocated link choose the RFP. Use the Help button to the right of
the RFP selection box for help:

Figure 21-7: RFP Selector

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-8

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

Figure 21-8: RFP Selection Guide

For collocated RADWIN 2000 products, you may only use RFP B or E.
5. Enter the radio details. Note that Rate is chosen from a drop-down list:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-9

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

Figure 21-9: Rate selector

If you choose Adaptive Rate, then the Rate list is unavailable as is the
Climate factor list. Both of these quantities are calculated.
Note

The Rate shown, defines the air-interface rate in Mbps. The system
operates in TDD mode and has the overhead of the air-interface pro-
toco.l Thus, the Ethernet actual throughput is provided by the Ethernet
Rate.

For a given air-rate, Ethernet throughput will decrease with increasing range
due to propagation delay.
Note

The Fade margin is the minimum required for line-o- sight (LOS) condi-
tions. For degraded link conditions, a larger Fade margin should be used.
The EIRP is given in dBm and Watts.
6. If the required range between the two link sites is known, you may enter
it directly. Alternatively, you may enter the latitude and longitude of each
site in the link, in which case the distance between them will be calcu-
lated and displayed.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-10

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

Figure 21-10: Calculation of distance from site coordinates

For example, if you enter the following coordinates and press Set,

the range will be calculated and displayed:

If for example, we enter:

Site A: 41.1°N lat 74.2°W Long
Site B: 40.8°N lat 74.0°W Long

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-11

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

7. Click Set. The distance and link budget is calculated.

8. Located to the right of the green Coordinates button is a drop-down list
of Climactic C Factor values. It is only available if you choose a non-adap-
tive rate.

Figure 21-11: Climactic C Factors

For help about what these mean, click the ? button to the right of the list
in Figure 21-11.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-12

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

Figure 21-12: Climactic C Factor description

In Figure 21-13 we display a map of the world showing C Factor con-
tours:

Figure 21-13: World map showing C Factor contours

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-13

Running the Link Budget Calculator Chapter 21

9. Click Calculate to obtain the required performance estimate.

Placing the cursor in any other calculated field will also update the
calculated results.
Note

Figure 21-14: LBC - Results section

The Expected Performance parameters are calculated and displayed:
• Expected RSS - the expected RSS that the RADWIN Manager
shows when the RADWIN 2000 ODUs are optimally aligned
• Services Type - max number of T1 or E1 trunks if “Max Trunks” is
selected
• Ethernet Rate - maximum throughput available for the chosen
parameter combination
• Antenna height for LOS – the minimum antenna height required
for line-of-sight operation. It is the sum of the height required for
boresight clearance due to the earth’s curvature plus the height
required to clear the Fresnel zone
If the expected performance is not suitable for your application, try different
parameters and repeat the calculation.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 21-14

RADWIN 2000

Broadband Wireless Transmission System

USER MANUAL

RELEASE 2.5.00

Part 5: Product Dependent

Features
UM 2000-2500/09.10
 Chapter 22

Spectrum View
What is Spectrum View?
The RADWIN Manager Spectrum View utility is an RF survey tool designed
to support the link installation prior to full link service activation. The tool
provides comprehensive and clear spectral measurement information
enabling easier, faster and better quality installations.
You can view real-time spectrum information, save the spectral information
and view retrieved spectral information from historic spectrum scans.
RADWIN’s spectrum measurement and estimation algorithms are designed
to show accurate information while accommodating with variations in fre-
quency, temperature and interference power while overcoming anomalies
that tend to occur in high interference environments.

Running Spectrum View in Installation Mode

To launch Spectrum View, go to the RADWIN Manager main window menu
and click Tools | Spectrum View.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-1

Running Spectrum View in Installation Mode Chapter 22

Figure 22-1: Starting the analysis

¾ To obtain a spectrum analysis:

1. Click Start Analysis. You are asked for confirmation:

2. Click Yes. After a few moments, the first results for the managing site
appear:

Figure 22-2: Site A (managing site) done

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-2

 Running Spectrum View in Installation Mode Chapter 22

The over-the-air site takes a little longer:

Current channel

Figure 22-3: Site B (over- the-air site) done, showing current channel
The analysis complete when the Start Analysis button reverts to green. It
never runs for longer than ten minutes and you may stop it any time by
clicking the red Stop Analysis button.
The results for the over-the-air site are displayed after the link is re-
established regardless whether the analysis completes by itself or is
stopped.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-3

Understanding the Spectrum View Display Chapter 22

Understanding the Spectrum View Display

Information Displayed
Figure 22-4 shows an annotated display taken from a live link.

Figure 22-4: RADWIN 2000 Spectrum View - annotated display

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-4

Changing the Display Chapter 22

From Figure 22-4 above, you can see that the Spectrum View provides
clear information including:
• Spectral measurement for each of the 4 receivers that make a RAD-
WIN 2000 link (two sites x two antennas per site)
• Spectral power measurements in 5MHz channel granularity
• Current, average and maximum power per channel
• Indication of
• channels free from radars
• channels with radars detected
• barred channels (for DFS bands)
• Indication of scanned and un-scanned channels
• Indication of channels selected for ACS
• Notation of the current operational channel of the RADWIN 2000 link
• Time stamp of the last spectrum scan
• Further, it supports zoom capability, selective view of antennas and
sites constituting the link and selectable detail level

Changing the Display

Moving the mouse anywhere over one the display areas changes it to a
cross hair. The mouse may then be used to select an area for zooming, or to
enable a right-click System menu.

Figure 22-5: Mouse pointer active for zooming

Selecting a rectangle and clicking will zoom the channels below it to full
panel width:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-5

 Changing the Display Chapter 22

Zoomed frequencies

Figure 22-6: Selecting an area of interest to zoom with the right mouse but-
ton down

Figure 22-7: Requested section zoomed

The zoom can be reversed using the System menu obtained by right-click-
ing any of the Spectrum View display panels. It also offers display variations
such as maximum, average and current power per channel.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-6

Changing the Display Chapter 22

Figure 22-8: Spectrum View System menu

Here are two examples:
If you click Show Max, each panel will show the peak values recorded dur-
ing the analysis:

Figure 22-9: Effect of setting Show Max

If you click Show Average, each panel will show the average values
recorded during the analysis:

Figure 22-10: Effect of setting Show Average

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-7

Restricting the Panels to be Displayed Chapter 22

Restricting the Panels to be Displayed

Click View for further viewing options:

Figure 22-11: Further viewing options

If for example you want Antenna A only, the resulting display will look like
this:

Figure 22-12: Antenna A selected

Saving a Spectrum Analysis

Your analysis can be saved in a CSV (comma separated values) text file. Use
the Files menu item in the usual way:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-8

Saving a Spectrum Analysis Chapter 22

The Spectrum View information is logged as part of the Diagnostics Information to improve link and system diagnostics and
remote support. It can be retrieved from the RADWIN Manager menu using Help |Get Diagnostic Information.
Here is extract of a saved Spectrum View:
Spectrum View - Site: A
Frequencies Scanned,Last Scan Timestamp,Last NF-AntennaA,Last NF-AntennaB,Average NF-AntennaA,Average NF-Anten-
naB,Max NF-AntennaA,Max NF-AntennaB
5735,True,30/11/2009 08:20:52,-89,-90,-90,-91,-89,-90,
5740,True,30/11/2009 08:20:52,-89,-90,-90,-91,-89,-90,
5745,True,30/11/2009 08:20:52,-89,-90,-90,-91,-89,-90,
...
5830,True,30/11/2009 08:20:52,-92,-94,-93,-94,-92,-93,
5835,True,30/11/2009 08:20:52,-92,-94,-93,-95,-92,-94,
5840,True,30/11/2009 08:20:52,-92,-94,-93,-95,-92,-94,
Rx Power - AntennaA: -55
Rx Power - AntennaB: -55
Spectrum View - Site: B
Frequency,Is Scanned,Last Scan Timestamp,Last NF-AntennaA,Last NF-AntennaB,Average NF-AntennaA,Average NF-Anten-
naB,Max NF-AntennaA,Max NF-AntennaB
5735,True,30/11/2009 08:20:53,-91,-90,-92,-91,-91,-90,
5740,True,30/11/2009 08:20:53,-90,-89,-91,-90,-90,-89,
5745,True,30/11/2009 08:20:53,-90,-89,-91,-90,-90,-89,
...
5830,True,30/11/2009 08:20:53,-93,-94,-94,-94,-93,-93,
5835,True,30/11/2009 08:20:53,-93,-94,-94,-95,-93,-94,
5840,True,30/11/2009 08:20:53,-93,-94,-94,-95,-93,-94,
Rx Power - AntennaA: -57
Rx Power - AntennaB: -55

The column headings are wrapped around. The table values in dBm, are noise-floor (NF) relative.
The CSV file imports easily into most spreadsheet programs. Here is a MS Excel import:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-9

Management Integration Chapter 22

Figure 22-13: Spectrum View CSV file imported into MS Excel

Management Integration
Spectrum view information is supported in RADWIN’s MIB and can be used
by external Network Management applications.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 22-10

 Chapter 23

Quality of Service
Availability
The Quality of Service (QoS) feature is available for links using RADWIN
2000 C radios. If you already have this model, you can access the feature
by carrying out a Software Upgrade to the 2.5.00 release.
To use the facility you must be familiar with the use of VLAN (802.1p) or
Diffserv.

QoS - Overview
QoS is a technique for prioritization of network traffic packets during con-
gestion.
RADWIN 2000 C links support two classification criteria, VLAN based or Diff-
serv based. You may chose which of them to use.

Table 23-1: Default priorities an d allocation by VLAN ID and Diffserv

Priority
Quality queue REDAT %
Diffserv VLAN

Real time 48-63 6-7 15

Near real time (responsive

32-47 4-5 20
applications)

Controlled load 16-31 2-3 25

Best effort 0-15 0-1 40

For REDAT (Remaining Ethernet Data - Ethernet throughput) measurement

- see Throughput Checking. REDAT measures remaining Ethernet
throughput after reduction of bandwidth used by TDM channels. Use the
Note Link Budget Calculator to see how much remaining bandwidth is available
for Ethernet.

Based upon the classification criterion chosen, received packets will be

mapped into one of four quality groups: Real time, Near real time, Con-
trolled load and Best effort.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 23-1

Setting up QoS Chapter 23

You may partition the total link capacity across the four Quality queues. The
default weights as percentages are shown in Table 23-1.
Further, you may also limit the maximum information rate (MIR) for each
queue per site.

Setting up QoS
You may set up QoS from either the Installation or Configuration wizards.
Before doing so, set up for VLAN (Chapter 14) or Diffserv, depending on
which you intend to use.

¾ To define QoS settings for a link:

1. Using either the Installation or Configuration wizards, navigate to the
Services window and chose the QoS tab.

Figure 23-1: Services window with QoS selected

Although QoS is a link-oriented feature, each site may have its own sep-
arate parameters.
2. Click the Configure button for a site.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 23-2

Setting up QoS Chapter 23

Figure 23-2: Ethernet QoS Configuration - Mode selection

3. Choose the required mode - 802.1p (VLAN) or Diffserv.

Figure 23-3: Top: VLAN allocation. Bottom: Diffserv allocation

4. The entry fields in both cases are self evident. Upon clicking OK,
• If you over-book the Weight column, the last entered field will
be reduced so that the total is 100%.
• No weight field may be left zero. If you do, you will not be able
to proceed until it is set to something:

.
This reflects the implementation policy under which no checked
queue may be completely starved. If you really do not want to
use a queue under congestion, uncheck it.
• If you are under-booked, you will receive this notice:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 23-3

Disabling QoS Chapter 23

• In any event, you may automatically apply the same settings to

both link sites:

5. Priorities: You are completely responsible for the completeness and con-
sistency of your VLAN or Diffserv priorities.
6. Choose a Maximum Information Rate for each queue:

Figure 23-4: MIR choice - per queue

If you previously used Site | Ethernet | Maximum Information
Rate (Chapter 8) to globally limit the site, then your choice in
Figure 23-4 will also be limited.l
7. Click OK on the exit dialog to accept the settings. If you did not use these
settings for the opposite site, you should configure it now.
8. Complete the wizard in the usual way.

Disabling QoS
In the dialog of Figure 23-2, choose the Disabled mode. The two sites
may be enabled or disabled independently.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 23-4

RADWIN 2000

Broadband Wireless Transmission System

USER MANUAL

RELEASE 2.5.00

Part 6: Product Reference

UM 2000-2500/09.10
 Appendix A

Technical Specifications
Scope of these Specifications
This appendix contains technical specifications for the major link compo-
nents appearing in this User Manual. They are correct at the date of publi-
cation, but are intended for general background only. The latest
authoritative and most up to date technical specifications are available as
Data Sheets obtainable from RADWIN Customer Service.
In any event, RADWIN reserves the right to change these specifications
without notice.

ODU
Table A-1: Radio Performance Characteristics
• RADWIN 2000 C: Up to 16 E1/T1 services and up to 100 Mbps capacity
(net throughput, full duplex)
Capacity • RADWIN 2000 L: Up to 50 Mbps capacity (net throughput, full duplex)
• RADWIN 2000 PDH: Up to 16 E1/T1 services and up to 10 Mbps capacity
(net throughput, full duplex. Requires an IDU-C or E, no PoE support

Range Up to 120 km / 75 miles

Radio Modulation 2x2 MIMO-OFDM (BPSK/QPSK/16QAM/64QAM)

Adaptive Modulation & Coding Supported

Automatic Channel Selection Supported

Diversity Supported

Spectrum View Supported

Duplex Technology TDD

Error Correction FEC k = 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6

Rate – Dual Antenna [Mbps] 13 26 39 52 78 104 117 130

Rate – Single Antenna [Mbps] 6.5 13 19.5 26 39 52 58.5 65

Modulation BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM

FEC [k=] 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 5/6

Max Tx Power [dBm] for 4.8 – 6 GHz 25 24 21 19 18

Max Tx Power [dBm] for 2.4 GHz 26 25 24 24 21 20

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 A-1

ODU Appendix A

Table A-1: Radio Performance Characteristics (Continued)

Sensitivity (dBm) @BER <10e-11
-88 -86 -83 -81 -77 -72 -70 -67
(20MHz)
Encryption AES 128

Table A-2: Supported Frequencies, Regulations and Channel Bandwidths

Occupied Channel Bandwidth
Band Frequency range Compliance
[GHz] 10 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz

FCC/IC 5.8 5.725 - 5.850 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart C and IC RSS-210 Yes Yes Yes

FCC 5.4 5.480 - 5.715 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart E Yes(†) Yes Yes(†)
5.480 – 5.590
IC 5.4 IC RSS-210 Yes Yes Yes
5.660 – 5.715
FCC/IC 5.3 5.260 - 5.340 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart E and IC RSS-210 Yes(†) Yes Yes(†)

FCC/IC 4.9 4.940 - 4.990 FCC 47CFR, Part 90, Subpart Y and IC RSS-111 Yes Yes No

FCC/IC 2.4 2.402 - 2.472 FCC 47CFR, Part 15, Subpart C and IC RSS-210 Yes Yes No

WPC India 5.8 5.825 – 5.875 GSR-38 Yes Yes Yes

MII China 5.8 5.730 – 5.845 MII China Yes Yes Yes

ETSI 5.8 5.735 – 5.865 ETSI EN 302 502 Yes Yes No

ETSI 5.4 5.480 – 5.715 ETSI EN 301 893 Yes Yes Yes

ETSI 5.3 5.160 – 5.340 ETSI EN 301 893 Yes Yes No

Universal 6.0 5.690– 6.060 Yes Yes Yes

Universal 5.9 5.730 – 5.960 Yes Yes Yes

Universal 5.4 5.490 – 5.710 Yes Yes Yes

Universal 5.3 5.140 – 5.345 N/A Yes Yes Yes

Universal 4.9 4.890 - 5.010 Yes Yes Yes

Universal 4.8 4.800 - 4.900 Yes Yes Yes

Universal 2.3 2.302 - 2.379 Yes Yes No

(†) For FCC 5.4 and FCC/IC 5.3 bands: To comply with FCC regulations do not select
channel bandwidths of 10 and 40 MHz.

Table A-3: Mechanical

ODU with Integrated Antenna 37.1/14.84(W) x 37.1/14.84(H) x 9.00/3.6(D) cm/in; 3.5 kg / 7 lbs

ODU Connectorized 18.0/7.2(W) x 27.0/10.8(H) x 5.5/2.2(D) cm/in; 1.5 kg / 3.0 lbs

Table A-4: Power

Power Feeding Dual feeding, -20 to -60 VDC (AC/DC converter is available)

Power Consumption - alone 25W

Power Consumption with IDU See IDU specifications, this Appendix

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 A-2

IDU Appendix A

Table A-5: Configuration

ODU: Outdoor Unit with Integrated Antenna or Connectorized for External
Architecture Antenna
IDU: Indoor Unit for service interfaces or PoE device for Ethernet only

ODU to IDU/PoE Interface Outdoor CAT-5e cable; Maximum cable length: 100 m

Table A-6: Management

Management Application (per link) RADWIN Manager

Protocol SNMP and Telnet

NMS RADWIN NMS

Table A-7: Environmental

Operating Temperatures ODU: -35°C to +60°C / -31°F to +140°F

Humidity ODU: Up to 100% non-condensing, IP67

Table A-8: Safety

FCC/IC (cTUVus) UL 60950-1, UL 60950-22, CAN/CSA C22.2 60950-1, CAN/CSA C22.2 60950-22

ETSI/IEC EN/IEC 60950-1, EN/IEC 60950-22

Table A-9: EMC

FCC 47 CFR Class B, Part15, Subpart B

ETSI EN 300 386, EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-4

CAN/CSA CISPR 22-04 Class B

AS/NZS CISPR 22:2004 Class B

IDU
The following specifications are for most part, common to both IDU-C and
new style IDU-E products. Differences are pointed out in the tables.

Table A-10: TDM Interface

IDU-C IDU-E

Number of ports 16, 8, 4 ports or no TDM ports. 2 or no TDM port

Max ports usable by WinLink 1000 4 2

Max ports usable by RADWIN 2000 16 2

Type E1/T1 configurable by RADWIN Manager

Framing Unframed (transparent)

Timing Independent timing per port, Tx and Rx

Connector RJ-45

Standards Compliance ITU-T G.703, G.826

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 A-3

IDU Appendix A

Table A-10: TDM Interface (Continued)

IDU-C IDU-E

Line Code E1: HDB3 @ 2.048 Mbps, T1: B8ZS/AMI @ 1.544 Mbps

Latency Configurable 5-20 msec

Impedance E1: 120Ω, balanced, T1: 100Ω, balanced

Jitter & Wander According to ITU-T G.823, G.824

Jitter Buffer configuration enabling a latency from 5msec to 16msec for

Jitter Buffer
interference immunity confront
Clock Recovery Resolution 0.05ppb

Clock stability 20ppm as clock master (crucial for wander requirements of cellular operators)

Table A-11: LAN Interface

Ports: 2

10/100BaseT with Auto-Negotiation (IEEE 802.3u)

Ethernet ports Framing/Coding IEEE 802.3

Connector RJ-45

Line Impedance 100 Ω

SFP port (IDU-C only) 1 port, Type: Fast Ethernet

VLAN Support Transparent

Maximum Frame Size 2047 Bytes

Layer 2, self-learning of up to 2047 MAC addresses (IEEE 802.1Q), hub/Bridge

Bridge
selectable mode

Latency 3 msec

Table A-12: Special Features

Dry Contact Alarms 4 Inputs + 4 Outputs; Configurable by the RADWIN Manager

Monitored Hot Standby (IDU-C only) Supported

Table A-13: Mechanical

IDU-C IDU-E

Style 1U 19” Rack mounted Half 19” wall mounted or desktop

Dimensions 43.6cm(W) x 21cm(D) x 4.4cm(H) 22cm(W) x 17cm(D) x 4.4cm(H)

Weight 1.5 kg/3.3 lbs 0.5 kg/1.1 lbs

Table A-14: Power

IDU-C IDU-E

Power Consumption

With WinLink 1000 ODU < 15W < 15W

With RADWIN 2000 ODU < 35W < 35W

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 A-4

PoE Device - Indoor, AC Appendix A

Table A-14: Power (Continued)

IDU-C IDU-E

Alone 7W 3W

Power Feeding Options Dual feeding, -20 to -60VDC Single feeding, -20 to -60VDC

Table A-15: Environmental

Operating Temperatures 0°C - 50°C / 32°F - 122°F

Humidity 90% non-condensing

Table A-16: Safety

FCC/IC (cTUVus) UL 60950-1, CAN/CSA C22.2 60950-1

ETSI/IEC EN/IEC 60950-1

Table A-17: EMC

FCC CFR47 Class B, Part15, Subpart B

ETSI EN 300 386, EN 301 489-4, EN 301 489-1

CAN/CSA-CEI/IEC CISPR 22 Class B

AS/NZS CISPR 22:2006 Class B

PoE Device - Indoor, AC

Table A-18: Electrical
AC Input Voltage 100-240VAC nominal, 85-265VAC max range

Input Frequency 47-63Hz

Input Current 1.5A max at 90VAC, 0.75A max at 265VAC

Output Voltage and Current 55VDC, 0-1A Range 50-58VDC

Short circuit protection

Protection Auto recovery
Over voltage protection

Indication Green led for normal operation

Table A-19: Interfaces

Ethernet LAN interface type RJ 45, 10/100BaseT Interface (Line Impedance -100Ω)

AC Standard socket IEC320 C14 type

ODU (PoE Port) RJ-45 connector

Table A-20: Mechanical

Case Plastic

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 A-5

PoE Device - Outdoor, DC Appendix A

Table A-20: Mechanical (Continued)

Dimensions 16cm(W) x 6.3cm(D) x 3.33cm(H)

Weight 250g

Table A-21: Environmental

Operating Temperatures 0°C - 40°C

Humidity 90% non-condensing

Table A-22: Safety

UL 60950

C-UL 60950

TUV/GS IEC/EN 60950

Table A-23: EMC

ESD 61000-4-2

RS 61000-4-3

EFT 61000-4-4

Surge 61000-4-5

CS 61000-4-6

DIPS 61000-4-11

EMI FCC part 15 class B, CISPR Pub 22 class B

PoE Device - Outdoor, DC

Table A-24: Electrical
Input voltage range -20 to -60 VDC (single input)

Output voltage 48VDC / 0.6A

Power Consumption 0.5W (not including radio)

Differential - 15KW
Protections
Common – 3KW

Table A-25: Interfaces

Ethernet LAN interface type RJ 45, 10/100BaseT Interface (Line Impedance -100Ω)

DC input 2 pins connector

ODU (PoE Port) RJ45

Table A-26: Mechanical

Dimensions 24.5cm(H) x 13.5cm(W) x 4.0cm(D)

Weight 1.0kg/2.2lbs

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 A-6

GSU Appendix A

Table A-27: Environmental

Enclosure All weather cases

Operating Temperatures -35°C - 60°C / -31°F - 140°F

Humidity Up to 100% non-condensing

IEC 60721-3-4 Class 4M5

Standards
IP67

Table A-28: Safety (Designed to meet these standards)

FCC/IEC/ CAN/CSA 60950-1, 60950-22

Table A-29: EMC (Designed to meet these standards)

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2; EN 301 489-1 V1.4.1

FCC CFR47 Class B, Part15, Subpart B

CAN/CSA ICES-003:2004 Class B

AS/NZS CISPR 22:2006 class B

GSU
Table A-30: Configuration
Architecture Outdoor Unit Connectorized for External GPS Antenna

GSU to PoE Interface Outdoor CAT-5e cable; Maximum cable length: 100 m

Table A-31: Mechanical

Dimensions 24.5cm(H) x 13.5cm(W) x 4.0cm(D)

Weight 1.0kg/2.2lbs

Table A-32: Power

Power Feeding Power provided by PoE device

Max Power Dissipation 10Watt

Table A-33: Environmental

Operating Temperature Range -35°C to + 60°C / -13°F to 140°F

Humidity Up to 100% non-condensing

Table A-34: Safety

EN/IEC Designed to meet EN/IEC 60950-1, 60950-22

Table A-35: EMC

FCC Designed to meet 47 CFR Class B, Part15, Subpart B

ETSI Designed to meet EN 300 386 V1.3.3; EN 301 489-4 V1.3.1; EN 301 489-1

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 A-7

Antenna Characteristics Appendix A

Table A-35: EMC

CAN/CSA-CEI/IEC Designed to meet CISPR 22-02

AS/NZS Designed to meet CISPR22: 2006 Class B

Antenna Characteristics
An antenna is the radiating and receiving element from which the radio sig-
nal, in the form of RF power, is radiated to its surroundings and vice versa.
The transmission range is a function of the antenna gain and transmitting
power. These factors are limited by country regulations.
The RADWIN 2000 may be operated with an integrated antenna attached to
the ODU unit, or with an external antenna wired to the ODU via a N-type
connectors. All cables and connections must be connected correctly to
reduce losses. The required antenna impedance is 50Ω.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 A-8

 Appendix B

Wiring Specifications
ODU-IDU Cable
The ODU-IDU cable is shielded/outdoor class CAT-5e, 4 twisted-pair 24
AWG terminated with RJ-45 connectors on both ends. A cable gland on the
ODU side provides hermetic sealing.
The following table shows the connector pinout:

Table B-1: ODU-IDU RJ-45 Connector Pinout

Function Color IDU ODU

Ethernet (RxN) White/Green 1 1

Ethernet (RxT) Green 2 2

Ethernet (TxT) White/Orange 3 3

Ethernet (TxN) Orange 6 6

Power (+) Blue 4 4

Power (+) White/Blue 5 5

Power (−) White/Brown 7 7

Power (−) Brown 8 8

ODU/HSS Unit Connection Pinout

Table B-2: ODU/HSS Unit Connection Pinout
ODU HSS UNIT
Color
RJ-45 RJ-45

White/Green 1 1

Green
Not connected
White/Orange

Orange 6 6

Blue 4 4

White/Blue 5 5

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 B-1

User Port Connectors Appendix B

Table B-2: ODU/HSS Unit Connection Pinout (Continued)

ODU HSS UNIT
Color
RJ-45 RJ-45

White/Brown 7 7

Brown 8 8

User Port Connectors

LAN Port
The LAN 10/100BaseT interface terminates in an 8-pin RJ-45 connector,
wired in accordance to Table B-3.

Table B-3: Fast Ethernet Connector Pinout

Function Signal Pin

Transmit Data (positive) TD (+) 1

Transmit Data (negative) TD (–) 2

Receive Data (positive) RD (+) 3

Receive Data (negative) RD (–) 6

Trunk Ports - E1/T1 RJ45 Connector

The E1/T1 interfaces terminate in 8-pin RJ-45 connectors, as shown in
Table B-4 below:

Table B-4: Trunk Ports - E1/T1 RJ45Pinout

Function Signal Pin

Transmit Data Tip TxTip 1

Transmit Data Ring TxRing 2

Receive Data Tip RxTip 4

Receive Data Ring RxRing 5

Hot Standby Port RJ-11

Table B-5: Hot Standby RJ-11 Port Pinout
Pin Pin
Signal
Side A Side B

HSB out 1 2

HSB in 2 1

Ground 3 3

Ground 4 4

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 B-2

IDU (all models) Alarm Connector Appendix B

IDU (all models) Alarm Connector

The IDU Alarm interface is a 25 pin D type female connector. Its pinout is
listed in Table B-6.

Table B-6: IDU Alarm Connector (Dry-Contact)

I/O Description Pin

Input 1 Positive 14

Input 1 Negative 15

Input 2 Positive 16

Input 2 Negative 17

Input 3 Positive 18

Input 3 Negative 19

Input 4 Positive 20

Input 4 Negative 21

Output 1 Normally Open 1

Output 1 Common 2

Output 1 Normally Closed 3

Output 2 Normally Open 4

Output 2 Common 5

Output 2 Normally Closed 6

Output 3 Normally Open 7

Output 3 Common 8

Output 3 Normally Closed 9

Output 4 Normally Open 10

Output 4 Common 11

Output 4 Normally Closed 12

The figure below, shows how to connect external input and output alarms.

• Use an external current limit resistor to limit the current at the output
relays to 1 Amp. Such resistor is not required if the equipment con-
nected to the IDU supports current limiting to 1 Amp.
Note • The voltage of the input alarm must be within the range of -10 to -50
VDC.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 B-3

DC Power Terminals Appendix B

Figure B-1: Example for connecting the alarm connector

DC Power Terminals

IDU-C & E
Table B-7: Terminal Block 3-pin -48VDC
Function Pin

+ Right

Chassis Center

– Left

DC PoE
Table B-8: Terminal Block 2-pin -48VDC
Function Pin

+ Right

– Left

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 B-4

 Appendix C

Small Form-factor
Pluggable Transceiver
IDU-C SFP Support
The Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver, is a compact, hot-plug-
gable transceiver used in communications applications.
The SFP transceiver technology allows almost any protocol converter imple-
mentation with seamless integration to a standard Ethernet switch.
The IDU-C supports SFP transceivers to provide and support several net-
work applications.
Any standard Fast Ethernet (FE) SFP transceiver can be plugged into the
IDU-C. These SFPs support various Ethernet interfaces. For example a fibre
optic interface can be used to support long fibre distances.
In addition, System on SFP transceivers can be used, supporting a proto-
col converter concept. The main application for such SFP transceivers is
TDM over Ethernet providing E1/T1 or E3/T3 over full duplex Ethernet
Remote Bridge
The following table provides a few SFP types that can be used with the IDU-
C:

Table C-1: SFP Type and Interface description

SFP Type Interface Description

100baseT 100BaseT, IEEE 802.3, UTP CAT5

100baseFX Multimode fiber-optic (MMF) link spans up to 2km long

100baseLX Single-mode fiber optic (SMF) links pans up to 10km

100baseBX SMF single-strand link spans up to 10 km or 40 km

E3T3/FE E3/T3

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 C-1

 Appendix D

MIB Reference
Introduction

About the MIB

The RADWIN MIB is a set of APIs that enables external applications to con-
trol RADWIN equipment.
The MIB is divided into public and a private API groups:
• Public: RFC-1213 (MIB II) variables, RFC-1214 (MIB II) System and
Interfaces sections
• Private: Controlled by RADWIN and supplements the public group.
This appendix describes the public and private MIB used by RADWIN.

Terminology
The following terms are used in this appendix.

Term Meaning

MIB Management Information Base

API Application Programming Interface

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

In addition, the MIB uses internally, the older notions of Local site and
Remote site where this manual would use site A and site B.
To avoid burdening the reader, this appendix will follow the MIB usage.

Interface API

Control Method
The RADWIN Manager application provides all the means to configure and
monitor a RADWIN 2000 link, communicating with the SNMP agent in each
ODU. Each SNMP agent contains data on each of the IDUs and ODUs in the

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-1

Community String Appendix D

link. Both agents communicate with each other over the air using a proprie-
tary protocol.

Each ODU has a single MAC address and a single IP address.

Note

To control and configure the device using the MIB, you should adhere to the
following rules:
• The connection for control and configuration is to the local site, over
any SNMP/UDP/IP network.
• All Parameters should be consistent between both of the ODUs. Note
that inconsistency of air parameters can break the air connection. To
correct air parameters inconsistency you must reconfigure each of
the ODUs.
• Common practice is to configure the remote site first and then to
configure the local site.
• For some of the configuration parameters additional action must be
taken before the new value is loaded. Please refer to the operation
in the parameters description.
• Some of the MIB parameters values are product dependent. It is
strongly recommend using the RADWIN Manager Application for
changing these values. Setting wrong values may cause indetermi-
nate results.

Community String
To control a link, all SNMP requests should go to the local site IP address.
See Table 4-4 for default Community strings.

Private MIB Structure

The sections in the private RADWIN MIB and its location in the MIB tree are
shown in Figure D-1 below:

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-2

MIB Parameters Appendix D

Figure D-1: Top Level Sections of the private MIB

The products MIB section contains the definition of the Object IDs for the
two form factors of the ODU, Integrated Antenna and Connectorized
(referred in the MIB as external antenna) and GSU:

Figure D-2: Product MIB: Left WinLink 1000, Right RADWIN 2000
The ODU MIB contains the sections: Admin, Service, Ethernet, Bridge, Air,
PerfMon and Agent.
The IDU MIB contains the sections: Admin, Service, Ethernet, Bridge and
TDM.
The GpsSynchronizerFamily MIB defines the GSU.
The general MIB include a single generic parameter that is used by all traps
as a trap description parameter.

MIB Parameters
The following section describes all of the MIB parameters. The MIB parame-
ters follow the following naming convention:
<winlink1000><Section 1>...<Section n><Parameter Name>

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-3

 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB Appendix D

For each of the configuration and control parameters (parameters with

read-write access), the “Description” column describes when the new value
is effective. It is recommended that you perform the appropriate action to
make the values affective immediately after any change. Where a change is
required on both sides of the link, it is recommended that you change both
sides of the link first and then perform the action.

Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB

Table D-1: Supported RFC 1213 Variables (Sheet 1 of 2)

Access
Name OID Type Description

ifIndex .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.xa Integer RO A unique value for each interface.Its value ranges
between 1 and the value of ifNumber.The value for
each interface must remain constant at least from
one re-initialization of the entity's network
management system to the next re-initialization.
ifDescr .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2 DisplayString RO A textual string containing information about the
interface.This string should include the name of
the manufacturer, the product name and the
version of the hardware interface.
ifType .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3 Integer RO The type of interface, distinguished according to
the physical/link protocol(s) immediately `below'
the network layer in the protocol stack.
ifSpeed .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5 Gauge RO An estimate of the interface's current bandwidth in
bits per second.For interfaces which do not vary in
bandwidth or for those where no accurate
estimation can be made, this object should ontain
the nominal bandwidth.
ifPhysAddress .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.6 Phys-Address RO The interface's address at the protocol layer
immediately `below' the network layer in the
protocol stack. For interfaces which do not have
such an address (e.g., a serial line), this object
should contain an octet string of zero length.
ifAdminStatus .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.7 Integer RW The desired state of the interface. The testing(3)
state indicates that no operational packets can be
passed.
ifOperStatus .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.8 Integer RO The current operational state of the interface. The
testing(3) state indicates that no operational
packets can be passed.
ifInOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.x Counter RO The total number of octets received on the
interface, including framing characters.
ifInUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.x Counter RO The number of subnetwork-unicast packets
delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInNUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.x Counter RO The number of non-unicast (i.e., subnetwork-
broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) packets
delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
ifInErrors .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.x Counter RO The number of inbound packets that contained
errors preventing them from being deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol.
ifOutOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.x Counter RO The total number of octets transmitted out of the
interface, including framing characters.
ifOutUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.x Counter RO The total number of packets that higher-level
protocols requested be transmitted to a
subnetwork-unicast address, including those that
were discarded or not sent.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-4

 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 MIB Appendix D

Table D-1: Supported RFC 1213 Variables (Sheet 2 of 2)

Access
Name OID Type Description

ifOutNUcastPkts .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18.x Counter RO The total number of packets that higher-level

protocols requested be transmitted to a non-
unicast (i.e., a subnetwork-broadcast or
subnetwork-multicast) address, including those
that were discarded or not sent.

a. x is the interface ID

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-5

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

MIB Parameters
Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 1 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAdmProductType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.1 DisplayString RO ODU configuration description.

winlink1000OduAdmHwRev 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.2 DisplayString RO ODU Hardware Version.
winlink1000OduAdmSwRev 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.3 DisplayString RO ODU Software Version.
winlink1000OduAdmLinkName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.4 DisplayString RW Link Name. A change is effective immediately.
winlink1000OduAdmResetCmd 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.5 Integer RW Reset Command. A set command with a value of 3
will cause a device reset. The read value is
always 0.
winlink1000OduAdmAddres 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.6 IpAddress RW ODU IP address. A change is effective after reset.
The parameter is kept for backward compatibility.
Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is
recommended.
winlink1000OduAdmMask 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.7 IpAddress RW ODU Subnet Mask. A change is effective after
reset. The parameter is kept for backward
compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is
recommended.
winlink1000OduAdmGateway 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.8 IpAddress RW ODU default gateway. A change is effective after
reset. The parameter is kept for backward
compatibility. Using the alternative parameter:
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg is
recommended.
winlink1000OduAdmBroadcast 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.10 Integer RW This parameter is reserved for the Manager
application provided with the product.
winlink1000OduAdmHostsTable N/A Trap destinations table. Each trap destination is
defined by an IP address and a UDP port. Up to
10 addresses can be configured.
winlink1000OduAdmHostsEntry N/A Trap destinations table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAdmHostsIndex }
winlink1000OduAdmHostsIndex RO Trap destinations table index.
winlink1000OduAdmHostsIp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.12.1.2 IpAddress RW Trap destination IP address. A change is effective
immediately.
winlink1000OduAdmHostsPort 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.12.1.3 Integer RW UDP port of the trap destination. A change is
effective immediately.
winlink1000OduBuzzerAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.13 Integer RW This parameter controls the activation of the
buzzer while the unit is in install mode. A change
is effective immediately. The valid values are:
disabled (0) enabledAuto (1)
enabledConstantly(2).
winlink1000OduProductId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.14 DisplayString RO This parameter is reserved for the Manager
application provided with the product.
winlink1000OduReadCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.15 DisplayString RW Read Community String. This parameter always
returns ***** when retrieving its value. It is used
by the Manager application to change the Read
Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only
encrypted values.
winlink1000OduReadWriteCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.16 DisplayString RW Read/Write Community String. This parameter
always returns ***** when retrieving its value. It is
used by the Manager application to change the
Read/Write Community String. The SNMP agent
accepts only encrypted values.
winlink1000OduTrapCommunity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.17 DisplayString RW Trap Community String. This parameter is used by
the Manager application to change the Trap
Community String. The SNMP agent accepts only
encrypted values.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-6

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 2 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAdmSnmpAgentVersion 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.18 Integer RO Major version of the SNMP agent.

winlink1000OduAdmRemoteSiteName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.19 DisplayString RO Remote site name. Returns the same value as
sysLocation parameter of the remote site.
winlink1000OduAdmSnmpAgentMinorVersion 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.20 Integer RO Minor version of the SNMP agent.
winlink1000OduAdmLinkPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.21 DisplayString RW Link Password. This parameter always returns
***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the
Manager application to change the Link Password.
The SNMP agent accepts only encrypted values.
winlink1000OduAdmSiteLinkPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.22 DisplayString RW Site Link Password. This parameter always returns
***** when retrieving its value. It is used by the
Manager application to change the Link Password
of the site. The SNMP agent accepts only
encrypted values.
winlink1000OduAdmDefaultPassword 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.23 Integer RO This parameter indicates if the current Link
Password is the default password.
winlink1000OduAdmConnectionType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.24 Integer RO This parameter indicates if the Manager
application is connected to the local ODU or to
the remote ODU over the air. A value of 'unknown'
indicates community string mismatch.
winlink1000OduAdmBackToFactorySettingsC 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.25 Integer RW Back to factory settings Command. A change is
md effective after reset. The read value is always 0.
winlink1000OduAdmIpParamsCnfg 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.26 DisplayString RW ODU IP address Configuration. The format is:
<IP_Address>|<Subnet_Mask>|<Default_Gatewa
y>|
winlink1000OduAdmVlanID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.27 Integer RW VLAN ID. Valid values are 1 to 4094. Initial value
is 0 meaning VLAN unaware.
winlink1000OduAdmVlanPriority 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.28 Integer RW VLAN Priority. 0 is lowest priority 7 is highest
priority.
winlink1000OduAdmSN 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.29 DisplayString RO ODU Serial Number
winlink1000OduAdmProductName 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.30 DisplayString RO This is the product name as it exists at EC
winlink1000OduAdmActivationKey 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.31 DisplayString RW Activates a general key.
winlink1000OduAdmRmtPermittedOduType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.32 DisplayString RW Mobile Application: permitted partner OduType.
winlink1000OduAdmCpuID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.1.33 Integer RO CPU ID
winlink1000OduSrvMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.1 Integer RW System mode. The only values that can be set are
installMode and slaveMode; normalMode
reserved to the Manager application provided with
the product. A change is effective after link re-
synchronization.
winlink1000OduSrvBridging 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.3 Integer RO Bridging Mode. Valid values are: disabled (0)
enabled (1).
winlink1000OduSrvRingLinkMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.4.1 Integer RW Mode of the link regarding ring topology.
winlink1000OduSrvRingTopologySupported 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.4.2 Integer RO Ring Topology options are: supported not
supported
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdTable N/A Ring VLAN IDs table.
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdEntry N/A VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. Valid
values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning
VLAN unaware. INDEX {
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdIndex }
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanIdIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.4.3.1.1 Integer RO Index of VLAN ID of the internal ring messages.
winlink1000OduSrvRingVlanId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.4.3.1.2 Integer RW VLAN ID of the internal ring messages. Valid
values are 1 to 4094. Initial value is 0 meaning
VLAN unaware.
winlink1000OduSrvRingEthStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.4.4 Integer RO Represents the Ethernet service blocking state of
a Rings link

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-7

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 3 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduSrvRingMaxAllowedTimeFrom 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.4.5 Integer RW Defines the minimal time (in ms) required for
LastRpm determination of ring failure.
winlink1000OduSrvRingWTR 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.4.6 Integer RW Defines the minimal time (in ms) required for ring
recovery.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.5.1 Integer RW Mode of QoS feature.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSConfTable N/A QoS configuration table.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSConfEntry N/A QoS configuration table. INDEX {
winlink1000OduSrvQoSConfIndex }
winlink1000OduSrvQoSConfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.5.2.1.1 Integer RO Index of QoS Configuration.
winlink1000OduSrvConfVlanQGroups 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.5.2.1.2 Integer RO Frames classification according to VLAN Priority
IDs.
winlink1000OduSrvConfDiffservQGroups 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.5.2.1.3 Integer RO Frames classification according to Diffserv.
winlink1000OduSrvConfQueMir 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.5.2.1.4 Integer RW Desired Private MIR.
winlink1000OduSrvConfQueWeight 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.5.2.1.5 Integer RW QoS queueu's weights in percent.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSVlanQGroupsSetStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.5.3 DisplayString RW Frames classification according to VLAN IDs string
for set.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSDiffservQGroupsSetStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.5.4 DisplayString RW Frames classification according to Diffserv IDs
string for set.
winlink1000OduSrvQoSMaxRTQuePercent 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.2.5.5 Integer RO Maximal percent for RT & NRT queues.
winlink1000OduEthernetRemainingRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.1 Integer RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfTable N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfEntry N/A ODU Ethernet Interface table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex }
winlink1000OduEthernetIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.1 Integer RO ODU Ethernet Interface Index.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfAddress 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.5 DisplayString RO ODU MAC address.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfAdminStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.6 Integer RW Required state of the interface.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfOperStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.7 Integer RO Current operational state of the interface.
winlink1000OduEthernetIfFailAction 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.2.1.8 Integer RW Failure action of the interface.
winlink1000OduEthernetNumOfPorts 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.3.3 Integer RO Number of ODU network interfaces.
winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortTable N/A ODU Bridge Ports table.
winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortEntry N/A ODU Bridge Ports table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortIndex }
winlink1000OduBridgeBasePortIndex RO ODU Bridge Port Number.
winlink1000OduBridgeBaseIfIndex RO IfIndex corresponding to ODU Bridge port.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.101 Integer RW ODU bridge mode. A change is effective after
reset. Valid values: hubMode (0) bridgeMode (1).
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortTable N/A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortEntry N/A ODU Transparent Bridge Ports table entry.
INDEX { winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortIndex }
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortIndex RO ODU Transparent Bridge Port Number.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortInFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.3 Counter RO Number of frames received by this port.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortOutFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.4 Counter RO Number of frames transmitted by this port.
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortInBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.10 Counter RO Number of bytes received by this port.
1
winlink1000OduBridgeTpPortOutBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.3.1.10 Counter RO Number of bytes transmitted by this port.
2
winlink1000OduBridgeConfigMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.4.4.102 Integer RO ODU bridge configuration mode
winlink1000OduAirFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.1 Integer RW Installation Center Frequency. Valid values are
product dependent. A change is effective after link
re-synchronization.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-8

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 4 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAirDesiredRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.2 Integer RW Deprecated parameter actual behavior is read-

only. Required Air Rate. For Channel Bandwidth
of 20 10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4
respectively.
winlink1000OduAirSSID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided
with the product.
winlink1000OduAirTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.4 Integer RW Required Transmit power in dBm . This is a
nominal value while the actual transmit power
includes additional attenuation. The min and max
values are product specific. A change is effective
immediately.
winlink1000OduAirSesState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.5 Integer RO Current Link State. The value is active (3) during
normal operation.
winlink1000OduAirMstrSlv 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.6 Integer RO This parameter indicates if the device was
automatically selected into the radio link master or
slave. The value is undefined if there is no link.
winlink1000OduAirResync 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.8 Integer RW Setting this parameter to 1 will cause the link to
restart the synchronization process.
winlink1000OduAirRxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.1 Integer RO Received Signal Strength in dBm.
winlink1000OduAirTotalFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.2 Counter RO Total Number of received radio frames.
winlink1000OduAirBadFrames 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.3 Counter RO Total number of received radio frames with CRC
error.
winlink1000OduAirCurrentRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.4 Integer RO Deprecated parameter. Actual rate of the air
interface in Mbps. For Channel Bandwidth of 20
10 5 MHz divide the value by 1 2 4 respectively.
winlink1000OduAirCurrentRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.9.5 Integer RO Index of current air rate.
winlink1000OduAirTxPower36 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.10 Integer RW Deprecated parameter. Actual behavior is read-
only.
winlink1000OduAirTxPower48 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.11 Integer RW Deprecated parameter. Actual behavior is read-
only.
winlink1000OduAirCurrentTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.12 Integer RO Current Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal
value while the actual transmit power includes
additional attenuation.
winlink1000OduAirMinFrequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.13 Integer RO Minimum center frequency in MHz.
winlink1000OduAirMaxFrequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.14 Integer RO Maximum center frequency in MHz.
winlink1000OduAirFreqResolution 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.15 Integer RO Center Frequency resolution. Measured in MHz
if value < 100 otherwise in KHz.
winlink1000OduAirCurrentFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.16 Integer RO Current Center Frequency. Measured in MHz if
center frequency resolution value < 100 otherwise
in KHz.
winlink1000OduAirNumberOfChannels 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.17 Integer RO Number of channels that can be used.
winlink1000OduAirChannelsTable N/A Table of channels used by automatic channels
selection (ACS).
winlink1000OduAirChannelsEntry N/A ACS channels table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex }
winlink1000OduAirChannelsIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.1 Integer RO Channel Index.
winlink1000OduAirChannelsFrequency 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.2 Integer RO Channel frequency in MHz.
winlink1000OduAirChannelsOperState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.3 Integer RW Channel state. Can be set by the user.
Automatic Channel Selection uses channels that
are AirChannelsOperState enabled and
AirChannelsAvail enabled. A change is effective
after link re-synchronization. Valid values: disabled
(0) enabled (1).

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-9

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 5 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAirChannelsAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.4 Integer RO Channel state. Product specific and cannot be

changed by the user. Automatic Channel
Selection uses channels that are
AirChannelsOperState enabled and
AirChannelsAvail enabled. Valid values: disabled
(0) enabled (1).
winlink1000OduAirChannelsDefaultFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.18.1.5 Integer RO Default channel's availability for all CBWs. The
valid values are: forbidden (0) available (1).
winlink1000OduAirDfsState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.19 Integer RO Radar detection state. Valid values: disabled (0)
enabled (1).
winlink1000OduAirAutoChannelSelectionState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.20 Integer RO Deprecated parameter. Indicating Automatic
Channel Selection availability at current channel
bandwidth. Valid values: disabled (0) enabled
(1).
winlink1000OduAirEnableTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.21 Integer RO Indicating Transmit power configuration enabled or
disabled.
winlink1000OduAirMinTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.22 Integer RO Minimum Transmit power in dBm.
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerTable N/A Table of Maximum transmit power per air rate in
dBm.
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerEntry N/A Maximum Transmit power table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerIndex }
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPowerIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.23.1.1 Integer RO Air interface rate index.
winlink1000OduAirMaxTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.23.1.2 Integer RO Maximum Transmit power in dBm.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBandwidth 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.24 Integer RW Channel bandwidth in KHz. A change is effective
after reset.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWTable N/A Channel Bandwidths table.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWEntry N/A Channel Bandwidth table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWIndex }
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.1 Integer RO Channel Bandwidth index.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.2 Integer RO Channel Bandwidth availability product specific.
Options are: Not supported supported with
manual channel selection supported with
Automatic Channel Selection.
winlink1000OduAirChannelsAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.3 DisplayString RO Channels' availability per CBW.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWHSSATDDConfl 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.4 Integer RO Indication for possible Link drop per CBW due to
ictPerCBW conflict between HSS and ATDD.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWMinRatioForSu 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.5 Integer RO Minimal TX ratio that may be used by the HSM and
pporting still enable proper operation of the aforementioned
CBW.
winlink1000OduAirChannelBWMaxRatioForSu 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.25.1.6 Integer RO Maximal TX ratio that may be used by the HSM
pporting and still enable proper operation of the
aforementioned CBW.
winlink1000OduAirRFD 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.26 Integer RO Current radio frame duration in microseconds.
winlink1000OduAirRatesTable N/A Air Rate indexes table for current channel
bandwidth.
winlink1000OduAirRatesEntry N/A Air Rate indexes table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex }
winlink1000OduAirRatesIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.27.1.1 Integer RO Air Rate index.
winlink1000OduAirRatesAvail 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.27.1.2 Integer RO Air Rate availability depending on air interface
conditions.
winlink1000OduAirDesiredRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.28 Integer RW Required Air Rate index. 0 reserved for Adaptive
Rate. A change is effective immediately after Set
operation to the master side while the link is up.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-10

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 6 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAirLinkDistance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.29 Integer RO Link distance in meters. A value of -1 indicates

an illegal value and is also used when a link is not
established.
winlink1000OduAirLinkWorkingMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.30 Integer RO Link working mode as a result of comparing
versions of both sides of the link. Possible
modes are: Unknown - no link Normal - versions
on both sides are identical with full compatibility
with restricted compatibility or versions on both
sides are different with software upgrade or
versions incompatibility.
winlink1000OduAirMajorLinkIfVersion 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.31 Integer RO Major link interface version
winlink1000OduAirMinorLinkIfVersion 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.32 Integer RO Minor link interface version
winlink1000OduAirHssDesiredOpState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.1 Integer RW Required Hub Site Synchronization operating
state.
winlink1000OduAirHssCurrentOpState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.2 Integer RO Current Hub Site Synchronization operating state.
winlink1000OduAirHssSyncStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.3 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization sync status.
winlink1000OduAirHssExtPulseStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.4 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization external pulse detection
status. In GSS mode: if generating then 1PSP
is auto generated by the GSS Unit. if
generatingAndDetecting then 1PSP is generated
by GPS satellites signal.
winlink1000OduAirHssExtPulseType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.5 Integer RO Hub Site Synchronization external pulse type.
winlink1000OduAirHssDesiredExtPulseType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.6 Integer RW Hub Site Synchronization required external pulse
type. Valid values for read write: {typeA(2)
typeB(3) typeC(4) typeD(5) typeE(6)}. Valid value
for read only: {notApplicable(1)}.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTable N/A ODU Radio Frame Patterns (RFP) Table.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEntry N/A ODU RFP Table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpIndex }
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.1 Integer RO ODU RFP Table index. The index represent the
Radio Frame Pattern: typeA(2) typeB(3)
typeC(4) typeD(5) typeE(6).
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW5MH 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.2 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service
z under Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific
Radio Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW5M 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.3 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under
Hz Channel BW of 5MHz in the specific Radio
Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW10M 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.4 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service
Hz under Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific
Radio Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW10 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.5 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under
MHz Channel BW of 10MHz in the specific Radio
Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW20M 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.6 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service
Hz under Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific
Radio Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW20 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.7.1.7 Integer RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under
MHz Channel BW of 20MHz in the specific Radio
Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpEthChannelBW40M RO Represents the compatibility of Ethernet service
Hz under Channel BW of 40MHz in the specific
Radio Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpTdmChannelBW40 RO Represents the compatibility of TDM service under
MHz Channel BW of 40MHz in the specific Radio
Frame Pattern.
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.8 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization supported patterns

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-11

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 7 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAirHSSHsmID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.9 Integer RO A unique ID which is common to the HSM and all
its collocated ODUs
winlink1000OduAirHssTime 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.10.0 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS time
winlink1000OduAirHssLatitude 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.11.0 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS Latitude
winlink1000OduAirHssNSIndicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.12.0 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS N/S Indicator
winlink1000OduAirHssLongitude 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.13.0 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS Longitude
winlink1000OduAirHssEWIndicator 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.14.0 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS E/W Indicator
winlink1000OduAirHssNumSatellites 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.15.0 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS Number of
satellites
winlink1000OduAirHssAltitude 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.16.0 DisplayString RO Hub Site Synchronization GPS Altitude
winlink1000OduAirHssRfpPhase 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.40.17.0 Integer RW Hub Site Synchronization GPS RFP phase
winlink1000OduAirLockRemote 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.41 Integer RW This parameter enables locking the link with a
specific ODU. The following values can be set:
Unlock (default) - The ODU is not locked on a
specific remote ODU. Unlock can only be
performed when the link is not connected. Lock -
The ODU is locked on a specific remote ODU.
Lock can only be performed when the link is
active.
winlink1000OduAirAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.42 Integer RW Current Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi resolution. User
defined value for external antenna. Legal range:
MinAntennaGain<AntennaGain<MaxAntennaGain
.
winlink1000OduAirFeederLoss 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.43 Integer RW Current Feeder Loss in 0.1 dBm resolution. User
defined value for external antenna.
winlink1000OduAirMaxAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.44 Integer RO Maximum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi
resolution.
winlink1000OduAirMinAntennaGain 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.45 Integer RO Minimum allowed Antenna Gain in 0.1 dBi
resolution.
winlink1000OduAirMaxEIRP 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.46 Integer RO Maximum EIRP value as defined by regulation in
0.1 dBm resolution.
winlink1000OduAirAntennaGainConfigSupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.47 Integer RO Antenna Gain Configurability options are product
specific: supported not supported.
winlink1000OduAirAntennaType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.48 Integer RW External Antenna Type: Monopolar or Bipolar.
winlink1000OduAirRssBalance 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.49 Integer RO RSS balance. Relation between RSS in radio 1
and RSS in radio 2.
winlink1000OduAirTotalTxPower 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.50 Integer RO Total Transmit Power in dBm. This is a nominal
value While the actual transmit power includes
additional attenuation.
winlink1000OduAirInstallFreqAndCBW 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.51 DisplayString RW Installation frequency Channel BW.
winlink1000OduAirDFStype 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.52 Integer RO DFS regulation type.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandTable N/A ODU Multi-band Sub Bands Table.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandEntry N/A ODU Multi-band Sub Bands Table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandIndex }
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.1 Integer RO ODU Multi-band sub bands table index.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.2 DisplayString RO Represents the Multi-band sub band ID.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandDescription 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.3 DisplayString RO Multi-band sub band description.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandInstallFreq 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.4 Integer RO Represents the Multi-band sub band installation
frequency in KHz.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.5 Integer RO Represents the Multi-band sub band
administrative state.
winlink1000OduAirComboSubBandInstallation 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.6 Integer RO Reflects if the Multi-band sub band allowes
Allowed installtion.
winlink1000OduAirComboFrequencyBandId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.1.1.7 Integer RO Reflects the frequency band Id.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-12

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 8 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAirComboNumberOfSubBands 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.2 Integer RO Represents the number of Multi-band sub bands.

winlink1000OduAirComboSwitchSubBand 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.53.3 DisplayString RW Switch sub band operation with a given sub band
ID. The get operation retrieves the current sub
band ID.
winlink1000OduAirInternalMaxRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.54 Integer RO Max Ethernet throughput of the site (in Kpbs).
winlink1000OduAirCapacityDirection 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.55 Integer RW Capacity direction of the site.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumAnalysisOperStat 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.1 Integer RW Spectrum Analysis operation state. The
e configurable values are Spectrum Analysis Stop
Start and Restart. Not Supported value indicates
that the feature is not supported on the device.
Not Supported is not a configurable state.
winlink1000OduAirRxPowerAntennaA 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.2 Integer RO Received Signal Strength in dBm of Antenna A.
winlink1000OduAirRxPowerAntennaB 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.3 Integer RO Received Signal Strength in dBm of Antenna B.
winlink1000OduAirNumberOfSpectrumChanne 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.4 Integer RO Represents the number of Spectrum Channels.
ls
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelTable N/A ODU Spectrum Analysis Channel Table.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelTableEntr N/A ODU Spectrum Analysis Channel Table entry.
y INDEX {
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelIndex }
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.1 Integer RO ODU Spectrum Channel index.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelFrequenc 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.2 Integer RO ODU Spectrum Channel frequency in MHz.
y
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelScanned 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.3 Integer read-only
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelScanning 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.4 TimeTicks RO Channel last scan timestamp in hundredths of a
Timestamp second since device up time. If the channel was
not scanned than the return value will be 0.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelLastNFAn 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.5 Integer RO Normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of Antenna
tennaA A - (including 2 neighbor frequencies).
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelLastNFAn 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.6 Integer RO Normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of Antenna
tennaB B - (including 2 neighbor frequencies).
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelAverageN 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.7 Integer RO Average normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of
FAntennaA Antenna A - over all dwells.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelAverageN 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.8 Integer RO Average normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of
FAntennaB Antenna B - over all dwells.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelMaxNFAn 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.9 Integer RO Max normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of
tennaA Antenna A - over all dwells.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelMaxNFAn 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.1 Integer RO Max normalized Noise Floor value in dBm - of
tennaB 0 Antenna B - over all dwells.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelCACPerfo 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.1 Integer RO read-only
rmed 1
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelLastCAC 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.1 TimeTicks RO Last CAC performed timestamp in hundredths of a
Timestamp 2 second since device up time. If no CAC has
performed on the channel the return value will be
0.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelRadarDet 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.1 Integer RO read-only
ected 3
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelRadarDet 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.1 TimeTicks RO Last Radar Detection timestamp in hundredths of
ectionTimestamp 4 a second since device up time. If no Radar has
detected on the channel the return value will be 0.
winlink1000OduAirSpectrumChannelAvailable 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.56.5.1.1 Integer RO read-only
5
winlink1000OduAirAntConfAndRatesStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.57 Integer RO Description: Antenna configuration and Rates
status (1 = Single antenna with single data stream
2 = Dual antenna with single data stream 3 = Dual
antenna with dual data stream).

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-13

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 9 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAirDualAntTxMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.58 Integer RW Description: Transmission type when using Dual

radios (MIMO or AdvancedDiversity using one
stream of data).
winlink1000OduAirTxOperationMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.59 Integer RW This parameter controls the Operation mode of
frames sent over the air. The Operation mode is
either normal (1) for regular transmission where
frame size is determined by the traffic or
throughput test (2) when the user requests an
actual over the air throughput estimation using full
frames. The latter lasts no more than a
predetermined interval (default 30 sec).
winlink1000OduAirDesiredNetMasterTxRatio 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.60.1 Integer RW This parameter is reserved to the element
manager provided with the product.
winlink1000OduAirCurrentNetMasterTxRatio 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.60.2 Integer RO Represents the actual Net Master Tx RAtio.
winlink1000OduAirMinUsableMasterTxRatio 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.60.3 Integer RO Represents the minimal value the user can
configure for Desired net mAster Tx Ratio.
winlink1000OduAirMaxUsableMasterTxRatio 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.60.4 Integer RO Represents the maximal value the user can
configure for Desired net mAster Tx Ratio.
winlink1000OduAirAccumulatedUAS 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.5.61 Integer RO Accumulates the Unavailable seconds of the Air
Interface.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrTable N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the
current 15 min interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrEntry N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table.
INDEX {ifIndex }
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrUAS 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.1 Gauge RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds
starting from the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrES 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.2 Gauge RO Current number of Errored Seconds starting from
the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrSES 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.3 Gauge RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds
starting from the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrBBE 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.4 Gauge RO Current number of Background Block Errors
starting from the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonCurrIntegrity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.1.1.5 Integer RO Indicates the integrity of the entry.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalTable N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the last
day (in resolution of 15 min intervals).
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalEntry N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX
{ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalUAS RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per
interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalES RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalSES RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per
interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalBBE RO Current number of Background Block Errors per
interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonIntervalIntegrity RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayTable N/A This table defines/keeps the counters of the last
month (in resolution of days).
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayEntry N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
interval is of 24 hours and the oldest is 30.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayUAS RO The current number of Unavailable Seconds per
interval of 24 hours.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-14

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 10 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduPerfMonDayES RO Current number of Errored Seconds per interval of

24 hours.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDaySES RO Current number of Severely Errored Seconds per
interval of 24 hours.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayBBE RO Current number of Background Block Errors per
interval of 24 hours.
winlink1000OduPerfMonDayIntegrity RO Indicates the integrity of the entry per interval of 24
hours.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTable N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the
current 15 min interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrEntry N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table.
INDEX {ifIndex }
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMinRSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.1 Integer RO Current Min Received Level Reference starting
from the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMaxRSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.2 Integer RO Current Max Received Level Reference starting
from the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThresh1Ex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.3 Gauge RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level
ceed exceeded the RSL1 threshold in the last 15
minutes.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrRSLThresh2Ex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.4 Gauge RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level
ceed exceeded the RSL2 threshold in the last 15
minutes.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMinTSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.5 Integer RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level starting from
the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrMaxTSL 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.6 Integer RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level starting from
the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrTSLThresh1Ex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.7 Gauge RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level
ceed exceeded the TSL1 threshold in the last 15
minutes.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirCurrBBERThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.4.1.8 Gauge RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio
Exceed exceeded the BBER1 threshold in the last 15
minutes.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalTable N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the last
day (in resolution of 15 min intervals).
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalEntry N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX
{ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMinRSL RO Current Min Received Level Reference per
interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMaxRSL RO Current Max Received Level Reference per
interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalRSLThresh RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level
1Exceed exceeded the RSL1 threshold per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalRSLThresh RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level
2Exceed exceeded the RSL2 threshold ACCESS read-
only per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMinTSL RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalMaxTSL RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalTSLThresh RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level
1Exceed exceeded the TSL1 threshold per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirIntervalBBERThres RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio
h1Exceed exceeded the BBER1 threshold per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTable N/A This table defines/keeps the air counters of the last
month (in resolution of days).

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-15

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 11 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayEntry N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex

winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayIdx RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each Day
is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMinRSL RO Current Min Received Level Reference per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMaxRSL RO Current Max Received Level Reference per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSLThresh1Ex RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level
ceed exceeded the RSL1 threshold per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayRSLThresh2Ex RO Number of seconds Receive Signal Level
ceed exceeded the RSL2 threshold per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMinTSL RO Current Min Transmit Signal Level per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayMaxTSL RO Current Max Transmit Signal Level per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayTSLThresh1Ex RO Number of seconds Transmit Signal Level
ceed exceeded the TSL1 threshold per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonAirDayBBERThresh1 RO Number of seconds Background Block Error Ratio
Exceed exceeded the BBER1 threshold per Day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrTable N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of
the current 15 min interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrEntry N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table.
INDEX {ifIndex }
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrRxMBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.1 Gauge RO Current RX Mega Bytes starting from the present
15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrTxMBytes 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.2 Gauge RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes starting from the
present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrEthCapacityT 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.3 Gauge RO The number of times throughput was below
hreshUnder threshold in the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrHighTrafficThr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.4 Gauge RO The number of times actual traffic was above
eshExceed threshold in the present 15 minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCurrActiveSecond 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.7.1.5 Gauge RO The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet
s swervice was not blocked in the present 15
minutes period.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalTable N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of
the last day (in resolution of 15 min intervals).
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalEntry N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX
{ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalRxMBytes RO Current RX Mega Bytes per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalTxMBytes RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalEthCapacit RO The number of times throughput was below
yThreshUnder threshold in the each interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalHighTraffic RO The number of times actual traffic was above
ThreshExceed threshold in the each interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthIntervalActiveSeco RO The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet
nds service was not blocked in the each interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTable N/A This table defines/keeps the ethernet counters of
the last month (in resolution of days).
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayEntry N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayIdx RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each
interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayRxMBytes RO Current RX Mega Bytes per day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayTxMBytes RO Current Transmit Mega Bytes per day.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-16

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 12 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayEthCapacityTh RO The number of times throughput was below

reshUnder threshold each day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayHighTrafficThr RO The number of times actual traffic was above
eshExceed threshold each day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthDayActiveSeconds RO The number of seconds in which RPL Ethernet
service was not blocked each day.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrTable N/A This table defines/keeps the TDM counters of the
current 15 min interval.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrEntry N/A This is an entry in the Current Interval Table.
INDEX {ifIndex }
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmCurrActiveSecon 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.10.1.1 Gauge RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service
ds was active. Under TDM backup link the
parameter indicates whether the backup link
was active.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalTable N/A This table defines/keeps the TDM counters of the
last day (in resolution of 15 min intervals).
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalEntry N/A This is an entry in the Interval Table. INDEX
{ifIndex winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalIdx RO This table is indexed per interval number. Each
interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmIntervalActiveSec RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service
onds was active. Under TDM backup link the
parameter indicates whether the backup link was
active.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayTable N/A This table defines/keeps the TDM counters of the
last month (in resolution of days).
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayEntry N/A This is an entry in the Days Table. INDEX {ifIndex
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayIdx }
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayIdx RO This table is indexed per Day number. Each
interval is of 15 minutes and the oldest is 96.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTdmDayActiveSecond RO Parameter indicating whether the TDM service
s was active. Under TDM backup link the
parameter indicates whether the backup link was
active.
winlink1000OduPerfMonTxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.20 Integer RW When the Transmit power exceeds this threshold
a performance monitoring TSL1 counter is
incremented.
winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.21 Integer RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a
performance monitoring RSL1 counter is
incremented.
winlink1000OduPerfMonRxThresh2 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.22 Integer RW When the RX power exceeds this threshold a
performance monitoring RSL2 counter is
incremented.
winlink1000OduPerfMonBBERThresh1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.23 Integer RW When the BBER exceeds this threshold a
performance monitoring BBER counter is
incremented. The units are 1/10 of a percent.
winlink1000OduPerfMonEthCapacityThreshKb 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.24 Integer RW When the current throughput is below this
ps threshold the corresponding counter is
incremented
winlink1000OduPerfMonHighTrafficThreshKbp 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.6.25 Integer RW When the current traffic is above this threshold
s then corresponding counter is incremented.
winlink1000OduAgnGenAddTrapExt 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.1.1 Integer RW If 'yes' is chosen the ifIndex Unit Severity
Time_T and Alarm Id from the
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable will be bind
to the end of each private trap.
winlink1000OduAgnGenSetMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.1.2 Integer RW This parameter is reserved to the element
manager provided with the product.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-17

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 13 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAgnNTPCfgTimeServerIP 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.1 IpAddress RW IP address of the server from which the current
time is loaded.
winlink1000OduAgnNTPCfgTimeOffsetFromU 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.2 Integer RW Offset from Coordinated Universal Time (minutes).
TC Possible values: -1440..1440.
winlink1000OduAgnRealTimeAndDate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.2.3 OctetString RW This parameter specifies the real time and date
Format 'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS'
(Hexadecimal). A date-time specification:
field octets contents range ----- --
---- -------- ----- 1 1-2 year
0..65536 2 3 month 1..12
3 4 day 1..31 4 5 hour
0..23 5 6 minutes 0..59 6
7 seconds 0..60 (use 60
for leap-second) 7 8 deci-seconds
0..9 For example Tuesday May 26 1992
at 1:30:15 PM EDT would be displayed as: 07
c8 05 1a 0d 1e 0f 00 ( 1992 -5 -26 13:30:15 )
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmLastChange 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.1 Integer RO This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset
and is incremented upon each change in the
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable (either an
addition or removal of an entry).
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTable N/A This table includes the currently active alarms.
When a RAISED trap is sent an alarm entry
is added to the table. When a CLEAR trap is sent
the entry is removed.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmEntry N/A Entry containing the details of a currently RAISED
trap. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmCounter }
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmCounter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.2.1.1 Integer RO A running counter of active alarms. The counter is
incremented for every new RAISED trap. It is
cleared after a device reset.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmSeverity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.2.1.2 Integer RO Current Alarm severity.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmId 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.2.1.3 Integer RO Unique Alarm Identifier (combines alarm type and
interface). The same AlarmId is used for RAISED
and CLEARED alarms.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.2.1.4 Integer RO Interface Index where the alarm occurred. Alarms
that are not associated with a specific interface
will have the following value: 65535.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmUnit 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.2.1.5 Integer RO Unit associated with the alarm.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTrapID 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.2.1.6 Integer RO ID of the raised trap that was sent when this alarm
was raised.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmTimeT 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.2.1.7 Integer RO Timestamp of this alarm. This number is in
seconds from Midnight January 1st 1970.
winlink1000OduAgnCurrAlarmText 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.3.2.1.8 DisplayString RO Alarm display text (same as the text in the sent
trap).
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsNumber 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.1 Integer RO This counter indicates the size of the
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsTable
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsTable N/A This table includes the last events. When a trap is
sent an event entry is added to the table.
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsEntry N/A Entry containing the details of last traps. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsIndex }
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.1 Integer RO The index of the table
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsSeverity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.2 Integer RO Current Trap severity.
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsIfIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.3 Integer RO Interface Index where the event occurred. Traps
that are not associated with a specific interface
will have the following value: 65535.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-18

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 14 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsTimeT 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.4 Integer RO Timestamp of this trap. This number is in seconds

from Midnight January 1st 1970.
winlink1000OduAgnLastEventsText 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.1.7.4.2.1.5 DisplayString RO Trap display text (same as the text in the sent
trap).
winlink1000IduAdmProductType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.1 DisplayString RO IDU configuration description.
winlink1000IduAdmHwRev 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.2 DisplayString RO IDU Hardware Revision.
winlink1000IduAdmSwRev 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.3 DisplayString RO IDU Software Revision.
winlink1000OduAdmNumOfExternalAlarmIn 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.4 Integer RO Indicates the number of currently available
External Alarm Inputs.
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInTable N/A This is the External Alarm Inputs table.
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInEntry N/A Entry containing the elements of a single External
Alarm Input. INDEX {
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInIndex}
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.1 Integer RO This value indicates the index of the External
Alarm Input entry.
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInText 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.2 DisplayString RW This field describes the External Alarm Input. It is
an optional string of no more than 64 characters
which will be used in the event being sent as a
result of a change in the status of the External
Alarm Input. DEFVAL {Alarm Description}
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInAdminState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.3 Integer RW This value indicates if this External Alarm Input is
enabled or disabled.
winlink1000OduAdmExternAlarmInStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.5.1.4 Integer RO This value indicates the current status of the
External Alarm Input.
winlink1000IduAdmSN 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.6 DisplayString RO IDU Serial Number
winlink1000IduAdmIduDetectionMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.7 Integer RW The parameter defines whether to send Ethernet
frames to detect an IDU. The valid writable
values are: userDisabled (3) userEnabled (4). A
change requires a reset and is effective after reset.
winlink1000IduAdmMountedTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.8 Integer RO Number of mounted trunks in the IDU
winlink1000IduAdmLicensedTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.9 Integer RO Number of Licensed Trunks in the IDU
winlink1000IduAdmVlanSupported 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.10 Integer RO Identifies if the local IDU supports VLAN tag/untag
winlink1000IduAdmVlanEgressMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.11 DisplayString RW VLAN tag/untag egress values
winlink1000IduAdmVlanIngressMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.12 DisplayString RW VLAN tag/untag ingress values
winlink1000IduAdmVlanDefaultPortVIDs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.13 DisplayString RW VLAN tag/untag default VLAN ids for each port -
Right most digit is Vlan priority (0-6) other digits
compose Vlan Id (1-4094)
winlink1000IduAdmVlanLan1UntaggedVIDs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.14 DisplayString RW VLAN untagged VIDs for LAN1 port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanLan2UntaggedVIDs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.15 DisplayString RW VLAN untagged VIDs for LAN2 port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanSfpUntaggedVIDs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.16 DisplayString RW VLAN untagged VIDs for Sfp port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanLan1FilteredVIDs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.17 DisplayString RW VLAN filtered VIDs for LAN1 port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanLan2FilteredVIDs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.18 DisplayString RW VLAN filtered VIDs for LAN2 port
winlink1000IduAdmVlanSfpFilteredVIDs 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.1.19 DisplayString RW VLAN filtered VIDs for Sfp port
winlink1000IduSrvDesiredTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.2 Integer RW Required trunks bitmap. Note that the number of
possible trunks that can be configured may vary
based on the IDU hardware configuration the
selected air interface rate and the range of the
installation. The provided Manager application
enables the user to select only available
configurations. A change is effective immediately
if applied to a master unit and the link is in service
mode.
winlink1000IduSrvServices 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.4 ObjectID RO This parameter is reserved to the Manager
application provided with the product.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-19

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 15 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000IduSrvActiveTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.6 Integer RO A bitmap describing the currently open TDM

trunks.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailableTrunks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.8 Integer RO A bitmap describing the number of TDM trunks
that can be opened in the current configuration.
The values take into account the IDU hardware
configuration the air rate and the installation
range.
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesTable N/A IDU Possible Services table.
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesEntry N/A IDU Services table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesIndex }
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleServicesIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.1 Integer RO Table index Rate index of the air interface.
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleTdmServices 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.2 Integer RO Deprecated parameter. A bitmap describing the
TDM trunks that can be opened in the
corresponding Air Rate.
winlink1000IduSrvPossibleEthServices 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.3 Integer RO Deprecated parameter. This parameter describes
if the Ethernet Service can be opened in the
corresponding Air Rate. The valid values are:
disabled (0) enabled (1).
winlink1000IduSrvRemainingRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.4 Integer RO Current Ethernet bandwidth in bps per air rate.
winlink1000IduSrvTrunkCost 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.10.1.5 Integer RO Cost of the TDM Service in bps.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesTable N/A ODU Possible TDM Services table.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesEntry N/A ODU TDM Services table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesIndex }
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.1 Integer RO Table index. The index is the bit mask of the TDM
service.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.2 Integer RO Represents the TDM service availability.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMinRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.3 Integer RO Minimum rate index of the air interface which make
the service possible.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesMaxRateIdx 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.4 Integer RO Maximum rate index of the air interface which
make the service possible.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailServicesReason 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.11.1.5 Integer RO Information about the TDM Service availability. -
Not Applicable if the service is available. The
reasons for TDM Service unavailability: - The
available throughput isn't sufficient for Service
demands; - The IDU HW doesn't support the
service; - A Link Password mismatch was
detected; - The external pulse type detected is
improper for TDM services; - A Software
versions mismatch was detected. - A-Symetric
TDD Mode Is Obligated.
winlink1000IduSrvEthActive 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.12 Integer RO Represents the Ethernet service activation state.
winlink1000IduSrvEthAvailable 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.13 Integer RO Represents the Ethernet service availability state.
winlink1000IduSrvEthThroughput 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.14 Gauge RO Current available Ethernet service throughput in
bps.
winlink1000IduSrvEthMaxInfoRate 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.15 Integer RW Holds the maximum bandwidth (kbps) to be
allocated for Ethernet service. Value of zero
means that Ethernet service works as best effort.
The maximum value is product specific. Refer to
the user manual.
winlink1000IduSrvAvailableTrunksT1 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.2.16 Integer RO A bitmap describing the TDM trunks that can be
opened under T1 configuration. The values take
into account the IDU hardware configuration the
air rate and the installation range.
winlink1000IduEthernetIfTable N/A IDU Ethernet Interface table.
winlink1000IduEthernetIfEntry N/A IDU Ethernet Interface table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduEthernetIfIndex }

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-20

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 16 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000IduEthernetIfIndex RO If Index corresponding to this Interface.

winlink1000IduEthernetIfAddress 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.3.1.1.5 DisplayString RO IDU MAC address.
winlink1000IduEthernetNumOfLanPorts 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.3.3 Integer RO Number of LAN interfaces in the IDU.
winlink1000IduEthernetNumOfSfpPorts 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.3.4 Integer RO The number of SFP interfaces in the IDU.
winlink1000IduEthernetSfpProperties 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.3.5 DisplayString RO SFP venfor properties : Vendor Name PN and
Revision.
winlink1000IduBridgeTpAging 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.4.4.2 Integer RW Timeout in seconds for aging. Note that for this
parameter to be effective the ODU must be
configured to HUB mode. A change is effective
immediately.
winlink1000IduTdmTxClockAvailStates 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.1.1 Integer RO Available states of the TDM Transmit Clock
Control each input status is represented by a bit.
When the state is available the bit value is 1.
When the state is unavailable the bit value is 0.
The available states are: bit 2 = Transparent bit
3 = Local Loop Timed bit 4 = Remote Loop Timed
bit 5 = Local Internal bit 6 = Remote Internal
winlink1000IduTdmTxClockDesiredState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.1.2 Integer RW Required state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control.
A change is effective after re-activation of the TDM
service.
winlink1000IduTdmTxClockActualState 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.1.3 Integer RO Actual state of the TDM Transmit Clock Control.
winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockAvailOptions 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.2.1 Integer RO Available options of the TDM Master Clock Control
each input status is represented by a bit. When
the option is available the bit value is 1. When the
option is unavailable the bit value is 0. The
available options are: bit 2 = Automatic bit 3 =
Trunk #1 bit 4 = Trunk #2 bit 5 = Trunk #3 bit 6
= Trunk #4 When no options are available the
returned value is: 1
winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockDesired 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.2.2 Integer RW Required TDM Master Clock. A change is effective
after re-activation of the TDM service.
winlink1000IduTdmMasterClockActual 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.2.3 Integer RO Actual Trunk used for TDM Master Clock.
winlink1000IduTdmConfigTable N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table.
winlink1000IduTdmConfigEntry N/A IDU TDM Links Configuration table entry. INDEX
{ winlink1000IduTdmConfigIndex }
winlink1000IduTdmConfigIndex RO Table index.
winlink1000IduTdmIfIndex RO Link index in the interface table.
winlink1000IduTdmLineCoding 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.6.1.6 Integer RW This parameter applies to T1 trunks only. The
parameter controls the line coding. Setting the
value to each of the indices applies to all. A
change is effective after the next open of the TDM
service.
winlink1000IduTdmLoopbackConfig 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.6.1.9 Integer RW Loop back configuration table. Each of the trunks
can be set Normal Line loop back or Reverse line
loop back. A change is effective immediately.
winlink1000IduTdmLineStatus 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.6.1.10 Integer RO Line status.
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentTable N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table.
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentEntry N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentIndex }
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentIndex RO Table index (Same as
winlink1000IduTdmLineIndex).
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentBlocks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.101 Counter RO Number of correct blocks transmitted to the line.
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.102 Counter RO Number of error blocks transmitted to the line.
winlink1000IduTdmCurrentTxClock 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.103 Integer RW TDM Transmit Clock. A change is effective after
re-activation of the TDM service.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-21

 MIB Parameters Appendix D

Table D-2: Private MIB Parameters (Sheet 17 of 17)

Access
Name OID Type Description

winlink1000IduTdmCurrentBlocksHigh 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.7.1.104 Counter RO High part of the 64 bits counter Current Blocks
winlink1000IduTdmRemoteQual 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.8 Integer RO Estimated average interval between error second
events. The valid values are 1-2^31 where a
value of -1 is used to indicate an undefined state.
winlink1000IduTdmRemoteQualEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.9 Integer RO Estimated average interval between error second
events during evaluation process. The valid
values are 1-2^31 where a value of -1 is used to
indicate an undefined state.
winlink1000IduTdmSrvEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.10 Integer RW Evaluated TDM service bit mask. Setting this
parameter to value that is bigger than the activated
TDM service bit mask will execute the evaluation
process for 30 seconds. Setting this parameter to
0 will stop the evaluation process immediately.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupAvailableLinks 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.11 Integer RO Number of TDM backup trunks.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupTable N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupEntry N/A IDU TDM Links Statistics table entry. INDEX {
winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex }
winlink1000IduTdmBackupIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.12.1.1 Integer RO Table index.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.12.1.2 Integer RW TDM backup mode: Enable or Disable where the
main link is the air link or the external link.
Changes will be effective immediatly.
winlink1000IduTdmBackupCurrentActiveLink 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.12.1.3 Integer RO TDM backup current active link: N/A air link is
active or external link is active.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.13 Integer RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The value must be
between the minimum and the maximum TDM
Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x
millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferDefaultSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.14 Integer RO TDM Jitter Buffer Default Size. The units are 0.1 x
millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMinSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.15 Integer RO TDM Jitter Buffer Minimum Size. The units are 0.1
x millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferMaxSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.16 Integer RO TDM Jitter Buffer Maximum Size. The units are 0.1
x millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmJitterBufferSizeEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.17 Integer RW TDM Jitter Buffer Size for evaluation. The value
must be between the minimum and the maximum
TDM Jitter Buffer Size. The units are 0.1 x
millisecond.
winlink1000IduTdmType 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.18 Integer RW TDM Type (The value undefined is read-only).
winlink1000IduTdmTypeEval 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.19 Integer RW TDM Type for evaluation.
winlink1000IduTdmLineStatusStr 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.20 DisplayString RO Line status.
winlink1000IduTdmHotStandbySupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.21 Integer RO Indicates if Hot Standby is supported.
winlink1000IduTdmDesiredHotStandbyMode 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.22 Integer RW Desired Hot Standby Mode.
winlink1000IduTdmHotStandbyOperationStatu 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.23 Integer RO The Link Actual Status.
s
winlink1000IduTdmBackupLinkConfiguration 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.2.6.24 Integer RW The current configuration of the backup link.
winlink1000GeneralTrapDescription 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.1 DisplayString RO Trap's Description. Used for Trap parameters.
winlink1000GeneralTrapSeverity 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.2 Integer RO Trap's Severity. Used for Trap parameters.
winlink1000GeneralCookie 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.3 DisplayString RW Reserved for the Manager application provided
with the product used for saving user preferences
affecting ODU operation.
winlink1000GeneralEcChangesCounter 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.4 Integer RO This counter is initialized to 0 after a device reset
and is incremented upon each element constant
write operation via SNMP or Telnet.
winlink1000GeneralTelnetSupport 1.3.6.1.4.1.4458.1000.100.5 Integer RW Enable/Disable Telnet protocol.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-22

MIB Traps Appendix D

MIB Traps

General
Each ODU can be configured with up to 10 different trap destinations. When
the link is operational, each ODU sends traps originating from both Site A
and Site B.
The source IP address of the trap is the sending ODU. The trap originator
can be identified by the trap Community string or by the trap description
text.
Each trap contains a trap description and additional relevant information
such as alarm severity, interface index, time stamp and additional parame-
ters.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-23

 Trap Parameters Appendix D

Trap Parameters
Table D-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 1 of 5)
Name ID Severity Description
trunkStateChanged 1 normal Indicates a change in the state of one of the TDM trunks. Raised by both
sides of the link. Contains 3 parameters: 1 - Description: TDM Interface
%n - %x 2 - %n: Is the trunk number 3 - %x: Is the alarm type and can
be one of the following: Normal AIS LOS Loopback
linkUp 2 normal Indicates that the radio link is up. Contains a single parameter which is
its description: 1 - Description: Radio Link - Sync on channel %n GHz.
%n Is the channel frequency in GHz.
linkDown 3 critical Indicates that the radio link is down. Contains a single parameter which
is its description: 1 - Description: Radio Link - Out of Sync. The reason
is: %s. %s Is the reason.
detectIDU 4 normal Indicates that the IDU was detected. Raised by both sides of the link.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
IDU of Type %s was Detected. %s Is the type of the IDU.
disconnectIDU 5 major Indicates that the IDU was disconnected. Raised by both sides of the
link. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: IDU Disconnected.
mismatchIDU 6 major Indicates a mismatch between the IDUs. Raised by the master only.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
IDUs Mismatch: One Side is %s and the Other is %s. %s Is the type of
the IDU.
openedServices 7 normal Indicates that services were opened. Raised by the master only.
Contains 3 parameters: 1 - Description: %n2 out of %n1 Requested
TDM Trunks have been Opened 2 - %n1: Is the requested number of
TDM truncks 3 - %n2: Is the actual number of TDM trunks that were
opened
closedServices 8 normal Indicates that services were closed. Raised by the master only.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
TDM Service has been closed. The reason is: %s. %s Is the reason.
incompatibleODUs 9 critical Indicates that the ODUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Incompatible ODUs.
incompatibleIDUs 10 major Indicates that the IDUs are incompatible. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Incompatible IDUs.
incompatibleOduIdu 11 major Indicates that the ODU and IDU are incompatible. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: The IDU could not be
loaded. The reason is: %s. %s Is the incompatibility type.
probingChannel 12 normal Indicates that the ODU is monitoring radar activity. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Monitoring for radar
activity on channel %n GHz. %n is the channel frequency in GHz.
radarDetected 13 normal Indicates that radar activity was detected. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Radar activity was detected in
%s on channel %n GHz. %s Is the site name. %n Is the channel
frequency in GHz.
transmittingOnChannel 14 normal Indicates that the ODU is transmitting on channel. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Transmitting on
channel %n GHz. %n Is the channel frequency in GHz.
scanningChannels 15 normal Indicates that the ODU is scanning channels. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Channel scanning in
progress.
incompatiblePartner 16 critical Indicates that configuration problem was detected and that link
installation is required in order to fix it. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Configuration problem detected.
Link installation required.
timeClockSet 17 normal Indicates that the ODU time clock was set. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: The time was set to: %p. %p Is
the date and time.
configurationChanged 18 normal Indicates that the ODU recovered from an error but there are
configuration changes. Contains two parameters: 1 - Description:
Configuration changed. Error code is: %n. 2 - %n number.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-24

 Trap Parameters Appendix D

Table D-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 2 of 5)

Name ID Severity Description
hssOpStateChangedToINU 19 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to INU type.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
HSS operating state was changed to: INU.
hssOpStateChangedToHSM 20 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to HSM type.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
HSS operating state was changed to: HSM.
hssOpStateChangedToHSC 21 normal Indicates that the HSS operating state was changed to HSC type.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
HSS operating state was changed to: HSC_DT/HSC_CT.
vlanModeActive 22 normal Indicates to non-VLAN PC that after 2 minutes the system will support
only VLAN tag on management interface. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: VLAN Mode is active. Non-VLAN
traffic will be blocked in 2 minutes.
spectrumAnalysis 23 normal Indicates that the ODU is in Spectrum Analysis mode. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Spectrum analysis in
progress.
tdmServiceAlarm 100 major Indicates that TDM Service is in alarm state. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service - Alarm.
ethServiceClosed 101 major Indicates that Ethernet Service is closed. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Ethernet Service is closed.
ethServiceNotPermitted 102 major Indicates that Ethernet Service is not permitted. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: A valid IDU could not
be detected at %s. Please check your configuration. %s - Is the Local
Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link.
encryptionAlarm 103 major Indicates an encryption key mismatch. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Encryption Status - Failed. No
Services are available.
changeLinkPasswordAlarm 104 major Indicates that a failure has occurred while attempting to change the Link
Password. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Failed to change the Link Password at/on: %s. %s - Is the
Local Site name or Remote Site name or both sides of the Link.
externalAlarmInPort1Alarm 105 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of
port #1. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 1 - <User Text> - Alarm.
externalAlarmInPort2Alarm 106 majorl The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of
port #2. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 2 - <User Text> - Alarm.
bitFailedAlarm 107 major The trap is sent if there is no way to recover from the situation.Contains
two parameters: 1 - Description: ODU power up built in test failed. Error
code is: %n 2 - %n number
wrongConfigurationLoadedAlarm 108 major The trap is sent if there is a way to recover from the situation.Contains
two parameters: 1 - Description: Wrong configuration loaded. Error code
is: %n 2 - %n number
lanPort1DisconnectedAlarm 109 major Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to disconnected.Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: LAN port 1
status changed to disconnected.
lanPort2DisconnectedAlarm 110 major Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to disconnected.Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: LAN port 2
status changed to disconnected.
mngPortDisconnectedAlarm 111 major Indicates the management port status changed to disconnected.Contains
a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Management
port status changed to disconnected.
externalAlarmInPort3Alarm 112 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of
port #3. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 3 - <User Text> - Alarm.
externalAlarmInPort4Alarm 113 major The trap is sent every time an alarm occurs in the External Alarm Input of
port #4. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 4 - <User Text> - Alarm.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-25

 Trap Parameters Appendix D

Table D-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 3 of 5)

Name ID Severity Description
swVersionsMismatchFullCompatibilityAlarm 114 warning The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch with full link functionality.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
Software versions mismatch - full link functionality
swVersionsMismatchRestrictedCompatibilityAlarm 115 minor The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch with restricted link functionality.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
Software versions mismatch - restricted link functionality
swVersionsMismatchSoftwareUpgradeRequired 116 major The trap is sent if SW versions mismatch and SW upgrade is required.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
Software versions mismatch - Software upgrade required
swVersionsIncompatible 117 critical The trap is sent if SW versions are incompatible. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: SW Versions
incompatible
hssMultipleSourcesDetectedAlarm 118 major Indicates that multiple sync pulse sources were detected. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: HSS multiple
sync sources were detected.
hssSyncToProperSourceStoppedAlarm 119 major Indicates that synchronization to a proper sync pulse source was
stopped. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: HSS sync pulse - Down. The reason is: %s. %s - Is the
reason for the sync down.
hssSyncPulseDetectedAlarm 120 major Indicates that HSS additional sync pulse was detected. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: HSS additional
sync pulse was detected.
tdmBackupAlarm 121 major Indicates that the TDM backup link was activated. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM backup alarm -
backup link was activated.
linkLockUnauthorizedRemoteODU 122 major Indicates that the remote ODU is unauthorized. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Unauthorized remote
ODU connection rejected.
linkLockUnauthorizedODU 123 major Indicates that the ODU is unauthorized. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Unauthorized ODU connection
rejected.
hotStandbyAlarm 124 major Indicates that the hot standby secondary link was activated. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Secondary
Link Is Active.
sfpInsertion 126 normal Indicates that a device was inserted to SFP Port
sfpPort1DisconnectedAlarm 127 major Indicates the SFP port 1 status changed to disconnected.Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: SFP port 1
status changed to disconnected.
desiredRatioCanNotBeAppliedAlarm 129 normal Indicates Desired UL/DL RAtio Can Not Be Applied.
cbwMismatch 130 major Indicates that a Channel Bandwidth mismatch was detected.Contains two
parameters: 1 - Description: Channel Bandwidth Mismatch: one side is
%n0 MHz and the other is %n1 MHz. %n0 is the local Channel
Bandwidth value in MHz. %n1 is the remoet Channel Bandwidth value in
MHz.
gpsNotSynchronized 131 major Indicates that the GPS is not synchronized with satellites. Pulses are
self generated.
tdmServiceClear 200 major Indicates that TDM Service fault is cleared. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM Service - Normal.
ethServiceOpened 201 normal Indicates that Ethernet Service has been opened. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Ethernet Service has
been opened.
encryptionClear 203 normal Indicates that encryption is OK. Contains a single parameter which is its
description: 1 - Description: Encryption Status - Normal.
changeLinkPasswordClear 204 normal Indicates that the Link Password was changed successfully. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Link Password
has been changed at/on: %s. %s - Is the Local Site name or Remote
Site name or both sides of the Link.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-26

 Trap Parameters Appendix D

Table D-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 4 of 5)

Name ID Severity Description
externalAlarmInPort1Clear 205 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 1 is
cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 1 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared.
externalAlarmInPort2Clear 206 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 2 is
cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 2 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared.
lanPort1Clear 209 normal Indicates the LAN port 1 status changed to connected. Contains two
parameters: 1 - Description: LAN port 1 status changed to connected -
%s 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex)
lanPort2Clear 210 normal Indicates the LAN port 2 status changed to connected. Contains two
parameters: 1 - Description: LAN port 2 status changed to connected -
%s. 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex).
mngPortClear 211 normal Indicates the management port status changed to connected. Contains
two parameters: 1 - Description: Management port status changed to
connected - %s 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex)
externalAlarmInPort3Clear 212 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 3 is
cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 3 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared.
externalAlarmInPort4Clear 213 normal This Trap is sent every time an External Alarm Input fault of port # 4 is
cleared. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: External Alarm 4 - <User Text> - Alarm Cleared.
swVersionsMatchFullCompatibilityClear 214 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Software Versions compatible
swVersionsMatchRestrictedCompatibilityClear 215 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match and link functionality is not
restricted. Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 -
Description: Software Versions compatible
swVersionsMatchSoftwareUpgradeRequiredClear 216 normal The trap is sent if SW versions match and SW upgrade is successful.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
Software Versions compatible
swVersionsCompatibleClear 217 normal The trap is sent if SW versions compatible Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Software Versions compatible
hssMultipleSourcesDisappearedClear 218 normal Indicates that multiple sync pulse sources disappeared. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: HSS multiple
sync pulse sources disappeared.
hssSyncToProperSourceAchievedClear 219 normal Indicates that synchronization to a proper Sync source was achieved.
Contains a single parameter which is its description: 1 - Description:
HSS sync pulse - Up.
hssSyncPulseDisappearedClear 220 normal Indicates that HSS additional sync pulse disappeared. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: HSS additional sync
pulse was disappeared.
tdmBackupClear 221 normal Indicates that the TDM main link was activated. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: TDM main link was
activated.
linkLockAuthorizedRemoteODU 222 normal Indicates that the remote ODU is authorized. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Authorized remote
ODU connection accepted.
linkLockAuthorizedODU 223 normal Indicates that the ODU is authorized. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Authorized ODU connection
permitted.
linkAuthenticationDisabled 224 normal Indicates that the Link Lock is disabled. Contains a single parameter
which is its description: 1 - Description: Link Authentication has been
disabled.
hotStandbyClear 225 normal Indicates that the Primary Link Was Activated. Contains a single
parameter which is its description: 1 - Description: Primary Link Is
Active.
sfpExtraction 226 normal Indicates that a device was extracted from SFP Port
sfpPort1Clear 227 normal Indicates the SFP port 1 status changed to connected. Contains two
parameters: 1 - Description: SFP port 1 status changed to connected -
%s 2 - %s Is the Eth. mode (speed & duplex)

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-27

 RADWIN Manager Traps Appendix D

Table D-3: MIB Traps (Sheet 5 of 5)

Name ID Severity Description
compatibleIdus 228 normal Indicates that the ODU has identified compatible Idus on both sides of the
link.
desiredRatioCanNotBeAppliedClear 229 normal Indicates Current UL/DL Ratio Is Equal To Desired Ratio.
cbwMatch 230 normal Indicates that a Channel Bandwidth match was detected. Contains a
single parameter which is its description: 1 - Channel Bandwidth value
in MHz.
switchCbwAndChannel 231 normal Indicates that the system is switching Channel Bandwidth and channel
frequency. Contains two parameters: 1 - Switching to Channel
Bandwith %n0 MHz and to channel %n1 GHz.
ringRplStateIdle 232 normal RPL state changed to Idle.
ringEthServiceStatus 233 normal Indicates Ethernet service's state - blocked \ unblocked. Contains a
single parameter: 1 - Description: Ethernet's state (blocked \ unblocked)
ringFirstRpmReceived 234 normal Ring application: in non-RPL link indicates first from a specific RPL was
received. Contains a single parameter: 1 - Description: RPM's VLAN ID
ringEthernetSrviceUnblockedTO 235 normal Ring application: in non-RPL link Ethernet service is unblocked due to
RPM timeout.
gpsSynchronized 236 normal Indicates that the GPS is synchronized with satellites.

RADWIN Manager Traps

The RADWIN Manager application issues traps to indicate various events.
These traps are shown in the RADWIN Managerr Events Log.
A list of Trap Messages as displayed by the RADWIN Manager is shown in
Table 9-5.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 D-28

 Appendix E

External Alarms
Specification
External Alarms Specification
The IDU-C and new style IDU-E support external input and output alarms
through a standard DB25 pin female connector (see page B-3 for pinout
details).
Input alarms
The input alarms are raised by events from external equipment, such as
a fire warning, door open or air conditioner failure. They are user
defined.
Output alarms
Output alarms are generated through dry contact relays to indicate vari-
ous system events such as sync loss or disconnection. An alarm is raised
if at least one of the conditions in one of the tables below, is met.

IDU-C and new style IDU-E Alarms

Table E-1: IDU-C/E - Output Alarms Description
Alarm Description Alarm On Conditions Alarm Off Condition

• Link is down
Output 1 Air interface Alarm • Link in installation mode Link is up or equipment alarm is ON
• Link authentication problem

• Built in Test (BIT) error Both ODU and IDU are in operational
Output 2 Equipment Alarm
• No connection to the ODU state

Output 3 Service Alarm at Site B N/A Permanently off

Link is up or down without power failure

Output 4 Power Failure at Site B Link Loss due to Power Failure at Site B
indication within the last two seconds

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 E-1

IDU-C and new style IDU-E Alarms Appendix E

Table E-2: IDU-C - Input Alarms Description

Alarm On Alarm Off
Alarm Description
Conditions Condition

Input 1
Input 2 User Defined Voltage in range
Voltage > 0VDC
Input 3 External Alarm -10 to -50VDC

Input 4

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 E-2

 Appendix F

RF Exposure
The antennas used for the following transmitters must be installed so as to
provide a minimum separation distance from by-standers as specified in the
following tables:

Table F-1: Safety Distances for RADWIN 2000 FCC and IC Products
Frequency Antenna Min. Safety
FCC ID IC ID
Band [GHz] gain [dBi] Distance [cm]

5.8 Q3KRW2058 5100A-RW2054 28 223

5.8 Q3KRW2058 5100A-RW2054 24 141

5.3/5.4 Q3KRW2054 5100A-RW2054 23.5 / 28 20

4.9 Q3KRW2049 5100A-RW2054 28 225

4.9 Q3KRW2049 5100A-RW2054 21 113

2.4 Q3KRW2024 5100A-RW2054 19 39

2.4 Q3KRW2024I 5100A-RW2024I 17.5 40

Table F-2: Safety Distances for RADWIN 2000 ETSI Products

Frequency Antenna Min. Safety
Band [GHz] gain [dBi] Distance [cm]

5.8 24 / 28 16

5.4 23.5 / 28 9

5.3 23.5 / 28 4

2.4 19 / 17.5 3

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 F-1

 Appendix G

Regional Notice: French

Canadian
Procédures de sécurité

Généralités
Avant de manipuler du matériel connecté à des lignes électriques ou de
télécommunications, il est conseillé de se défaire de bijoux ou de tout autre
objet métallique qui pourrait entrer en contact avec les éléments sous ten-
sion.

Mise à la terre
Tous les produits RADWIN doivent être mis à la terre pendant l'usage cou-
rant. La mise à la terre est assurée en reliant la fiche d'alimentation à une
prise de courant avec une protection de terre. En outre:
• La cosse de masse sur l'IDU-C doit être constamment connectée à
la protection de terre, par un câble de diamètre de 18 AWG ou plus.
Le matériel monté sur rack doit être installé seulement sur des racks
ou armoires reliés à la terre
• Une ODU doit mise à la terre par un câble de diamètre de 12 AWG
ou plus
• Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d'interrupteurs sur la connection
à la terre
De plus:
• Il faut toujours connecter la terre en premier et la déconnecter en
dernier
• Il ne faut jamais connecter les câbles de télécommunication à du
matériel non à la terre
• Il faut s'assurer que tous les autres câbles sont déconnectés avant
de déconnecter la terre

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 G-1

Protection contre la foudre Appendix G

Protection contre la foudre

L'utilisation de dispositifs de protection contre la foudre dépend des exi-
gences réglementaires et de l'utilisateur final. Toutes les unités extérieures
RADWIN sont conçues avec des circuits de limitation de surtension afin de
minimiser les risques de dommages dus à la foudre. RADWIN conseille l'util-
isation d'un dispositif de parafoudre supplémentaire afin de protéger le
matériel de coups de foudre proches.
Matériel supplémentaire requis
L'équipement requis pour l'installation du matériel est le suivant:
• Pince à sertir RJ-45 (si un câble pré-assemblé ODU/IDU n'est pas
utilisé)
• Perceuse (pour le montage sur mur seulement)
• Câbles de terre IDU et ODU
• Clef 13 mm (½″)
• Câble ODU - IDU si non commandé (type extérieur, CAT-5e, 4 paires
torsadées, 24 AWG)
• Colliers de serrage
• Ordinateur portable avec Windows 2000 ou Windows XP.

Précautions de sécurité pendant le montage de ODU

Avant de connecter un câble à l'ODU, la borne protectrice de masse (visse)
de l'ODU doit être connectée à un conducteur externe protecteur ou à un
pylône relié à la terre. Il ne doit pas y avoir de fusibles ou d'interrupteurs
sur la connection à la terre.
Seulement un personnel qualifié utilisant l'équipement de sécurité approprié
doit pouvoir monter sur le pylône d'antenne. De même, l'installation ou le
démontage de ODU ou de pylônes doit être effectuée seulement par des
professionnels ayant suivi une formation.

¾ Pour monter l'ODU:

1. Vérifier que les supports de fixation de l'ODU sont correctement mis à la
terre.
2. Monter l'unité ODU sur le pylône ou sur le mur; se référer à la Installa-
tion sur pylône et mur au dessous.
3. Connecter la câble de terre au point de châssis sur l'ODU.
4. Relier le câble ODU-IDU au connecteur ODU RJ-45.
5. Visser les presses-étoupe de câbles pour assurer le scellement hermé-
tique des unités ODU.
6. Attacher le câble au pylône ou aux supports en utilisant des colliers clas-
sés UV.
7. Répéter la procédure sur le site distant.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 G-2

Connecter la terre à IDU-C Appendix G

Ne pas se placer en face d'une ODU sous tension.

Prudence

Connecter la terre à IDU-C

Connecter un câble de terre de 18 AWG à la borne de masse de l'appareil.
L'appareil doit être constamment connecté à la terre.

• Les appareils sont prévus pour être installés par un personnel de service.
• Les appareils doivent être connectés à une prise de courant avec une protection de terre.
• Le courant CC du IDU-C doit être fourni par l'intermédiaire d'un disjoncteur bipolaire et le
Prudence diamètre du câble doit être de 14 mm avec un conduit de 16 mm.

Installation sur pylône et mur

L' ODU ou l'O-PoE peuvent être montés sur un pylône ou un mur.

Contenu du kit de montage ODU

Le kit de montage ODU comprend les pièces suivantes:
• une grande clame (voir Figure G-1)
• une petite clame (voir Figure G-2)
• un bras (voir Figure G-3)
• quatre visses hex tête M8x40
• deux visses hex tête M8x70
• quatre rondelles plates M8
• trois rondelles élastiques M8
• deux écrous M8.

Figure G-1: grande clame Figure G-2: petite clame Figure G-3: bras

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 G-3

Montage sur un pylône Appendix G

Montage sur un pylône

Figure G-4: Montage sur un pylône

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 G-4

Montage sur un mur Appendix G

Montage sur un mur

Figure G-5: Montage sur un mur

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 G-5

Montage d'une antenne externe Appendix G

Montage d'une antenne externe

L'antenne externe optionnelle peut être montée sur un pylône.

Contenu du kit de montage d'une antenne externe

Le kit de montage d'une antenne externe comprend les pièces suivantes
• Douze rondelles plates
• Huit rondelles élastiques
• Huit écrous hex
• Quatre boulons
• Un support en U
• Un support à pivotement
• Deux courroies de fixation en métal

¾ Pour installer une antenne externe sur un pylône:

1. Attacher le support en U à l'arrière de l'antenne en utilisant quatre ron-
delles plates, quatre rondelles élastiques et quatre écrous hex.
2. Attacher le support à pivotement au support en U en utilisant huit ron-
delles plates, quatre rondelles élastiques, quatre écrous hex et quatre
boulons.
3. Passer les deux courroies de fixation par les fentes verticales dans le sup-
port à pivotement.
4. Attacher l'antenne au pylône en utilisant les deux courroies de fixation .
Ajuster l'inclinaison nécessaire en utilisant l'échelle angulaire et serrer tous
les boulons et écrous à la position requise.

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 G-6

 Index
A Automatic Adaptive Rate, see AAR 1-4
Index

Automatic Channel Selection, see ACS

AAR 1-4 Automatic Repeat Request 1-4
ACS 2-7, 8-26
aging time, ODU Bridge Mode 8-16 B
Air Interface 1-12, 1-12
Backup 8-24
Technical Specifications, general A-1
backup
Alarms
ODU replacement 9-21
Active
Backup and restore software, ODU 8-24
summary 9-18
Band
Connector B-3
and DFS 20-5
External , specification E-1
available 1-8
Antennas
Changing 20-1
Air rates 2-11
defaults 1-8, 20-3
Align with beeper 4-13
license key 1-8
Aligning 4-13
Beeper
bipolar 4-13
mute 8-25
Buzzer signals 4-14
muting and restoring 8-2
monopolar 4-15
restore 8-25
Cable, grounding 18-1
Bridge mode,Telnet commands 8-27
Connecting 4-13
BRS
Described 1-11
Installation 16-1
Diversity Mode 2-10
External 1-11 C
Mounting 4-7
Package Contents 4-5 Changing link password 2-5
External, Mounting 17-3 Channel, selecting 2-7
MIMO - Diversity settings 2-11 Clock configuration, TDM 2-27
MIMO Mode 2-10 Community Strings
Single and dual 2-9 Changing 8-11
types 1-8 Editing 8-10
Applications Forgotten passwords 8-11
Broadband Access 1-3, 1-3 MIB D-2
Cellular Backhaul 1-2 Read-Only 8-10
Private Networks 1-3 Read-Write 8-10
WiMAX 1-3 Trap 8-10
Asymmetric Ethernet Configuration Parameters 8-3
and Collocation 2-19 Configuring
and TDM services 2-20 Advanced 8-2, 8-15, 8-17, 8-19
Installation 2-18 Air Interface 8-2
Restrictions 2-19 Air interface 7-1
Transmission ratio 2-18, 6-5 contact person 8-2
Date and Time 8-2
Date and time 8-1
Ethernet settings 8-1
External alarms 8-1

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release 2.5.00 Index 1

 Frequency channel 7-1 Transmission Phase 11-3, 11-9
HSS 8-1 Tx Transmission Ratio 11-9
Security 8-2 use
Security settings 8-1 functionality
Service parameters 7-1 scenarios 11-1
System 8-2 GUS
System parameters 7-1 and RFP 11-8
System settings 8-1
TDM MHS status 8-1 H
Tx Power and antenna 8-1 HSS 10-1
View Inventory 8-2 and asymmetric allocation<$endtrange 2-19,
Connecting user equipment 2-7 10-12
Customer Support 9-22 Hardware Installation 10-3
IDU-C front panel LEDs 4-11, 10-13
D ODU/HSS Connection Pinout 10-7, B-1
Date and time, setting 8-2, 8-13 Radio Frame Pattern Table 10-7
DC Power HSS Client 10-2
terminal pinout B-4 Continue Transmission 10-3
DFS 16-1 Disable Transmission 10-3
changing band for 20-5 HSS Master 10-2
Configuration 16-4 Hub Site Synchronization, see HSS
FCC/IC DFS Installation Procedure 16-1
Link Activation 16-1 I
IDU
E Aging time 8-16
Ethernet Ring 13-1 aging time, ODU Bridge Mode 8-16
1+1 13-6 Connecting to ODU 4-12
operation 13-2 described 1-8
Protection Switching 13-5 IDU-C
purpose 13-1 Alarm Connector B-3
setting up, ff 13-7 Front panel 1-9, 1-9
supported topologies 13-4 Described 4-10
terminology 13-1 LEDs 4-10, 4-11, 5-3
Events Front panel LEDs for HSS
color codes 9-17 LEDs 4-11, 10-13
log 9-2, 9-9 Mounting 4-9
priority 9-17 Power connections 4-12, 4-12
Installing IDU-E and R units 4-8
F Package Contents 4-4
Factory settings IDU-C
revert to 8-1, 8-22, 9-22 Package Contents 4-4
FEC 2-10, 2-11, A-1, A-1 IDU-E or IDU-R package contents 4-4
Forward Error Correction, see FEC Indoor Unit, see IDU
Installation
G Menu and Toolbar Functionality 6-3
Post Configuration main window 7-13
Gateway 8-2
Post Installation main window 2-30
Telnet display 8-26
see Link, Installation
GSU A-7
Installation Mode 8-2, 8-2, 8-17
Cascaded Sites 11-3
Installing
Configuring 11-5
BRS 16-1
Installation 11-4
Interference
Kit 11-4
caused by collocated units 10-2
Preferences 11-12
Inventory 8-1, 8-11
Redundancy 11-3
Displaying 8-8
Software Update 11-13
IP address 8-2
Telnet Support 11-12
Telnet display 8-26

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release2.5.00 Index 2

 J Alarms
Active summary 9-18
Jitter Buffer 2-23 Error detection and 9-18
output
K saved
9-20
9-18
Key Features of Radio Link Compatibility 9-3
Advanced Air Interface 1-4 Trap messages 9-3
Air Interface 1-4 Events Log 9-9
Capacity 1-4 Events log 9-14
Combo Frequency Products 1-4 Events references
E1/T1 + Ethernet in one Solution 1-3 trap
Installation and management 1-6 background color 9-17
Multi-band Products 1-4 default colors 9-17
Range performance 1-5 Preferences 9-17
Security 1-6 saving 9-17
SFP support 1-6 Monitor log 9-9, 9-9
Spectral Efficiency 1-4 saving 9-9
Transmission (Tx) power 1-4 Performance data, explained 9-12
Performance monitoring 9-8
L Performance Reports 9-10
LBC 9-8 Remote Power Fail Indication 9-20
Browser warnings 21-6 “Dying-Gasp” circuit 9-20
Calculations 21-2 Throughput Checking 9-8
Climactic C Factors 21-12 Troubleshooting 9-20
described 21-1 Installation 5-9
Fresnel Zone, described 21-3 ODU
Internal data 21-1 Mast and Wall 17-1
Running 21-5 Step 1 - Start Wizard 2-3
User input 21-1 Step 2 - System Parameters 2-3
License key Step 3 - Channel Settings 2-7
band 1-8 Step 4 - Tx Power and Antenna Settings
License Key, entering 20-5 Background 2-9
Lightning and Grounding Guidelines 18-1 Step 4 - Tx Power and Antennas
Link Settings 2-9
Budget Calculator, see LBC Step 5 - Hub Site Synchronization Settings
Configuration 2-16
Step 1 - Start the Wizard 7-3 Step 6 - Services 2-16
Step 2 - System Parameters 7-3 Step 7 - TDM Clock Configuration 2-27
Step 3 - Channel Settings 7-4 Link ID 2-4, 5-11, 8-26, 9-20, 9-21, 9-21
Step 4 - Tx Power and Antenna Settings Login 5-3
7-8 Login Errors
Step 5 - Hub Site Synchronization Settings Incorrect IP Address 5-7
7-10 Incorrect password 5-7
Step 6 - Services 7-10 Unsupported Device 5-6
Step 7 - TDM Clock Configuration 7-11 Login showing Community Options 5-4
Step 8 - Configuration Summary and Exit Login showing user types 5-5
7-12 Manager Software 5-2
default frequency 2-7 Name 2-4
default Settings 5-11 Password 1-6, 9-21
Information 9-1 changing 2-5
Air Interface Thresholds Post Configuration main window 7-13
BBER Threshold 9-13 Post Installation main window 2-30
Ethernet Thresholds - Capacity 9-14 Site names 2-4
Ethernet Thresholds - Traffic 9-14 Link Budget Calculator, see LBC 9-8
RSL Threshold 9-13 Link ID 2-4, 5-11, 8-26, 9-20, 9-21, 9-21
TSL THreshold 9-13 Link Lock
Air Interface Thresholds, setting 9-13 described 8-11

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release2.5.00 Index 3

 Enable 8-12 Switching Logic 12-11
Link Site System Operation 12-14
Planning 3-1 MIB
Survey 3-1 About D-1
Stage 1 - Preliminary Survey 3-2 Community String D-2
Stage 2 - Physical Survey 3-3 Interface API D-1
Additional Indoor Site Requirements Parameters D-3
3-4 Private D-2
Additional Outdoor Site Requirements Private Parameters D-6
3-4 Reference D-1
Stage 3 - RF Survey 3-4 Supported Variables from the RFC 1213 D-4
Login Errors TDM D-3
Incorrect IP Address 5-7 Terminology D-1
Incorrect password 5-7 Traps D-23
Unsupported Device 5-6 Monitored Hot Standby, see MHS
loopback
activating 9-3 O
deactivate 9-5 ODU 1-7
Local Internal 9-7 Available products 1-8
Remote External 9-6 Backup and restore software 8-24
Remote Internal 9-6 Bridge Mode
aging time
M Connectorized
8-16
1-8
Management Connectorized Antenna 1-7
Addresses 8-5 described 1-7, 1-7
and trap addresses 8-1 form factors 1-7
Configuring the Site 8-2 Installation, Mast and Wall 17-1
Screen, Telnet 8-28 Integrated Antenna 1-7, 1-7
Manager Software Mounting Kit 17-1
Change log on password 5-8 Package Contents 4-3
Events Log 6-7 Preloading IP address 19-1
Installing 5-1 Products 1-8
Main window 6-1 Replacing 9-21
Details pane 6-4 With integrated antenna 1-11
Toolbar 6-2
main window 5-6 P
Monitor pane 6-5 Package, contents of 4-3
Ethernet Service Password
6-5 Link 1-6, 9-21
Radio Interface, 6-5 PC, Minimum Requirements 5-1
Radio signal strength 6-5 Performance
Off-line functionality 5-8 Monitor 9-2
Status Bar 6-7 Performance Monitoring, set time interval 9-9
Manual PoE
Chapters by Audience 1-13 Basic PoE Device 1-9
Terminology 1-14 Described 1-9
MHS Installing a link using 4-12
described 12-1 PoE device, see PoE
Installation Procedure 12-1, 12-1 Power over Ethernet, see PoE
Installing 12-3 Protection
Kit Contents 12-3 External Lightning Surge Suppressors 18-3
Maintaining 12-9 Grounding
IDU Replacement 12-9 Antenna cable 18-1
ODU Replacement 12-10 IDUs 18-2
Port pinout B-2 ODUs 18-2
Primary and secondary links 12-2 Internal ESD Protection circuits 18-7
provides 12-2

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release2.5.00 Index 4

 Q Bridge 8-15
Maximum information rate 8-19
QoS 23-1 Ports Mode 8-17
disabling 23-4 Ethernet PropertiesIDU Aging time 8-
Overview 23-1 16
setting up, ff 23-2 Functions 8-2
Inventory
R Menu bar
8-8
8-2
Radio Frame Pattern (RFP) Setting the date and time 8-13
General Considerations 10-9 View Air Iinterface details 8-3
General considerations 10-9 VLAN Settings 8-6
With HSS 10-8 Lost or forgotten VLAN ID 8-8
Without HSS 10-7 Priority number 8-7
Radio Link VLAN ID 8-7
Additional Tools and Materials Required 4-5 External Alarm Inputs 8-21
Air rates 2-11 Reset site 8-22
Connecting user equipment 4-13 Reset site to factory defaults 8-22
Hardware Installation Reset site, preserve current configuration
External Antennas 4-7 8-22
Indoor 4-8 Security Features 8-9
Lightning protection 4-8 Community Strings 8-10
Mounting U 4-9 Editing 8-10
ODU 4-7 Forgotten paswwords 8-11
Outdoor 4-7 Initial log on defaults 8-10
Outdoor connections 4-8 Default Gateway 8-6
Sequence 4-6 IP address 8-6, 8-6
Package Contents 4-3 Trap Destination 8-6
IDU 4-4 Software Upgarde
ODU 4-3 Multiple sites 15-3
Package contents Single Site 15-2
External Antennas 4-5 Software Upgrade 15-1
Radio Outdoor Unit, see ODU Spectrum View
Regional Notice described 5-11
French Canadian G-1 using 22-1
Replacing an ODU 9-21
T
S TDM Services
Safety Practices iii-iv, 4-1 Clock configuration 2-27
Grounding 4-1 Evaluation 2-26
Preventing overexposure to RF energy 4-1 in Link Budget calculation 21-1
Security Jitter Buffer 2-23
Link Lock 8-11 Loopbacks 9-3
Selecting channel 2-7 modulation rate 2-23
SFP over internet with SFP C-1
device C-1 selection 2-20
support, described C-1 TDD in MIB D-3
Site Telnet commands 8-26
Configuration Throughput display 6-6
Backup Files Trap message 9-16
backup to 8-24 Technical Specifications
Backup files Air Interface, general A-1
restore from 8-24 Configuration A-1
Configuration with Telnet 8-25 EMC A-3, A-5, A-6, A-7, A-7
Dialog Environmental A-3, A-5
Change Tx Power 8-4 Mechanical A-2
Ethernet Properties 8-15 Power A-2, A-3, A-4, A-4, A-4, A-4, A-4, A-4
Configuring Radio A-1

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release2.5.00 Index 5

 Safety A-3, A-5
Telnet configuration 8-25
TDM 8-26
Time Division Duplex 10-8
Trap messages 9-3
Trunk Ports
pinout B-2
typical installation 4-6

U
User equipment, connecting 2-7

V
VLAN
configuration 14-6
Port Functionality 14-2
QinQ 14-2
tagging 14-1
terminology 14-1
VLAN for Ethernet services 8-18
VLAN for Ethernet services, ff 13-1, 14-1, 23-1

W
Wiring Specifications B-1
Alarm
Connector
IDU-C B-3
Connectors
User Port B-2
LAN
Ports B-2
ODU-IDU Cable B-1
Ports
LAN B-2
User Port Connectors B-2

RADWIN 2000 User Manual Release2.5.00 Index 6